Home

STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual

1. If such a para type element has been created as a block component then pressing the Enter key in Authentic View causes another para type element to be appended within the same listitem Otherwise pressing the Enter key causes another listitem to be appended e f nested lists are allowed by the schema you must define global templates for the list type elements o1 u1 etc making sure to create the listitem type element s as lists Given below is the HTML Preview of part of a list that includes nested lists 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 118 How To Use Lists 1 This document is a list containing one OL Ordered List or Numbered List and one UL Unordered List or Bulletted List e The OL is presented first e The UL is presented after the OL As you will have noticed the previous listitem contained a nested list which was a UL or bulletted list This second listitem of the OL has two paragraphs The paragraph you are reading now is the second of these two paragraphs Note that in order to insert or append a listitem in Authentic View the user must place the cursor in a listitem of the appropriate list For example if the cursor is in a listitem of a nested list appending a listitem will append the listitem to this nested list To append a listitem to the top level list the user must place the cursor in a listitem of the top level list before appending a listitem
2. 0 Shares 1500 12 of Office 4 of Company Summarizing the employees in departments Place the cursor in the footer of the First column and click fain or Table Join Cell Right four times in order to combine these cells into one cell Type in Employees Insert an Auto Calculation to count the number of department employees The XPath expression will be count Person Insert an Auto Calculation to count the number of department employees as a percentage of employees in that office The XPath expression will be round count Person div count Department Person The round function is used to round off the result of the Auto Calculation Insert an Auto Calculation to count the number of department employees as a percentage of employees in the whole company The XPath expression will be round count Person div count Office Department Person 100 Insert text so that your output reads Employees X Y of Office Company where X v and z are the Auto Calculations you have created Format the entire footer text suitably The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this 100 Z of Administration rm First Last Title Vernon Callaby Office Manager Frank Further Accounts Receivable Loby Matise Accounting Manager Employees 3 20 of Office 8 of Company Listing the non shareholders by department
3. Import whitespace text Imports and preserves the whitespace of imported text Import empty cells from table list Imports empty cells from HTML tables or lists STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Properties 275 8 10 Properties The Properties menu allows you to edit the properties of e the HTML and PDF output pages and e avariety of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet components such as tables lists and data entry devices These properties are desribed in the following sections 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 276 User Reference Properties 8 10 1 HTML Page The HTML Page command allows you to define certain properties of the output HTML page These are the page title which appears in the title bar of the HTML page and the colors of the links in the document Edit Properties Page layout 3 x hyperlink color visited hyperlink color active hyperlink color Cancel Note The properties defined here take precedence over the individual HTML element settings STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Properties 277 8 10 2 PDF Page The PDF Page command allows you to specify the PDF page size and margins as well as the page numbering to use PDF Page Properties x Paper r Size Predefined Letter x Width 8 5in Height iin m Margins Top 0 73in Bottom 0 73in Multiple pages Norm
4. STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use PDF processing and page layout 153 Bookmarks Nan hull Organization Chart 2 G 7 2 E Signatures 1of4 gt M 826x11 69in Design Cover Page XSLT Sees HTML aie XSL FO PDF Pri The following points should be noted e The cover page has the same page dimensions as those you have defined for the rest of the PDF document under Properties PDF Page e A blank second page is automatically inserted into the PDF as the reverse side of the cover page e You can use any of the components or formatting methods available in the Design window 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 154 How To Use PDF processing and page layout 5 11 3 PDF headers and footers Headers and footers are defined using the same method as for the cover page A single header footer can be defined for all pages by using the Header All Footer All icons or different headers footers can be defined for odd and even pages using the Header Odd Footer Odd icons and Header Even Footer Even icons To specify the same header for all pages do the following Click the Header All icon to access the Header All definition window The default header template shown below appears H Desc EMail Name Person Q italic Page page number Ea para strong c amp Page Layout PDF G Cover Page E Hea
5. 2004 Altova GmbH Index 383 Moving schema tree nodes 343 in HTML to XML conversion 343 Multiline input field 109 creating in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 109 Multiple node instances 346 in HTML to XML conversion 346 Multi user 365 N Namespace prefixes in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 98 101 Namespaces 96 and imported schemas 96 and namespace prefixes 96 and qualified elements and attributes 96 and schemas with a single namespace 98 and schemas with multiple namespaces 101 in DTDs and XML Schemas 95 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 95 98 101 Nested lists 115 creating in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 115 Network 361 communications 361 365 traffic 361 365 Node settings 256 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 256 Nodes 350 352 creating HTML content as in HTML to XML 350 352 selecting in STYLEVISION 178 Non roman writing system 362 Numbered lists 227 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 227 Numbering elements recursively 183 Numbers 139 formatting of 139 Numeric fields 139 formatting of 139 O Open 270 HTML file 270 recently used STYLEVISION files 212 for conversion to XML 332 349 Open STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 202 Order 367 Ordering Altova software 302 OS 360 Output files 171 from DB based STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 171 using command line to generate 172 P Page 149 numbering in PDF output 149 setting margins of for PDF output
6. STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Licensing and Distribution 375 10 b Software Activation Altova s Software may use your internal network and internet connection for the purpose of transmitting license related data at the time of installation registration or update to an Altova operated license server and validating the authenticity of the license related data in order to protect Altova against unlicensed or illegal use of the Software Activation is based on the exchange of license related data between your computer and the Altova license server You agree that Altova may use these measures and you agree to follow any applicable requirements c LiveUpdate Altova provides a new LiveUpdate notification service to you which is free of charge Altova may use your internal network and internet connection for the purpose of transmitting license related data to an Altova operated LiveUpdate server to validate your license at appropriate intervals and determine if there is any update available for you d Use of Data The terms and conditions of the Privacy Policy are set out in full at http www altova com privacy and are incorporated by reference into this Software License Agreement By your acceptance of the terms of this Software License Agreement or use of the Software you authorize the collection use and disclosure of information collected by Altova for the purposes provided for in this Software Licen
7. User and Reference Manual p stulevision 5S n ALTOVA wuualtava com Copyright 1998 2004 Altova GmbH All rights reserved Use of this software is governed by and subject to an Altova software license agreement XMILSPY STYLEVISION AUTHENTIC MAPFORCE and ALTOVA are trademarks registered in numerous countries of Altova GmbH Patent s pending XML XSL XHTML and W3C are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the world Wide Web Consortium marks of the WSC are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio UNICODE and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc This software contains material that iz 91334 1338 Dun daz S oftware Ltd all rights reserved The Sentry Spelling Checker Engine 92000 Wintertree Software Inc STLport 91333 2000 Boris Fomitchev 91934 Hewlett Packard Company 91936 37 Silicon Graphics Computer Systeme Inc 91337 Moscow Center For SPARC Technology Scintilla Copyright 91938 2002 by Neil Hodgson lt neilh zcintilla org gt All other names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual All rights reserved No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording taping or information storage and retrieval systems without the written permission of the publisher Products that are referred to in this document may be eith
8. ecd e tee etre roe ee RHET ER Eee ET RE CP ANY eRn 200 86 4 3 Open DET simer e derent ori ilt pone I ER EAEE 202 8 4 4 Import HTML File seccscscecssoscvatinsssscictnabovsds ounsetesaventensadecduavssestdonaatateosousedte 203 8 4 5 Assign Working XML File sees 204 8 4 6 Edit Schema Definition in XMLSPY eene 205 SALT SayeDestgnacunus uia eie ae D egere edo beoe p Ende iaiia 206 04 8 Save Desist AS cse etr tle e ort eibi boe ber e DI Da vide exes E NEEE 207 8 4 9 Save Authentic XML Data sees emen nenn 208 8 4 10 Save Generated Files 0 ce eescescssscesscsseceeesseceteceesoeesecesseessoeetseeesseeseeess 209 SALL Print PRE VIS RI 210 BA VD gum M 211 8 4 13 Most recently used files 0 ee eeceseeeeeeeeeeeseecseeceaeceaecnaecsaeeeseeeeeeeseeens 212 8 414 ER CE 213 B29 SI oren nione i Nne Ee aa EE REE SEEE EE EEE E EE e e 214 DOSE TS o E A E AEE A shdaareehee naeebeeneeseriee enlaces 215 0 2 Redo meua men r tare UM M UM CE 216 8 3 3 Find Mm 217 SIA Find NX ete aena a EEn EE ee EA EEE TENA 218 8 3 3 Edit DB Eilter iei e Ra 219 85 06 Clear DB Filter ies ice et s Reo acevo stance eaves A EE EIS 220 8 5 7 Edit Stylesheet Parameters sese nre 221 8 5 8 elect alll 152i tee eie eor pedea eere rede Ee E REC ii 222 Jo o P 223 Sol LET PEU Uc 224 STYLEVISION 2004
9. Microsoft Access ADO C Microsoft SQL Server ADO C Oracle ADO C MySQL ADD C Sybase ADO C BM DB2 ADO C Any ADO Next Cancel 2 Select the source DB type and click Next If you selected a DB type of MS Access then a dialog appears in which you can browse for the DB If you selected any other DB type option a dialog appears prompting you to build a connection string Browsing for an MS Access DB If you selected an MS Access DB the Select a MS Access Database dialog is displayed Do the following 1 Click Browse and select an existing MS Access database 2 Click Next The Select Base Table Information dialog is displayed Now you must select the database tables you wish to create in the XML Schema How to do this is described in the section Select Base Table Information below Building a connection string explicitly If you selected a DB type other than MS Access in the Select a Source Database dialog then a dialog appears prompting you to build an ADO connection string 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 162 How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION MS SQL Server ADO Connection String Generate a valid connection string by clicking on the build button Once the connection string is generated click on the next button to proceed Build Nest Cancel Build the ADO connection string as follows 1 In the ADO Connection String dialog click Build T
10. Name Person y bold y italic para H E Page Layout PDF Ep PH EH When you click on a component entry in any of the three trees that component entry is highlighted and the Design Window displays and highlights that tree or component bitsVltova sd Schema name and folder The document root which is not the same as the document element and occurs above it N Nae Element My Attribute Person Element with child elements Double clicking the element or the symbol to its left causes the element to expand collapse o E is gt T D amp 3 3 D DB Filter applied Applies only to top level data table elements in the schema tree Global templates The entries in the global templates list are the global elements in an XML Schema or all elements in a DTD 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 192 User Reference Symbols and icons T Global Templates Department Name Person Desc Q EMail Name Person F bold Y italic Q para Clicking an entry creates a default global template in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet A T sign appears on the right of the element symbol indicating that a global template for this element now exists The default template which merely processes the element s contents with an xs1 apply templates rule is now displayed in the Design Windo
11. Next mE 2 Select the source DB type and click Next If you selected a DB type of MS Access then a dialog appears in which you can browse for the DB If you selected any other DB type option a dialog appears prompting you to build a connection string see Connect to a DB and set up the SPS for details about building a connection string After you have selected the MS Access DB or built a connection string to the DB click Next 3 The next dialog is the Select Base Table Information dialog shown below which lists the data tables in the selected DB by owner STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 201 4 5 6 Select Base Table Information n x Database Owners Database Tables Table Views w Els Categories Els CustomerCustomerDemo Ele CustomerDemographics Eie Customers M Bg Employees L Es EmployeeTerritories C Els Order Details zl Els Orders zl Select All Deselect All Select All Deselect All m Selected T ables Table Ba Categories Eis Employees Cancel Select the database owner if any This causes a list of data table belonging to that owner to be displayed in the Database Tables pane In the Database Tables pane select the DB tables that you wish to include in the schema These tables are displayed in the Selected Tables pane Click Start A
12. Windows NT typically includes support for all common single byte writing systems in its Arial Times and Courier New fonts and will additionally include all required fonts for the writing System in your own country i e if you install the Japanese version of Windows NT you will automatically have fonts that support the Katakana Hiragana and Kanji writing systems as well as the input methods and dictionaries to enter Kanji and to switch between Katakana and Hiragana If you wish to edit any document from a foreign writing system you may want to install additional Windows NT components for that writing system or purchase special Unicode fonts for these writing systems such fonts are available from all leading type vendors STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Background Information 363 Please note that most fonts only contain a very specific subset of the entire Unicode range and are therefore typically targeted at the corresponding writing system Consequently you may encounter XML documents that contain unprintable characters because the font you have selected does not contain the required glyphs Therefore it can sometimes be very useful to have a font that covers the entire Unicode range especially when editing XML documents from all over the world The most universal font we have encountered is a typeface called Arial Unicode MS that has been created by Agfa Monotype for Microsoft This fo
13. 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 167 Edit Database Filters as first character in value signifies parameter Append AND Append OR Delete Parameters Cancel 4 Enter the expression for the criterion An expression consists of i a fiel d name available from the associated combo box ii an operator available from the associated combo box and iii a value to be entered directly For details of how to construct expressions see the Expressions in criteria section below 5 If you wish to add another criterion click the Append AND or Append OR button according to which logical operator AND or OR you wish to use to join the two criteria Then add the new criterion For details about the logical operators see the section Re ordering criteria in DB Filters Expressions in criteria Expressions in DB Filter criteria consist of a field name an operator and a value The available field names are the child elements of the selected top level data table the names of these fields are listed in a combo box see screenshot above The operators you can below Equal to lt gt Not equal to lt Less than lt Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to LIKE Phonetically alike NOT LIKE Phonetically not alike IS NULL Is empty NOT NULL Is not empty If IS NULL or NOT NULL is selected the Value field is disabled V
14. 59 Bifice Name contents Nang Street poste contents ipe street City pacity gt contents pacity State pastate gt contents pastate Zip _ pozip gt contents lt ipo zip 11 Drag the Phone element from the schema tree and drop it into the cell adjacent to that with Phone in it Select Create Contents from the popup 12 Do the same for the Fax and Email elements drop these elements into the appropriate cells selecting Create Contents in both cases Bifice Name contents Nang Street poste contents po street City pec contents pacity State pastate gt contents pastate Zip _fipo 2ip gt contents lt po zip Phone Phene contents Phone Fax Fax gt contents Fa E mail EMail gt contents lt EMail Check the Authentic or HTML Preview The static SPS table should look like this Nanonull Inc Street 119 Oakstreet Suite 4876 Phone 1 321 555 5155 City Vereno State DC at in wr 9 Zip 29213 mail office nanonull com The company was established in Vereno in 1995 and 1s privately held Nanonull has been actively involved in developing nanoelectronic software technologies since 1996 and released the first version of its products in February 1999 Adjusting the vertical alignment In the HTML Preview notice that the text in the two columns are not vertically aligned You can ensure alignment by vertically aligning b
15. I The Node Settings command allows you to define the properties of a node for display in Authentic View You can specify node settings for elements attributes the text content of elements and attributes and Auto Calculations Select the element attribute tag to assign node settings for the element or attribute Select the contents placeholder data entry device etc or Auto Calculation to assign node settings for text content and Auto Calculations If node settings have been specified for both an element attribute node as well as for its contents then the node settings for the contents takes precedence You can also call the Authentic Node Settings dialog by right clicking the node and selecting Authentic Node Settings Settings for Element Attribute nodes The following Authentic Node Settings dialog appears when an element or attribute is selected Authentic Node Settings Location my xi I Content is editable v Show add Name when XML Element is missing EE When adding this content add In Mixed Markup Mode C Allits children Hide markup Mandatory children C Show large markup C No children C Show small markup m User Info After you add the address element corresponding to your Location selection the Location field becomes non editable m Additional validation with XPath valid when all Path results are true Error message Path expression The name of
16. chapter appendix Global Templates Page Layout PDF e If both elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault are set to qualified attributes will not be prefixed e Inthe XML instance document however qualified attributes must explicitly specify a namespace prefix even if they are in the default namespace This is because the specification does not provide a mechanism for defaulting the namespaces of attributes So if attributes have to be qualified you should define a prefix for the namespace instead of using a default namespace Target namespace is defined with a prefix in the schema and all nodes are qualified In this schema example a target namespace is specified and the same namespace is defined with a prefix doc in the schema document Note also that elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault are setto qualified xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema targetNamespace http www altova com workarea doclite xmlns doc http www altova com workarea doclite elementFormDefault qualified attributeFormDefault qualified gt The schema tree in STYLEVISION for this schema will have all elements and attributes prefixed with doc since the elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault are set to qualified If attributeFormDefault is set to unqualified then the prefix will be hidden for attributes For the handling of namespace prefixing when elementFormDefault Is set to unqualified see below STYLE
17. e You as the person who designs the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet only enables XML tables It is the Authentic View user who inserts an XML table at his or her discretion e An XML table is structured and formatted in Authentic View that is by the Authentic View user The formatting of an XML table cannot be controlled through the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet e Inthe CALS table model the cols attribute of the Table group element t group specifies the number of columns in the table This attribute value pair is entered both attribute and value into the XML when the Authentic View user inserts an XML table This is because the user must specify the number of columns when inserting the table is inserted The value of this attribute changes automatically whenever a column is inserted appended or deleted using the GUI tools The co1s attribute is therefore not shown in the Attributes Entry Helper and its value therefore cannot be modified there STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Tables 131 e Data entered in the cells of an XML table is entered as content of the ent ry element in the case of a CALS table or td element HTML table or corresponding user defined element as the case may be e To obtain the content of XML tables in HTML and PDF output you must generate the XSLT using a File menu command and in it create a global template for the table element 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION
18. ice Name element 1 Place the cursor before the end tag of the OrgChart element and press Enter to insert a line break 2 Expand the office element in the schema tree 3 Drag the Office Name element to the location before the OrgChart end tag and create the element as contents Your Design Document will look like this O DrgChart Location of logo contents Name gt contents lt Name Dtfice Name ditor sme X rgChar 47 Notice that tags are created for all levels of the hierarchy between the O fice Name element and the containing OrgChart element The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this Nan hull Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Nanonull Inc Nanonull Partners Inc Nanonull Europe AG The Working XML File has three Office Name elements Notice that the contents of all three are output without any whitespace between elements Create the O ice Desc para element 1 Puta line break before the OrgChart end tag 2 Drag the Office Desc para element to the location before the OrgChart end tag and create the element as contents Your Design Document will look like this STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Processing element content for output 43 O DraChat gt Location of logo ihrer contents Name contents Name Difice Name contents Name Office Office aD esc Apara 4 contents parak Desck Office lt OrgCha
19. lt Location lt Address OSTSEE ipo steet gt contents pestres Then drag the descendant node into the context node as below Location 2 not amp ddress US v Location 2 address po street contents postee contents The red strikethrough disappears indicating that the XPath in this location is now correct Delete the contents placeholder of the context node to complete the operation since you do not want its content to appear separately 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 180 Tips Selective processing of siblings 6 3 Selective processing of siblings Function An important requirement while selecting from among sibling elements of the same name is the ability to select by position For example you may wish to output only the first of several para elements equivalent to the XPath para 1 In your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the way to do this is by using a conditional template and the position function Remember a predicate of the form para 1 is shorthand for para position 1 Usage To select and process a specific sibling from among several of the same name do the following 1 Create the conditional template around the contents placeholder of the element you want to output 2 The conditional template can occur anywhere in the document However you must ensure that the context node for the condition is the element for which you want to make the predicate
20. 120 How To Use Tables e In STYLEVISION generated XSLT stylesheets for HTML output SPS tables are marked up as HTML tables e In STYLEVISION generated XSLT stylesheets for XSL FO output SPS tables are marked up as XSL FO tables There are two types of SPS tables e Static tables are built up step by step by the person designing the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet After the table structure is created the content of each cell is defined separately The content of cells can come from random locations in the schema tree and even can be of different types It is important to realize that the rows of a static table are not intended to represent a repeating data structure This is why the table is said to be static it has a fixed structure that does not change with the XML content e Dynamic tables are intended for data structures that repeat and they are based on schema elements that have a substructure at least one child attribute or element Any element with a substructure repeats if there is more than one instance of it Each instance of the element would be a row in the dynamic table and all or some of its child elements or attributes would be the columns In Authentic View a dynamic table s structure reflects the content of the XML file and changes dynamically with the content XML tables An XML table is created by the Authentic View user as a data structure in the XML document The purpose of XML tables is to give the Authentic Vi
21. Addes 2 Checking the Node Settings You can make detailed and specific settings for each node in your document right click the node and click Authentic Node Settings or select Authentic Node Settings For example you might want to add User Info for some nodes Authentic View users will see this information when they mouseover the node The following screenshot shows how User Info is displayed in Authentic View STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Completing the stylesheet 91 p o change the logo key in a new location below Organization Chart Location of logo nanonull gif The pop up message that appears on mousing over the logo is the text keyed in as the User Info for this node Additional modifications Try the following modification yourself In the Office Summary Line just below the address of each office the number of departments and employees are listed as shown here Vereno Office Summary 4 departments 15 employees Modify the line so that the singular department employee appears when the corresponding value is one and the plural departments employees appears when the corresponding value is zero or more than one This modification is included in NanonullOrg sps should you need to look it up 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 5 How To Use 94 How To Use 5 How To Use This section describes how to use the more co
22. Leavellsed C Radio Button LeaveLeft The child elements and attributes of the element that has been dragged into the Design window are displayed In the Select attributes element list and can be created as columns of the table Deselect the child nodes that you do not want and select any attribute element you want to include as columns In the figure above the elements Shares LeaveTotal LeaveUsed and LeaveLeft have been deselected Note that columns are created only for child elements and attributes but for no descendant ona lower level 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 124 How To Use Tables Table grows down or right When a table grows top down this is what it would look like name street city state zip ipo zip gt contents contents contents contents contents postre poci Xipoestate lt iporzip ipo name contents ipozname ipo street contents ipo street ipe city contents pacity ipo state contents Xipo state lipe zip contents Xipe zip Headers and footers Columns can be given headers which will be the names of the column elements To include headers check the Create Header check box To include footers check the Create Footer check box Footers can only be created for tables that grow top down The footer of numeric columns will also sum each of these columns if the Summary for Numeric Fields check box is che
23. m Do you want to save the following files also J Schema DTD file W3C Schema C DTD XSLT file Iv XML file Make the selections as shown above and click Yes Save the XML Schema as article xsd and the XML file as article xmil You will also be asked whether you wish to save an SPS file Do so using the name article sps Now do the following e Open article xsdin an XML editor like XMLSPY 2004 or in a text editor You will see that it has only one element named Root This is because the schema tree in STYLEVISION from which it was generated contains only this one element e Nowopen article xml in an editor program The document has an empty Root element only This is because article xsd on which the XML file is based has just the one Root element The important point to note is that the XML document is generated on the basis of the schema you create in STYLEVISION In the next sections you will learn how to create a schema that generates the required XML file 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 334 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 10 1 3 Creating element nodes Renaming schema elements Rename the element Root to Article by right clicking Root in the schema tree selecting Rename and keying in the new name Article Notice that the name changes in the both the schema tree as well as the Design Document Creating HTML content as an element 1 Inthe Design Documen
24. 149 setting size of for PDF output 149 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 232 Page numbering 277 in PDF output 277 Page numbers 232 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 232 Page properties in PDF 149 Paragraph formats 225 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 225 Parameter defaults 166 in DB Filters 166 Parameters 221 creating and editing 221 how to use 146 in DB Filters 166 Parser 358 Paste 191 cut and copy in Designer 191 in STYLEVISION 214 Patterns 359 PDF 149 defining page properties 149 from STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 148 page properties and layout 148 designing 152 PDF in Enterprise Edition 13 and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 13 PDF issues 181 PDF output 154 headers and footers in 154 PDF page 277 specifying properties of in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 277 2004 Altova GmbH 384 Index PDF Preview 25 setting up in Stylesheet Designer 25 setting up the FO processor 295 Points to note 353 HTML to XML conversion 353 port 365 27799 365 80 361 position function 180 selecting with 180 Predefined format strings 282 for input formatting 282 Pre defined formats 47 196 226 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 47 196 226 removing 196 Predicates 180 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 180 Preview of Working XML file 34 in STYLEVISION 34 Price list 367 Print command 211 Print preview 210 of Working XML File 210 Processors 305 for download 305 Properties
25. 32 overview of GUL 317 project window in 317 removing elements in 324 status bar in 317 toolbar icons 318 toolbar in 317 usage of important features 323 XPath to selected node 317 Auto add Date Picker 264 Auto Calculation 65 235 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 65 235 how to use 132 in recursive numbering 183 B Background color 65 in Authentic tables 65 of rows in dynamic tables 126 Background Information 357 Base year 139 in input formatting 139 bgcolor 65 in Authentic tables 65 2004 Altova GmbH 378 Index BizTalk 358 359 Block components 47 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 47 Block formatting 194 in Authentic Stylesheets 194 Block Style Window 47 for formatting in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 47 Block styles 196 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 196 Bookmarks 62 233 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 62 233 Borders 252 of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet tables 252 Broadcast 365 Bullets and numbering 279 changing styles in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 279 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 227 Bulletted lists 227 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 227 Button 109 creating in Authentic Stylesheets 109 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 114 C C 360 CALS tables 128 261 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 128 261 Cell 250 split horizontally 250 split vertically 251 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet tables 126 Cellpadding 253 in STYLEVISIO
26. C Check Box C Radio Button 6 Click the ipo name entry in the Select attributes elements box to deselect it 7 Inthe Table Growth option select the Left Right radio button Notice that the option for creating a Footer is automatically disabled it is enabled only when the dynamic table grows top down Click OK This inserts a dynamic SPS table in the first cell of the static SPS table you just created 8 Setthe cellspacing for the outer static table to 0 and the border for the inner dynamic table to 0 in the Table Properties for each Then format the field names as shown below Your Design Document will now look like this Bifice Name contents Namg Street postres contents postee City pacity gt contents lt ipa city State pastate gt contents po state Zip lpezp contents ipo zip 9 Place the cursor in the second column of the outer static table and click ES or select Table Insert Table In the Insert Table dialog define the table as having 2 columns and 3 rows This creates a nested static table in the second column of the outer static table 10 Click in the first column of the new static table and enter the text Phone Fax and E mail respectively in each row of the first column as shown below and make the font bold In the Table Properties dialog set the table border to 0 STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Inserting a static SPS table
27. Condition This pops up the Edit XPath expression dialog STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Conditional Templates 77 Edit XPath expression Expression Select Schema Attribute or Element Select Operator Select Function Selection Orgchart Office Departm Operands _Description Function any equal boolean any Q EMail ai any not equal ceiling number WebStore number less concat string st number greater concat string st number less or equal contains string i Department number greaterorequ count nodes Q Name number add false Person number subtract floornumber id number multiply lastf O First i number divide local name number modulo local name nod CustomerSup Notice that in the Select Schema Attribute or Element window the First element is highlighted in gray This indicates that for the XPath expression you are creating the context node is the First element 6 Double click the Shares element to insert it into the Expression field Then select the gt operator and type in the value 0 Your XPath expression should be Shares gt 0 Click OK to create the condition 7 Makethe contents placeholder bold This means that if the condition is evaluated as true i e if the content of Shares which is a numeric field is a number greater than 0 then the content of First will be displayed in bold The Firs
28. HTML Table Properties x v Enable XML tables in Authentic Description Default User defined Table element table Table caption title Table group tgroup Table header thead Table footer tfoot Table body Cell with nested table entrytbl Notice the following e Four elements in the HTML content model are not present in the CALS table model caption th tr td These elements do not appear as default elements in the dialog when the XML table type is switched to CALS e The default CALS table elements that do not exist in the schema are colored red Those CALS table model elements that do exist in the table element s content model appear black e Inthe CALS table model the default names of the row element and cell or column element are row and ent ry respectively If no mapping to schema elements is defined then these element names are displayed in red In the dialog however row and entry have been mapped to tr and td this causes both the Default and User defined elements to be displayed in black If you wish to use the CALS table model you should alter the schema to properly include the missing elements and attributes Once you have selected the appropriate table model click OK XML tables are now ready to be used in Authentic View Note The following general points about XML tables should be noted e The table element can only be inserted at locations in the XML document where the schema allows the table element
29. HTML and PDF Preview Windows You can then generate HTML and PDF output based on your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet design STYLEVISION 2004 also enables you to import an HTML file and convert it to an XML file The STYLEVISION 2004 icon 9 will appear in your Start Programs menu after the application has been installed Authentic View in Altova Products Authentic View is a WYSIWYG view that enables users to edit XML documents in a GUI Authentic View is available as a view in the following Altova products XMLSPY 2004 Enterprise Professional and Home editions AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition AUTHENTIC 2004 Browser Edition STYLEVISION 2004 as a preview window Usage of Authentic View is described in the Authentic View documentation STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets for standard industry schemas Altova s Authentic View package includes STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets for a number of standard industry schemas Users can therefore immediately create an XML document based on a standard schema in Authentic View The figure below shows a partial Authentic View of the NCA Invoice 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 6 Introduction About STYLEVISION NCA XML Invoice This 1s a template for the NCA Invoice used to define a add document D Invoice Type Proforma Final Debit Note detailed list of goods shipped or services rendered with an account of costs Information created could consist of parties assoicated
30. If you wish to do so please choose this node with an XPath statement below PDEMEPEEFPNGUNG GN NN NR RR RR Schema 4 Build or enter the XPath expression 5 If you wish to update a node select the node by clicking the Schema button and then the required node For examples of how to use Auto Calculations see Using Auto Calculation 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 236 User Reference Insert 8 6 13 Condition The Condition command enables you to insert a condition in a conditional template at the cursor point or around the selection A conditional template consists of one or more conditions and each condition has specific processing rules associated with it A condition can be inserted at any point in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The first condition you insert creates the conditional template subsequently conditions can be added to the same conditional template Use the Insert Condition command to insert a condition The location in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet determines the context node for the XPath expression used to specify the condition When you specify the XPath expression you can specify it as an absolute XPath or relative to the context node A node is tested against each condition in turn The first condition that is evaluated as being true for a node causes the processing rules associated with that condition to be applied to that node the conditional
31. In PDF output a page break is inserted at the specified locations Page Number Click Page Number to insert the current page number in the PDF output The page number appears as a block i e as a separate line or as an inline embedded in document text depending on where in the document the page number has been inserted For example if the page number is inserted within a paragraph element then the page number appears inline within the paragraph If on the other hand the page number is inserted say between two elements then it appears on a separate line by itself STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Insert 233 8 6 10 Bookmark The Bookmark command allows you to insert a bookmark or anchor anywhere in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet A bookmark can be inserted around any STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component or it can be inserted independently of a node A bookmark can be referenced by a Hyperlink To insert a bookmark do the following 1 Select any STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component or place the cursor at the location where you wish to create the bookmark 2 Select Insert Bookmark or right click and select Insert Bookmark or use the shortcut CTRL G 3 In the Insert Bookmark dialog enter a name for the bookmark in the Name field If there are more bookmarks on the page they are displayed in the Other bookmarks on this page window 4 Click OK The bookmark is def
32. Insert the Address ipo city element as contents before the Auto Calculation placeholders and append the words Office Summary so that the line in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet now looks similar to this Address gipo city POTICO R Do clup ddress eri EAA count Depart Format the inserted components as required The corresponding line in the Authentic and HTML Previews should look something like this STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Auto Calculation 67 Street 119 Oakstreet Suite 4876 City Vereno State amp Zip DC 29213 Vereno Office Summary 4 departments 15 employees The company was established in Vereno in 1995 and 1s privately software technologies since 1996 and released the first version of Including the leave details The objective is to allow the Authentic View user to edit the LeaveTotal and LeaveUsed entry for each employee The LeaveLeft is auto calculated LeaveTotal minus LeaveUsed and displayed Appending the LeaveTotal LeaveUsed and LeaveLeft columns 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the dynamic table for the Person element and click Table Append Column or the Eg icon thrice to create three new columns 2 Typein Leave Total Leave Used and Leave Left as the headers of the three appended columns respectively 3 Format the headers appropriately 4 Drag the LeaveTotal and LeaveUsed elements from the schema tree into the Leave Total and
33. So if you wish to select the first para element then the context node for the condition must be para This means that the condition must be created directly within the para element tags 3 Forthe condition create an XPath expression that checks the position of the element for example position 1 The Design Document will look like this P position contents Z The above steps do the following e Foreach para element check whether the position is 1 e fthe position is 1 then output the contents of this para element e If the position is not 1 then do not process this para element STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tips XSL FO and PDF issues 181 6 4 XSL FO and PDF issues Fonts For font related issues see PDF Fonts Tables All table cells in the PDF output are assigned a default padding of 3pt To replace this value globally for all cells specify the required cellpadding value in the Table tab of the Table Properties dialog To change the cellpadding of individual cells or of separate padding directions of individual cells place the cursor in the relevant cell and specify a value for the required cellpadding attribute in the Layout tab of the Block Style window To quickly specify or change the dimensions of tables rows and columns drag the relevant borders as required However if you require PDF output it is better to specify the individual width measures so that they ad
34. The changes in the global template will be applied to all the element occurrences that use this particular global template Removing a Global Template To remove a global template do the following 1 Select the Design window tab 2 Inthe Schema Window from the list of Global Templates right click the global template you wish to remove 3 Select Remove Global Template This removes the global template Caution Use this command with care since it not only removes the global template but also removes any element type occurrence that is currently using this global template If you wish to not have these element occurrences deleted then ensure that you switch these occurrences to use a local template before you remove the global template STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Data entry devices 109 5 3 Data entry devices Function STYLEVISION enables you to add data entry devices into a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet In Authentic View when data is entered into a data entry device it is inserted into the XML document as element content or as an attribute s value Data entry devices enable you to constrain the data that goes into the XML document and are therefore a useful way of improving data integrity General mechanism Given below is a list of data entry devices you can use together with an explanation of how data is entered in the XML file for each device Data Ent
35. The vertical extent of the header and footer is equal to the top margin and bottom margin of the PDF page respectively which are defined in Properties PDF Page If you wish to modify the vertical extent of the header or footer you must change the top or bottom margin respectively The extents of the header and footer that you define must not exceed the height of the top margin and bottom margin respectively You can define a header footer either i for all pages or ii for even and odd pages separately Page numbering starts with the number you specify in the PDF page properties dialog click Properties PDF Page To obtain vertical spacing within a header footer you can use i the table padding property click Table Properties for a global padding or ii insert table rows and manipulate their vertical heights by a dragging the row borders or entering a number without units or a percentage for the height attribute in the Table Cell tab of the Table Properties dialog To obtain horizontal spacing within a header footer either insert table columns or change column widths by dragging borders or entering a number without units or a percentage for the width attribute in the Table Cell tab of the Table Properties dialog For alignment of cell content click the alignment icon in the toolbar or enter a value for the align attribute of the Table Cell tab of the Table Properties dialog For vertical alignment of cell conte
36. Y Year y year base 1930 see Note below M Month D Day W Week number d Weekday number 1 to 7 i Day in the year 1 to 366 h Hour 0 to 23 H Hour 1 to 12 m Minute S Second AM AM or PM am am or pm AD AD or BC ad ad or bc CE CE or BCE ce ce or bce STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Input Formatting 143 Field Type Explanation Weekday Weekday Sunday Monday WEEKDAY Weekday SUNDAY MONDAY weekday Weekday sunday monday Wkd Weekday Sun Mon WKD Weekday SUN MON wkd Weekday sun mon Month Month January February MONTH Month JANUARY FEBRUARY month Month january february Mon Month Jan Feb MON Month JAN FEB mon Month jan feb Field length The following points should be noted When fields such as Y M and m are used the exact length is output When a field type is repeated then the length is what is specified in the formatting For example if you specify YYYYYY then the first two redundant spaces are filled with Os See also Base Year below The Authentic View user is not allowed to add more digits than are specified in the format If the length of a pre existing value in the XML file exceeds the length specified in the format the entire value is displayed the user will however not be allowed to enter more digits The asterisk symbo
37. during the connection process you can specify what data tables in the DB should be filtered out e This creates i an XML Schema that is displayed in the Schema Window in tree form and ii a STYLEVISION internal XML file that contains data from the database e You can define top level filters in STYLEVISION to restrict the data imported into the XML File e ASTYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is created from the schema tree by dragging and dropping nodes in the Design Window as described in this documentation e The internal XML file created from the database is displayed in the HTML and PDF preview windows according to the design rules specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet e After saving the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you can generate the XML Schema XML HTML and PDF files via the command line Note DB based STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets cannot be used with Authentic View since Authentic View is used to edit XML files not DBs STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction STYLEVISION and HTML PDF output 13 2 6 STYLEVISION and HTML PDF output In STYLEVISION you can generate XSLT stylesheets for output to HTML and XSL FO from your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet See figure in Uses of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets for an overview All presentation properties formatting layout hyperlinking etc in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet are translated into the corresponding HTML and XSL FO markup T
38. enter the URI of the resource or select a resource on your local network by using the Browse button If the resource contains parsed data it must be an XML file i e it must have a xm1 extension Alternatively the resource can be a binary file such as a GIF file e f the entity type is PUBLIC you must additionaly enter a system identifier in this field 6 The NDATA entry tells the processor that this entity is not to be parsed but to be sent to the appropriate processor The NDATA field should therefore be used with unparsed entities only Dialog features You can append insert and delete entities by clicking the appropriate buttons You can also sort entities on the alphabetical value of any column by clicking the column header clicking once sorts in ascending order twice in descending order You can also resize the dialog box and the width of columns Limitations e Anentity contained within another entity is not resolved either in the dialog Authentic View or XSLT output and the ampersand character of such an entity is displayed in its escaped form i e amp amp e External entities are not resolved in Authentic View except in the case where an entity is an image file and it is entered as the value of an attribute of type ENTITY or ENTITIES Such entities are resolved when the document is processed with an XSLT generated from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 Use
39. ffice EMail element which is the e mail address of each office respectively 5 Right click the Person EMail element or its contents placeholder and follow the same steps as for the previous office e mail address Each person s e mail address is now a hyperlink which on being clicked generates an e mail with that person s e mail address in the Address field of the e mail 6 Inthe HTML and PDF documents click a few e mail addresses for various offices and persons For each a new e mail with the correct address will be opened The HTML Preview is shown below Administration First Last Title Email Vernon Callaby Office Manager 582 Iv callaby nanonull com Frank Further Accounts 471 f further nanonull com Recetvable Accounting Loby Matise Manager 963 Lmatise nanonull com 2016 Note In Authentic View hyperlinking is restricted to linking within the document STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Auto Calculation 65 4 9 Using Auto Calculation STYLEVISION includes an Auto Calculation function which enables you to display the result of a calculation in Authentic View HTML and PDF output The result is calculated using an XPath expression It changes dynamically when the value of a node used in the XPath expression changes The Auto Calculation function is a useful mechanism for including dynamic XML content and calculations base
40. first that the XPath expression is incorrect either in syntax or because it selects the wrong node nodeset or operates on the selected node nodeset in an unintended way second that some data input scenario has not been covered You should check all XPaths for correct syntax and correct processing and then test your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet with different data to check that various data input scenarios are covered Your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is correct in the first respect i e correctness of XPath expressions if you have followed this tutorial exactly There is however one significant data input scenario that has not been covered This is as follows Suppose the Authentic View user selects a value in the Location combo box say US and then creates the Address element and enters data into the child elements of Address Suppose now that the user for whatever reason changes the value in the Location combo box to EU The add Address EU prompt appears and the user does add the Address EU element The XML document now contains an Address element as well as an Address EU element this is invalid since the schema specifies that either of the two but not both must be present To cover this data input scenario you can take one of the following measures e Inform the Authentic View user about not adding a second address element in a pop up message that appears on mousing over the Location combo box You can enter the me
41. uncheck this check box In the event some part of the formatting you specify cannot be applied to the HTML and PDF outputs the Apply same format to XSLT 1 0 option will be grayed out 5 Click OK to apply the formatting STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Input Formatting 141 Note e An error in syntax causes the OK button in the Input Formatting dialog to be disabled and the Go to Error button to be enabled An error message is also displayed in the line below the combo box Clicking the Go to Error button takes you the point in the format statement where the syntax error is e If the result of an Auto Calculation does not match the fixed XML Schema format of that datatype then the formatting will be undefined and the Auto Calculation result will not be displayed correctly Insertion and Overwrite fields Depending on the datatype the Authentic View user will be able to insert or overwrite digits in the input field Fields which do not have any semantic meaning beyond their numerical significance such as integers and decimals are insertion fields Fields that do have some kind of semantic meaning such as years and days are overwrite fields Syntax for input formatting The basic syntax is prefix character s field suffix character s field optionl field option2 where prefix character s and suffix character s are optional specifiers used to control alignment and the display of positi
42. you set Multiple pages to Mirror Margins then the document pages are treated as facing pages This means that for even numbered pages left hand side pages the outer margin is the left margin while the right margin is the inner margin for odd numbered pages right hand size pages the outer margin is the right margin while the left margin is the inner margin Margins for Non Facing Pages Mirror Margins for Facing Pages Page numbering Set the required page number format by selecting one of the pre defined options from the drop down menu Set the page numbering to start with any positive integer If a cover page is defined page numbering starts with the first page after the cover page and a blank second page i e with the third page Otherwise page numbering starts with the first page Tip To output the number of the last page which could also be the total number of pages do the following STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use PDF processing and page layout 151 1 After you have completed designing your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in STYLEVISION generate the XSL FO stylesheet File Save generated XSL FO file 2 Openthe XSL FO file in text view At the end of the Root Template add an fo block element with an id say o block id end This block will be created on the last page of the document and acts as a marker 3 Where you want the number of the last page or possibly
43. 1 EH Place the cursor in the Employees column of the footer and click or Table Append Row The appended footer row has two cells just like the first row LE Place the cursor in the first cell and click 4 or Table Join Cell Right to join the two cells Type in Non Shareholders Drag the Person element into the footer as shown below 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 82 Tutorial Creating the Table Footer Employees count Pers round coun Non Shareholders Person contents Person 5 Insert a Condition after the start tag of the Person element The XPath expression should select those Person elements the current element that have a Share value of less than or equal to 0 or no Share element The XPath will be Shares lt 0 or not Shares his part of the footer in the Design Document will look like this Non Shareholders Person K contents Person 6 Deletethe contents placeholder of the Person element 7 Drag the First element into the Design Window and drop it between the tags of the condition you created in the previous step and create it as contents 8 Dothe same for the Last element This part of the footer row will now look like this Person gt Shares lt 0 gt First gt contents Fis Last contents Last 2 Person 9 We now want to put commas after each non shareholder except the last in the list To do this place the cursor afte
44. 101 5 1 3 Schemas with multiple namespaces Schema modules that belong to different namespaces can be combined by using the xsd import element xsd schema targetNamespace http www xmlspy com schemas orgchart xmlns xsd http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema xmlns org http www xmlspy com schemas orgchart xmlns ipo http www altova com IPO elementFormDefault qualified attributeFormDefault qualified gt lt xsd import namespace http www altova com IPO schemaLocation address xsd gt If the imported schema also has its elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault set to qualified all namespace prefixes are exposed as shown below C Program Files AltovasMLSPY2004 E xamples N anonull0rg xsd Jocument Root org raChart org CompanyLogo org href org Name S org Office org Name I org Desc org Location Hl orgAddress orgAddress_EU ipo export code ipo name ipo street Q ipocity ipo postcode Important The elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes apply to the schema they are in The values of these attributes in an importing schema do not override the values of these attributes in an imported schema Note also that the default value of these two attributes is unqualified Namespacing prefixing with combined schemas Since each schema has its own elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes mixed values across the various
45. 2000 version of STYLEVISION 2004 for editing XML files that make full use of Unicode Right to Left Writing Systems Please note that even under Windows NT 4 0 any text from a right to left writing system such as Hebrew or Arabic is not rendered correctly except in those countries that actually use right to left writing systems This is due to the fact that only the Hebrew and Arabic versions of Windows NT contains support for rendering and editing right to left text on the operating system layer STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Background Information 365 11 1 6 License Metering STYLEVISION 2004 has a built in license metering module that helps you in avoiding any unintentional violation of our license agreement STYLEVISION 2004 can be licensed either as a single user or multi user software and depending on your license this license metering module makes sure that no more than the licensed number of users are using STYLEVISION 2004 concurrently This license metering technology uses your local area network LAN to communicate between instances of STYLEVISION 2004 running on different computers Single license When STYLEVISION 2004 starts up it sends a short broadcast datagram to find any other instance of the product running on another computer in the same network segment If it doesn t get any response it will open a port for listening to other instances of STYLEVISION 2004 Other tha
46. 299 MEME TII 300 8 12 4 Registration urn ehe gne m Oe E de LE RU ER ei Casa ias 301 5 12 5 Order TOL cete eerte nette e er eere ee eerte oer evertere denas voee este ene eue aun 302 8 12 6 Support Centeio meccsre PR ERLEBT aee Ue Lo aH oH ERE PAR e ARRA 303 8 12 7 FAQ on the web cce oer cueachsccsesaaadensaanacesuaasaccuacsseeneas 304 8 12 8 Components download sese rennen nnne 305 8 12 9 XMLSPY on the Internet nnne ener innen 306 8 12 10 Japanese distributor eeessssesseeeeeeeeeeeeneenren rennen nennen nenne 307 8 12 11 About STYLBVISION sic Phas Here a e Plebe EE RH Certe nies 308 8 13 Context MENUS ss scccnnacsssorsodoceznssesadtasncust n EE E A EEEE REE NEE EEDE EER ESEE raS EAE SEES 309 Sll Change tO sorna et enda nre D EE E E a ea 310 9 Authentic View 314 91 Authentic View Interface ssessssssesseeeeeee eere ennt innen eini nennen 316 9 1 1 Overview of the GUI ee eccccccececsseceeneeceeeeeceeeeeesaeceeaaeceeneessaeesesaeceeaeeeaes 317 9 1 2 Authentic View toolbar icons 000 0 eeeceesseceeseecesceeeneeceeaeeceeeeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeeeaes 318 STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 9 2 10 10 1 10 2 11 11 2 9 1 3 Authentic View main window essent eene rennen 320 9 1 4 Authentic View context menus sessseesseeeeeeeeneen eene ener rennen 322 Authentic View HOW T9 i e tetti inen taei ev aae aaa 323 9 4 1 Using context menus e
47. CALS HTML Tables This pops up the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog shown below STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Tables 129 CALS HTML Table Properties EN xj v Enable XML tables in Authentic Type HTML Description Table element Table caption Table group Table header Column element Header element Cell with nested table Default User defined table caption thead tfoot tbody tr td th Now check the Enable XML tables in Authentic check box Then select the table model type either HTML or CALS The screenshot above shows the default names for the HTML table model If a default element name matches the corresponding table element name in your schema then the default name is colored black otherwise red The screenshot above indicates the following about the schema e there is an element called table with a content model the same as the HTML table model all default names appear black e allthe default HTML elements exist in the content model of table not one of the default names appears red The content model of a table element that follows the HTML model would not correspond with the CALS table model which is different Given below is a screenshot of the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog for the same schema as above with the table model type set to CALS 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 130 How To Use Tables CALS
48. EC Dee deae een 149 2 11 2 PDE Cover page unen ere ese HE donated DEPO Le REQUE ieee 152 5 11 3 PDF headers and footers inci terere eerte tne ep etr ebur nd 154 STA PDE f ts e rere dtt t EE E RR ERES E AUR ERE dees 156 5 12 D tabasesin SUYLEVISION tici n bed ee Rete ee ne Ee Rd Pe ne Ri edad 159 5 12 1 Connect to a DB and set up the SPS ssssesseeeeenee 161 112 2 DB Filters eic entem e ED edet oen eee e E eee eee 166 5 12 3 Generating files related to the DB serene 171 5 13 STYLEVISION from the command line eeeeeeeneeneeee eee 172 6 Tips 176 6 1 The schema for the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet eee 177 STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 6 2 Handling components in the Design Document eee 178 6 3 Selective processing of siblings sssseeeseeeeseeeeeeneenenen nennen ener 180 64 XSL FO and PDF 188U6S irren iei eterne HE eH Dus eet Heb Pe edF eee ERR Roe EE EA 181 6 5 Manually editing generated XSLT sese 182 6 6 Numbering elements recursively sese entente enne 183 7 Troubleshooting 186 8 User Reference 190 S1 Symbols atd ICONS serons e a ere e o grae TEE DE HEEL ESI Ea E Deb decet 191 8 2 Text and Block Style Windows esee nere nennen 194 8 9 bormattttip ione Pte Ree e beeper elias 196 8 4 File inacsdieenbegH HEURE EI RR HERE lees 198 MEM E 199 5 1 2 New from DB
49. Enumerations the enumerations are entered in automatically If you select Use List of Values you can insert append edit and delete any number of drop down list entries with their corresponding XML values If you wish to use a nodeset from the XML file select Use XPath Expression and enter or build an XPath to select the nodeset 3 Click OK to finish Note e Using XPath to select the items of the combo box drop down list enables you to create combo boxes with dynamic entries from the XML file itself e To reopen and edit the properties of a data entry device right click the data entry device not the node containing it and select the menu option Edit Properties Alternatively click Properties Selected object STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Data entry devices 113 5 3 3 Check boxes STYLEVISION Power StylesheetYou can create a check box as a data entry device This enables you to constrain user input to one of two choices In the Edit Check Box dialog shown below you specify the XML values to map to the checked and unchecked events i 2 for Element Name Cancel checked values true 1 Unchecked value false In the above screenshot an element called Name has been created as a check box If the Authentic View user checks the check box a value of t rue will be entered as the value of the element Name If the value is unchecked then the value false is entered as the
50. F to open the File menu and then the number of the file you wish to open for example pressing 1 will open the first file in the list 2 the second file and so on STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 213 8 4 14 Exit The Exit command is used to quit STYLEVISION If you have an open file with unsaved changes you will be prompted to save these changes 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 214 User Reference Edit 8 5 Edit The Edit menu contains the Undo and Redo commands which allow you to discard or restore your previous actions Other editing commands include Find Find Next and commands to edit database filters and variables The Edit menu also contains other standard editing commands such as Cut Ctrl Del Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V and Delete Del which are not described in this section Commands that are not applicable at a given location or for a given selection are grayed out in the menu The relevant commands are also available via the context menu that appears when you right click a component or at a cursor insertion point inside the document Additionally some commands are available as shortcuts and or toolbar icons STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Edit 215 8 5 1 Undo Hotkey CTRL Z The Undo command enables you to undo an editing change and contains support for an unlimited number of Undos Every action
51. Format this text in the Text Style Window and modify the line breaks at the bottom of the document to your satisfaction 3 Highlight the text and right click 4 From the popup menu that appears select Insert Hyperlink The Insert Hyperlink dialog appears STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Inserting bookmarks and hyperlinks 63 Insert Hyperlink Selection Go to top Above field shows the current Document selection Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Static Address Use above field to ent Absolute Path Browse Bookmark ace UNE cines I 5 Since you want to link to a bookmark click the Bookmark button The following dialog appears with all the bookmarks in the document listed Select Place in Document x Select an existent place in the document DK Cancel 6 Select the bookmark you want and click OK The bookmark appears as the static address of the hyperlink in the Insert Hyperlink dialog i e the hyperlink is explicitly specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and is not contained in the XML document 7 Click OK The hyperlink is created 8 In the previews go to the end of the document and click the hyperlink Go to top The view will change to the top of the document Inserting a hyperlink to a Website 1 Right click the logo image and in the popup menu that appears select Insert Hyperlink 2 Inthe Insert Hyperlink dialog that
52. GmbH Tutorial Setting up the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 35 Create Contents Create Paragraph Create Bullets and Numbering Create Image Create Input Field Create Multiline Input Field Create Combo Box Create Check Box Create Radio Button Create Button 3 Click the Create Contents option in the popup The Design Document now looks like this O DraChart Name contents Name CraChar A The Name element with a contents placeholder is inserted The contents placeholder represents the content of the Name element When the XML file is processed with this STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet for Authentic View HTML and PDF output the XML content of the Name element will be displayed Previewing the XML file To preview the Authentic View and HTML outputs we will use the Authentic Preview of STYLEVISION Authentic Preview shown below provides an accurate preview of both the Authentic View and HTML outputs The HTML Preview looks the same C Program Filessltova mlspysE xamples OrgChart sd 4 Document Root Organization Chart OrgChart CompanyLogo Q Name Office T Global Templates s Page Layout PDF If you look in the Text View of your Working XML File in an XML editor or text editor you will see that the contents of the OrgChart Name element is Organization Chart which is what appears in the Authentic Preview Also
53. Hide markup Mandatory children C Show large markup C No children C Show small markup m User Info After vou add the address element corresponding to your Location selection the Location field becomes non editable m Additional validation with Path valid when all Path results are true Path expression In the dialog leave the default settings unchanged The most important of these in this context is the Content is editable checkbox Remember that these settings are for the condition where neither Address nor Address_EU element exist you do want the user to be able to add content to the Location element Add text in the User Info field as shown in the figure above and click OK Right click the condition and select Add Copy For the new conditional template change the XPath to Address This is the conditional template to execute when an Address element exists 6 Select the Location node in this conditional template and in the Node Settings dialog uncheck the Content is editable checkbox and enter a suitable text message in the User Info field such as To edit this field the Address element of this Of fice element will have to be deleted using a Text View of the document 7 Repeat Steps 4 5 and 6 to create a third conditional template for cases where an Address_EU element exists OB co Checking the document formatting Compare the Authentic View and HTML and PDF Previews an
54. Hyperlinking from within the PDF is not supported 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 182 Tips Manually editing generated XSLT 6 5 Manually editing generated XSLT Occasionally you may wish to manually edit your XSLT stylesheets Typically this would be because you need some processing that is not currently available in STYLEVISION but is possible with some XSLT construct In such cases you can open the generated XSLT stylesheet in an XML editor and edit it as required However note the following e f you manually edit a generated XSLT and then need to modify your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet then you will need to generate the XSLT again and re do the manual edits e Manually editing the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet itself to include XSLT features not supported by STYLEVISION will not enable these XSLT features in Authentic View These features should only be inserted in the generated XSLT which can then be used separately to transform an XML document STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tips Numbering elements recursively 183 6 6 Numbering elements recursively You can number elements recursively by using Auto Calculations This helps you to get the number of an element in the form x v z As an example take a schema structure in which Elements AA have chidren BB which in turn have children cc To get the number of any cC element use the following three Auto Calculations with the CC e
55. Leave Used columns respectively and create them as contents 5 Inthe Leave Left column create an Auto Calculation LeaveTotal LeaveUsed See figure below Auto Calculation Path Expression Please enter a Path expression which will be used to calculate result value LeaveT otal LeaveUsed Update XML node in AUTHENTIC When working in amp UTHENTIC you may choose to automatically update some existing XML node with a result of expression above in order to keep it in your XML document If you wish to do so please choose this node with an Path statement below LeaveLeft Schema 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 68 Tutorial Using Auto Calculation 6 Set LeaveLeft as the node to be updated This updates the XML value of LeaveLeft whenever the Authentic View user edits the LeaveTotal Or LeaveUsed value 7 To accommodate the new column change the font size of all the element contents in the cell to 10pt 8 Change the table properties as follows Place the cursor by turn in each of the three new columns and for each column in the Table Properties dialog Column tab set align to center Reset all the column widths as follows First 1096 Last 13 Title 20 Ext 7 EMail 26 Leave Total 8 Leave Used 8 Leave Left 8 The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this Administration 3 IBI ESI i Leave Leave First Last Title Ext EL
56. Limitations In the Show Large Markup and Show Small Markup modes of Authentic View the tags for listitem type elements are not shown for the individual list items instead only one pair of start and end tags is shown at the beginning and end of the entire list 1 Employee 1 ls Newman est 2 Employee 2 lasPKilroy ast 3 Employee 3 Kingsley Ts In the figure above only one pair of person tags occur at the beginning and end of the list when in fact there are three separate person elements the listitems in this list Only styles displayed in the Bullets and Numbering dialog are currently supported User defined bullets and numbering is currently not supported For numbering nested lists so that list items have a form like 3 4 1 there is no option for such a format you would like in the Bullets and Numbering dialog To do this you will have to use Auto Calculations in a recursion mechanism For details see Numbering elements recursively STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Tables 119 5 5 Tables In a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet two types of tables are used SPS tables and XML tables There are crucial differences between the two types and it is important to understand these A detailed description of SPS tables and XML tables and instructions about how to use them follows in the next sections For now we look at the broad picture The illustration below shows the relationship
57. Manual 89 HIMEP Impott iee eer eR PORE a Ra Erie sees rad 269 5 9 1 Open HTME tile eere t eden i ia eiei aa 270 5 9 27 cAGGOPANENU J sccciis vesudesssneectsnntecdncssacecedsrtbesnavescdensantaudcesisucedssadecneeswecsens 271 s ME US drm 272 8 9 4 Appel ate He ori ne pL Pe PUR RUL i Ses EE EUR RE RH E RA em Sce ders 273 S93 SEMINE EP Se m 274 910 Properes coii oett E E E 275 10 1 HEMI Page iva eher ear aE Ea E TEE aa 276 S102 PDE Paberi see aeea meet E Ee iere eed tese PARE RO OEE 277 10 3 T ble i i deor tied ite e E Ren 278 8 10 4 Bullets and Numbering eene ener nennen 279 8 105 Edit DB Filters scis eterna 280 8 10 6 Clear DB Filters cete o ih nette tha e a a e ehe diet 281 8 10 7 Predefined Format Strings sees nennen 282 8 10 8 Selected ob ect 2 ER reno eesp rhet loe Le EH ERR EE po a HORA 284 NANI M 285 STLI JSpellAnp eter are ER Re E EENE E SERRE eR SNR S 286 8 112 Spelling Options uarie tegeret ie eed ot eser eed esae dot Haga ne eo re rides 287 811 3 lt CUSOMIZ Cz 290 8 11 4 XSL FO Options eceecceseeseseeceseeseeeecesecaeseeeesecsaeeseeeceaeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeeneeaes 295 IAM P 297 812 1 Table of contents xii eter ier ate Eee i 298 8 122 IMEX pan m
58. Q age Notice that a list item has been created for each instance of the person element and that the content of the entire person element which includes content of all child elements has been output 2 To modify the content of a list item add new content or text after the list item marker For instance to list only the last name of persons in the Design Document drop the last element from the schema tree as contents into the list item The contents of person last replaces the contents of the person element in the list item 4 Document Root E list person first Q last age The Authentic and HTML Previews looks like this 4 Document Root El list person Q first last age 3 You could modify the list item further as follows Add the text shown in the illustration below The equals to symbol indicates an Auto Calculation it returns the position of the current person element in the node set gt ist gt person gt 1 Employee position last gt contents sl lt person list 7 The HTML Preview looks like this 1 Employee 1 Newman 2 Employee 2 Kilroy 5 Employee 3 Kingsley Usage Advanced The following issues which are related to more complex list structures in schemas are considered e Schemas often have separate elements for numbered lists and for bulletted lists However they usually have a common listitem type eleme
59. Reference section of your product documentation STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Authentic View 315 e A tutorial for Authentic View is contained in the XMLSPY 2004 and AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition documentation This tutorial should be done with the Authentic View of XMLSPY 2004 or AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition not in the Authentic Preview of STYLEVISION which does not have all the functionality of XMLSPY 2004 or AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition Related documentation e Setting up the AUTHENTIC 2004 Browser Edition for Authentic View is described in the documentation for AUTHENTIC 2004 Browser Edition 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 316 Authentic View Authentic View Interface 9 1 Authentic View Interface In STYLEVISION you can preview the Authentic View of an XML document that has been assigned as the Working XML File to the currently open STYLEVISION 2004 This preview is available when you click the Authentic Preview tab in the Main Window of STYLEVISION In order for the Authentic Preview to be enabled you must assign the currently open STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet a Working XML File File Assign Working XML File This section provides an overview of the interface a description of the toolbar icons specific to Authentic View a description of viewing modes available in the main Authentic Preview window a description of the context menus available at various points in th
60. Row tab and delete the entry for bgcolor 3 Place the cursor in the header cell with the text First and in the Table Properties dialog go to the Cell tab and enter the value for bgcolor 4 Repeat Step 3 above for each header cell of the table The header in the PDF will now look like this Administration 3 Ume ee ele es E vernon calabwnanonibsom eue ee ee REDE ee Sa 7 IBERIA ioe 1mm 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 70 Tutorial Using Auto Calculation General Note Auto Calculation can also be created as an Input Field but the node is non editable in Authentic View as is the case with all Auto Calculations The Input Field in this case is intended only as a presentational device When an existing XML file is opened in Authentic View Auto Calculations are carried out and the correct Auto Calculation value is displayed in Authentic View However no value in the XML document will be modified It is only when the user edits a node that is used in the XPath expression of an Auto Calculation that XML values affected by such an Auto Calculation are changed When the Authentic View user appends a new Person element all mandatory children are created with empty content This is because adding mandatory children is the default setting for the Person node it can be changed in the Authentic Node Settings dialog for the Person node select the Person element in the Design Window and click
61. STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and the start and end of the node is indicated with tags 6 Right click NewNode in the schema tree and rename it to Title Notice that the node name in the tags in the Design Document also changes Note The following points should be noted e When you drag selected content into the Schema Window and prepare to drop the type of arrow that appears indicates whether the dragged node can be created as a child right and down arrow Ray or a sibling down arrow 4 e Inthe above example you converted the selection to elements This action changes the selected HTML content to a contents placeholder This kind of a node is indicated in the schema tree by the symbol Alternatively you could have selected Surround selection with element which would have created an element node around the selected HTML content but would have left the HTML content as static text nt dynamic text indicated by the contents placeholder Such an element node is indicated in the schema tree by the symbol Now click File Save to save the schema and XML files If you look at the XML file it should look something like this Article xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation C workarea html2xml article xsd gt lt Title gt A Sample Article lt Title gt lt Article gt The document element is Article and it has a child Title element which has the selected HTML content as
62. a single user may install and use the software on one computer If you have licensed the Software as part of suite of Altova software products collectively the Suite and have not installed each product individually then the Software License Agreement governs your use of all of the software included in the Suite b Server Use You may install one copy of the Software on your computer file server for the purpose of downloading and installing the Software onto other computers within your internal network up to the Permitted Number of computers No other network use is permitted including without limitation using the Software either directly or through commands data or instructions from or to a computer not part of your internal network for Internet or Web hosting services or by any user not licensed to use this copy of the Software through a valid license from Altova c Concurrent Use If you have purchased a Concurrent User version of the Software you may install the Software on any compatible computers up to ten 10 times the Permitted Number of users provided that only the Permitted Number of users actually use the Software at the same time The Permitted Number of concurrent users shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase the Software d Backup and Archival Copies You may make one backup and one archival copy of the Software provided your backup and archival copies are not installed or used on any computer and furt
63. and content relevant to the selected node Such manipulations include inserting appending or deleting a node adding entities or cutting and pasting content 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 318 Authentic View Authentic View Interface 9 1 2 Authentic View toolbar icons Icons in the Authentic View toolbar are command shortcuts Some icons will be already familiar to you from other Windows applications or your Altova product others might be new to you This section describes icons uniques to Authentic View In the description below related icons are grouped together Show hide XML markup Markup tags can be turned on or off in Authentic Preview x Hide markup Show all markup XML element attribute tags are shown with names Editing dynamic table structures Rows in a dynamic SPS table are repetitions of a data structure Each row represents an occurrence of a single element Each row therefore has the same XML substructure as the next The dynamic table editing commands manipulate the rows of a dynamic SPS table That is you can modify the number and order of the element occurrences You cannot however edit the columns of a dynamic SPS table since this would entail changing the substructure of individual element occurrences The icons for dynamic table editing commands appear in the toolbar and are also available in the Authentic menu ggsccm i Append row to table ca Insert row
64. and it is this formatting that is applied when the Authentic View user clicks the text state icon Create a text state icon for the bold element as follows 1 10 Click Authentic Text State Icons The Text State Icons dialog appears Text State Icons i x In order to make user editing experience in AUTHENTIC more comfortable you can define in this dialog toolbar buttons for specific Schema elements which modify test styles like bold italic Cancel Bitmap file Enter bold as the element name for which the text state icon is being created Enter bold bmp as the name of the bitmap file in the sps Picts folder in your application folder This bitmap will be used as the toolbar icon in Authentic View It is already present in the sps Picts folder so you do not have to create the bitmap Now append a row and add the italic element and italic bmp as the bitmap file for the italic icon also present in the sps Picts folder Save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet If you have NanonullOrg xml open in Authentic View close it and open it again to see the toolbar icons for bold and italic that you have created You cannot view these icons in Authentic Preview since Bold and ltalic buttons already exist in the STYLEVISION toolbar they apply to text formatting in the Design Window Help Bgeeugpmis The text state icons are grayed out when you open the file They will be enabled when you place the cursor
65. and no matter what the language The Unicode Standard has been adopted by such industry leaders as Apple HP IBM JustSystem Microsoft Oracle SAP Sun Base and many others Unicode is required by modern standards such as XML Java ECMAScript JavaScript LDAP CORBA 3 0 WML etc and is the official way to implement ISO IEC 10646 It is supported in many operating systems all modern browsers and many other products The emergence of the Unicode Standard and the availability of tools supporting it are among the most significant recent global software technology trends Incorporating Unicode into client server or multi tiered applications and web sites offers significant cost savings over the use of legacy character sets Unicode enables a single software product or a single web site to be targeted across multiple platforms languages and countries without re engineering It allows data to be transported through many different systems without corruption Even though XML is clearly defined to be based on the Unicode standard STYLEVISION 2004 is still one of the few XML development tools that fully implements Unicode Windows NT 4 0 amp Windows 2000 Starting with version 2 0 STYLEVISION 2004 provided full Unicode support in the Windows NT and Windows 2000 version of the software To edit any XML document from a non roman writing system you will however also need a font that supports the Unicode characters being used by that document
66. as the root element Save it and assign it as the Working XML File See The schema for the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet No Global Templates are displayed in the Global Templates list in the Schema Window when the schema is loaded Cause You are using an XML Schema not a DTD and there are no global elements in your XML Schema Solution If you wish to use global templates you must have the required elements created as global elements in your XML Schema This is not a requirement for DTDs all elements in a DTD are displayed in the Global Templates list In the XML Schema create the required elements as global elements and reference them where they are required See Global Templates The Block Style Window is disabled Cause The currently selected component in the Design window is not a block type component Solution All components in the Design Window are originally inline components No component is inherently a block component In order to make a component a block component you have to explicitly specify a block type formatting for the component Do this by selecting the component in the Design Window and assigning it a Predefined Format Insert Format or select an option in the Predefined Format combo box in the toolbar All predefined formats except Normal are block type See Formatting the components In the output multiple paragraphs run on and are displayed together as a single paragraph instead of as multiple parag
67. at the Altova website If an FO processor has not been installed with your version of STYLEVISION then you should install one in order to be able to preview the PDF output After installing an FO processor you need to make the required settings for it in STYLEVISION To do this in STYLEVISION click Tools XSL FO Options This opens the following dialog XSL FO XSL FO Generation FOP 0 20 5 compliant C Full usage of XSL F standard FO Processor C Program Files Altova FOP fop bat Please enter here path to fop bat file _Browse _ for XSL F transformations Location of FO processor executable Set the path to the executable of the FO processor Compliance level for XSL FO to PDF conversion The FO file that is generated by the XSLT transformation of the XML will typically be in compliance with the complete XSL FO specification This means that it makes use of the full range of objects properties and values available in the complete compliance level of the XSL FO specification Currently available FO processors however may not implement all these objects properties and values Such a processor may generate an error when required to process an unimplemented feature and cause the conversion to stop 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 26 Getting Started Setting up STYLEVISION If you set the compliance level to basic the currently supported FOP compliance leve
68. at this location in the result document 3 Optionally select a node in the schema document to update Moving Auto Calculations You can move an Auto Calculation to another location by clicking the Auto Calculation to select it and dragging it to the new location You can also use cut copy and paste to move copy an Auto Calculation Note however that the XPath will need to be changed if the context node in the new location is not the same as the previous one Updating an XML node You can pass the result of the Auto Calculation to a node in the XML file To do this in the Auto Calculation dialog enter an XPath to select the node to update For the node to be updated two conditions need to be fulfilled e The XPath expression for the Auto Calculation must include the value of an XML node as one of the operands e n Authentic View one of the XML node values used as an operand in the Auto Calculation expression must be modified If none of the dynamic XML operands is modified the Auto Calculation result will not update the specified node in the XML file 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 134 How To Use Conditional templates 5 7 Conditional templates Function To specify alternative processing according to the value of the XML content General mechanism e Aconditional template can be inserted anywhere in the Design Document at a cursor insertion point or around a component dynamic or sta
69. attributes Surround selection with element Convert selected tablejlist to elements Convert selected tablejlist to attributes Processes 2 Select Convert selected table list to elements and in the next dialog as dynamic list This creates a ListNode element that contains a child element NewNode T SEMEA Maan ATM Iman HTML to XML conversion Z Document Root Article involves two parallel processes C Title Para Unorderedlist Unorderediist e NewNede contents ListNode lt NewNode NewNode lt ListNode lt Unorderedist Notice how the list is displayed with a contents placeholder in the Design Document 3 Rename the NewNode element to Para Now save your STYLEVISION document and look at the newly saved XML file Article xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation C workarea html2xml article xsd gt lt Title gt A Sample Article lt Title gt lt Para gt This is a simple article marked up in HTML It is the example HTML document used to demonstrate how STYLEVISION can generate schema files XML files and stylesheets from an HTML document It contains headlines paragraphs two lists a table an image a hyperlink horizontal rules and inline italics A number of these elements have attributes lt Para gt lt Unorderedlist gt lt ListNode gt lt Para gt Cre
70. authors within a global template then this dynamic table must be created within the global template of the parent element of authors It cannot be created within the global template of the authors element 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 126 How To Use Tables 5 5 3 Formatting static and dynamic tables After they have been created static and dynamic tables can be formatted to a high degree of detail and precision The formatting mechanism is the same for both types of table Formatting properties are available at the table row column and cell levels To assign formatting properties place the cursor anywhere inside the table row column or cell you wish to format and click either Table Table Properties or Properties Table or the icon The following dialog appears x Table Row Column Cell align bgcolor Cancel border border collapse cellpadding cellspacing frame height page break after page break before rules table layout Click the required tab Table Row Column or Cell enter a value for the formatting property you want to set and click OK Cellpadding The following points about cellpadding in tables should be noted e Cellpadding can be specified globally for all cells of the table in the Table Properties dialog e Cellpadding for individual cells can be specified by placing the cursor in the relevant cell and specifying padding separately for
71. available main dictionaries is fixed You select a main dictionary from the drop down menu in the Dictionary Language combo box To edit the list of custom dictionaries used in a spell check or to edit the contents of a custom dictionary click the Custom Dictionaries button and select the required custom dictionary from the list of custom dictionaries When you click the Custom Dictionaries button the following dialog appears 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 288 User Reference Tools Custom Dictionaries x custom tlx Madify C app_terms tlx L1 nanonul tl Add Remove The default user dictionary is selected DK Cancel Editing the Custom Dictionaries list The listed custom dictionaries are part of the current dictionary e Toadd an existing custom dictionary to the list click the Add button then browse for the required dictionary and select it e Toremove a custom dictionary from the list and therefore from the current dictionary select the dictionary to be removed and click the Remove button This causes the dictionary to be removed from the list It is however not deleted and can be added to the list subsequently e Tocreate a new custom dictionary and add it to the list click the New button open the folder in which the new dictionary is to be created and give the new dictionary a name This file must have a t 1x suffix When you start a spell
72. cA state2 NY Cancel In the Edit Parameters dialog you can append or insert new parameters as well as edit existing parameters Parameter names must begin with a letter and can contain the characters A to Z a to z 0 to 9 and the underscore You then define where in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet a parameter is to be used You use parameters by calling them in XPath expressions with paramname For instance you could call a parameter in the XPath of an Auto Calculation e g concat www company com If your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is DB based then you can also use parameters as the values of DB Filter criteria The parameters however are declared and edited in the Edit Parameters dialog You can pass a parameter in the stylesheet a value from the command line see STYLEVISION from the command line for details This value overrides the default value of the parameter Parameters in DB Filters can also be passed new values via the command line Use of parameters Parameters are useful in the following situations Note If you wish to use one value in multiple locations In this case you can save the required value as a parameter value and use the parameter in all the required locations If you wish to pass a value to the stylesheet at processing time In the stylesheet you use a parameter with a default value At processing time you pass the desired value to the parameter via the command line Usin
73. can have static or dynamic content The entire structure of the table including that of headers and footers can be modified graphically in the Design Window One dimension of the table say the columns consists of the child elements of the node that is being created as a table the other the rows would then consist of the occurrences of the selected element Thus the first row would show the child nodes of the first occurrence the second row the child nodes of the second occurrence and so on Dynamic tables are ideal for presenting the content of repeating data structures The structure and formatting of a dynamic table are defined by you the designer of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The Authentic View user is not allowed to modify the formatting of the table but can insert append or delete occurrences of the element that has been created as the table i e modify one dimension of the table structure The Authentic View user can also edit the XML content dynamic content of the table except for Auto Calculation nodes you specify the input parameters of the Auto Calculation and nodes that you specify as non editable Inserting the Person element as a dynamic SPS table The Department element has two child elements Name and Person The Person element has several child elements First Last Title etc Since there are a number of people in a given department the Person element will occur several times The Person element is a repeat
74. can be undone and it is possible to undo one command after another till the previous Save command The Undo history is retained till the document is saved Also see Redo 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 216 User Reference Edit 8 5 2 Redo Hotkey CTRL Y The Redo command allows you to redo any number of previously undone commands By using the Undo and Redo commands you can step backward and forward through the history of commands Also see Undo STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Edit 217 8 5 3 Find di Hotkey Ctrl F The Find command allows you to find words or fragments of words in the Authentic Preview of the Working XML File and in the XSLT and XSL FO stylesheets The Find command is enabled only when the Authentic Preview or XSLT or XSL FO stylesheet view is selected Clicking the command pops up the following dialog X Find what f M Match whole word only Cancel Match case Note the following e Inthe Authentic Preview only the XML data is searched Text that is inserted via the XSLT is not searched e n the XSLT and XSL FO stylesheets all text is searched e To match the entry with whole words in the XML document check Match whole word only For example an entry of soft will find only the whole word soft it will not find for example the soft in software e To match the entry with fragments of words leave the Match who
75. check all dictionaries listed in the Custom Dictionaries list box are searched If you want to limit the search to specific dictionaries use the Remove command to remove form the list those dictionaries you do not want searched The default user dictionary is the custom dictionary to which unknown words encountered in a spell check are added when you click the Add to Dictionary command during the spell check Select the default user dictionary by clicking the check box next to the dictionary you wish to make the default user dictionary Modifying the contents of a custom dictionary To modify the content of a custom dictionary click the custom dictionary to be modified and click Modify This opens the dictionary editor shown below for the dictionary custom t 1x STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Tools 289 custom tlx Ix Word Nanonull Dictionary Vereno You can now add words to the dictionary and delete words To add a word place the cursor in the Word input field enter the word and click Add To delete a word select the word in the Dictionary pane and click Delete 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 290 User Reference Tools 8 11 3 Customize The customize command lets you customize STYLEVISION to suit your personal needs Commands The Commands tab of the Customize dialog allows you to place individual commands in the menu bar an
76. click the HTML Preview tab to see a browser preview of the HTML PDF Preview provides a preview of the PDF output For instructions about setting up STYLEVISION for PDF preview see the section Setting up STYLEVISION 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 36 Tutorial Setting up the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Bes dh A 4 LI t amp E 8BE 3 i Bookmarks Organization Chart 2 T c 2 E E The PDF page layout you see is a default layout How to customize the page layout is described in PDF processing and page layout in the How To section of this documentation Viewing the XSLT stylesheets To view the XSLT stylesheet for HTML output click the XSLT Stylesheet tab at the bottom of the Main Window It will look something like this syntax coloring has been added and indentation changed in the code below so as to aid readability lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xxs stylesheet version 1 0 xmlns xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform xmlns nl http www xmlspy com schemas orgchart xmlns ipo http www altova com IPO xmilns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance gt lt xsl template match gt html head lt body gt lt xsl for each select n1 0OrgChart gt lt xsl for each select n1 Name gt xsl apply templates gt lt xs1 for each gt lt xs1 for each gt lt body gt lt html gt lt xsl template gt lt
77. create a display for the image that is specified in the href attribute value Do the following 1 Drag the href attribute from the schema tree and drop it immediately after the start tag of the CompanyLogo element 2 Inthe pop up menu that appears select Create Image 3 Inthe Insert Image dialog shown below switch to the Dynamic tab Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Dynamic Address 1 Cchema Use above field to enter a dynamic Path Address Use button to select Schema content Treat as unparsed entity for XSLT transformation Cancel 4 Check that the Address field contains a period This is the XPath expression for the current node which is the href attribute this is the node that was dragged from the schema tree If there is no period then type in one 5 Click OK 6 Save your changes The Design Document will now look like this hret 4 E Ghref Location of logo EHER contents Name gt contents lt Name Oratharl 7 Notice that the href attribute appears twice in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet first as an image then as an input field This way the user can specify in the input field what image is to be used the specified image will be displayed immediately at the point where the image has been inserted STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Including an image 41 The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this Nan Pull Location o
78. created as an attribute of AltovaLink 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 346 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 10 1 10 Completing the import Same name siblings If you look at the Design Document you will notice that there are two HTML paragraphs that have not been imported In order to import these into the XML document do the following 1 Convert each HTML paragraph into an element at the correct location in the schema tree giving each a different name In the screenshot below you will see that both the paragraphs have been imported as NewNode elements in one case as Article NewNode and in the other as Section NewNode Schema from HTML Import Z Document Root Beo Article i norderedlist ection Title Para G rderedlist C ListNode Para Log Ti Par N xm u 5 utput pc hyped gt href me LinkText 2 Save the STYLEVISION document 3 Open the XML document and change the element names as required for example to Para Note In this case you should modify the generated schema to remove NewNode and possibly modify the properties of the Para element STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 347 10 1 11 Generating the output After you have completed the schema tree you can generate and save the schema XML file STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and XSLT file To do th
79. document are displayed in terms of schema elements and attributes which are dragged from the schema tree static components such as images non XML text etc are entered directly into the Design Window All components of the Design Document are displayed with the formatting and layout properties applied The Authentic Preview enables you to preview the Authentic View of the Working XML File 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 28 Getting Started STYLEVISION interface Dynamic changes that result from editing XML content are displayed in the Authentic Preview Changes you make to XML content in the Authentic Preview are saved to the Working XML File No Authentic Preview of DB files is available since DB files cannot be edited in Authentic View The XSLT Stylesheet view and XSL FO view show the text of the XSLT for HTML and XSLT for PDF respectively You are not allowed to edit the code displayed in the XSLT Stylesheet and XSL FO views Clicking the HTML or PDF Preview tab starts the respective transformation process and displays a preview of the output In the HTML preview data entry devices for XML data are displayed however the entry of XML data in the HTML Preview is not allowed Schema Window The Schema Window displays the following e A tree representation of the schema DTD or XML Schema in terms of its elements and attributes Elements and attributes are dragged from the Schema Window and placed at th
80. dynamic table Inserting dynamic XML content You can use the Auto Calculation function to insert content from any node in the document at another location and to save this data to another node The Auto Calculation function is a useful way to display dynamic content of some node at another location Note however that if a nodeset is selected by the XPath only the content of the first node of the nodeset is displayed Usage To insert an Auto Calculation do the following 1 Place the cursor as an insertion point at the location where the Auto Calculation result is to be displayed and click Insert Auto Calculation In the submenu that appears select Value if the result is to appear as plain text Input Field if it is to appear within an input field i e a text box or Multiline Input Field if in a multiline text box STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Auto Calculations 133 Auto Calculation Path Expression Please enter a XPath expression which will be used to calculate result value count Person m Update XML node in AUTHENTIC When working in AUTHENTIC you may choose to automatically update some existing XML node with a result of expression above in order to keep it in your XML document If you wish to do so please choose this node with an XPath statement below ee Schema 2 Enter the XPath for the Auto Calculation The result of the Auto Calculation will be displayed
81. each of the four components left top right and bottom in the Layout tab of the Block Style window e A default cellpadding of 3pt is assigned to each FO table cell This value can be overridden for all cells of the table by assigning a cellpadding value in the Table tab of the Table Properties dialog To assign cellpadding values for individual cells place the cursor in the relevant cell and specify padding separately for each of the four components left top right and bottom in the Layout tab of the Block Style window Note that no default cellpadding is assigned to HTML table cells Additional cell formatting In addition to the cell formatting available in the Table Properties dialog additional properties are available in the Block Style Window Place the cursor in the cell to be formatted and specify the value of the required property For example if you wish to put a right border on a cell place the cursor in the cell and in the Layout tab of the Block Style Window specify the color style and width for border right Giving alternating rows different background colors If you want alternating background colors for the rows of your dynamic table do the following STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Tables 127 1 Create two rows in your dynamic table and give each row a different bgcolor using the Table Properties dialog The first row represents the odd numbered rows the second row the even
82. element Elements for which Global Templates are allowed to be created When a schema is loaded into STYLEVISION a single Global Templates entry is created in the Schema Window This entry contains all the elements for which global template rules are allowed STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Global Templates 105 3 C Program FilessAltova mlspy El Document Root J raChart Global Templates Department Desc EMail Name Person italic Q para strong E Page Layout PDF Elements that appear in the Global Templates list are e All elements named in element declarations in a DTD e All elements declared as global elements in an XML Schema i e elements declared as children of the xs schema element Creating Global Templates Global templates can be created in either of two ways 1 By clicking an entry in the Global Templates list and defining properties for it Clicking an element listed under Global Templates will create an empty global template for that element An empty global template has only the apply templates gt rule specified but no other template rule that is it will process child elements but not do anything else such as format text 2 Byright clicking an item in the Design window and selecting Make Global Template A global template is created for that element type from the local template that is the global te
83. element of authors It cannot be created within the global template of the authors element Copying Global Template properties to a Local Template When an element uses a global template no local template exists You can however create a local template from the global template This is useful when you have a global template for an element and wish for example to change the formatting for a majority of element occurrences but retain the current global template properties for a few element occurrences In such a case you would copy the global template to local templates wherever required and then make the change in the global template To copy a global template to a local template in the Design window right click the element that uses the global template the element tags will be gray and click Copy Global Template Locally The global template is copied as the local template for the element and the newly created local template is applied The element tags turn from gray to beige indicating that the local template is being used The global template remains unchanged it can be used for other occurrences of that element type Editing a Global Template To change the formatting properties of a global template do the following 1 Select the Design window tab 2 Inthe Schema Window from the list of Global Templates click the global template you wish to edit 3 Enter the required values in the Text Style and or Block Style windows
84. element or an attribute When adding content add This setting is available when the selected node is an element It allows you to define what child elements of the selected element are inserted when the selected element is added The options are all child elements mandatory child elements and no child element In Mixed Markup Mode This setting is available when the selected node is an element or attribute and enables you to specify how individual nodes will be marked up in the mixed markup mode of Authentic View The following options exist large markup tags with node names small markup tags without node names and no markup User Info Text entered in this text box appears as a tooltip when the mouse pointer is placed over the node It is available when the selected node is an element attribute contents or an Auto Calculation If both the element attribute node as well as the contents node has User Info then the User Info for the contents node is displayed as the tooltip when the mouse is placed over the 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 258 User Reference Authentic node Additional validation with XPath This setting is available when the selected node is an element attribute or contents You can set an XPath expression to define the validity of the node s XML value An XML value that falls outside this defined range is invalid If the XML value of the node is invalid this is made known to
85. gt contents pozi Address ipe city contents pacity Specifying the widths of columns Check the Authentic and HTML Previews and PDF Preview so you can judge the optimal column widths to use After checking the previews do the following 1 PON Place the cursor anywhere in the first column of the outer static table but not in the nested dynamic table and click or Table Table Properties In the Table tab set table width to 100 In the Column tab set column width to 60 Place the cursor in the second column of the outer static table but not in the nested static table and click FH or Table Table Properties In the Column tab set column width to 40 For the nested dynamic table set the table width to 10096 width of first column to 3095 and width of second column to 7096 For the nested static table set table width to 100 width of first column to 25 and width of second column to 75 The Authentic and HTML Previews of the static SPS table should look like this Nanonull Inc Street 119 Oakstreet Suite 4876 Phone 1 321 555 5155 City Vereno Fax 1 321 5555155 9 State amp Zip DC 29213 E mail office nanonull com STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Inserting a static SPS table 61 The PDF Preview of the static SPS table should look like this Nanonull Inc Street 119 Oakstreet Suite 4876 Phone 1 321 5555 City Vere
86. inside a para element because the bold and italic elements are child elements of para In Authentic View now mark some text in a para element and click the bold icon The text turns bold Now mark some text and click the italic icon Nothing happens This is because you have not yet defined a global template for the italic element in your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet In the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet create a global template for the italic element and assign it an italic style in the Text Style Window Save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet In Authentic View refresh the view by switching to another view before switching back again All text that has been marked up as italic will now be displayed as italic 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 86 Tutorial Using Additional Validation 4 13 Using Additional Validation The Additional Validation feature allows you to check data on the basis of XPath expressions and to draw the attention of the Authentic View user to values that are outside the range of values specified by the XPath expression When an invalid value is entered or becomes the result of an auto calculation then the user is informed about this in two ways e On validating the document a validation error is reported e Optionally the value can be displayed in red and an error message will be displayed in a mouseover This feature is useful if you wish to inform users that certain values are not a
87. level tables in the database The children elements of DB are also created as entries in the Global Templates list in the Schema Window A temporary XML file is created each time either the HTML or PDF Preview tabs is clicked i e it functions as the Working XML File The temporary XML File has the structure of the XML Schema and contains data from the database Connecting to a DB is described in Connect to a DB and set up the SPS e Youcan build a Database DB Filter to restrict the data that is imported into the temporary XML file If after you have created or modified a DB Filter you click either the HTML or PDF Preview tabs the temporary XML file that is created will contain data imported according to the new filter criteria How to create a DB Filter is described in DB Filters e Designing the output document You can use the full range of STYLEVISION features described in this documentation to manipulate the DB data You can also preview the HTML and PDF outputs that will be generated by the design You design a DB based STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet just as you would design a schema based STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Note Data input to the DB via Authentic View is not supported Consequently the Authentic Preview tab of STYLEVISION is automatically disabled when an STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet based on a DB is created or opened Generating output files After you have completed the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you can save the follo
88. node in alternative ways depending on the value of any node in the XML document You can also use XPath expressions i to generate XML values from other XML content and ii to perform additional validation of nodes Formatting of content e Precise formatting can be applied to any static or dynamic component in the design document Formatting properties include text and block styling as well as those for complex table layouts The above provided a broad outline of how a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is designed The more detailed aspects are explained in subsequent sections STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Chapter 4 Tutorial 32 Tutorial Tutorial The aim of this tutorial is to create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet for a company with offices in the US and EU After the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet has been created it can be used to edit an XML document in Authentic View To do this the XML document must be linked to the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The following general points apply to this tutorial Previewing the outputs and checking for differences among them While you create the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in STYLEVISION you can directly preview the Authentic View HTML output and PDF output in STYLEVISION To do this you must assign a Working XML File to the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet There are small differences in the way different components are rendered in the Authentic View and HTML outpu
89. numbered rows 2 n each cell of each row fill in the contents In most cases the processing for contents of both rows will be the same Note You can create one row first then append a second row give the second row a different bgcolor and copy the contents of each cell of the first row to the corresponding cell of the second row Next you need the conditional templates that will put odd numbered rows in the first row and even numbered rows in the second row This is Step 3 below 3 Insert a condition for each cell around the contents of the cell Do this by right clicking the node tags in the cell or highlighting the content of the cell and selecting Insert Condition For the odd numbered rows the XPath will be position mod 2 0 For the even numbered rows the XPath will be position mod 2 0 You can extend the above principle to provide even more complex formatting Numbering the rows of a dynamic table You can number the rows of a dynamic table by using the position function of XPath To do this first insert a column in the table to hold the numbers then insert an Auto Calculation in the cell of this column with an XPath of position Since the context node is the element that corresponds to the row of the dynamic table the position function returns the position of each row element in the set of all row elements Table headers and footers in PDF output If a table flows over on to more than one page then the t
90. of SPS tables and XML tables to the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and to the XML document Authentic View XML Document XML Tables ON OFF Can be inserted as XML I elements by user of Authentic View STYLEVISION Power STYLEVISION Stylesheet for XML document Power Stylesheet SPS Table Generate XSLT from SPS ls m XSLT for XSL FO XSLT for HTML SPS Table co me mai SPS tables An SPS table is a component of a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and is created and formatted using STYLEVISION If present in a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet an SPS table appears in Authentic View as well as in the XSLT stylesheets you can generate with STYLEVISION An SPS table has no pre determined structure The structure is specified by the person who designs the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet An SPS table can be created anywhere in a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and any number of SPS tables can be created The structure of an SPS table is not represented as XML elements in the XML document SPS tables are entirely presentational devices In whatever kind of document an SPS table is rendered the table s structure is specified not in the markup vocabulary of the XML document but in the respective presentational vocabulary SPS tables occur in three types of output e Rendered in Authentic View a vocabulary specific to Authentic View is used to mark up SPS tables 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual
91. of the node Data entry devices are described in the section Data entry devices Inserting static components e Static components Additional components that are external to the XML source can be added to the design document These components could be text images table structures hyperlinks etc They are considered static because they are non XML Since they are sourced in the stylesheet they cannot be changed in the XML document they are inserted in the output document from the stylesheet at the time of transformation 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 30 Getting Started Document design process Processing of dynamic content e Basic processing When an element attribute is dropped into the design document you must decide in what form its content is to be displayed Some possibilities are as follows If the content model of the selected node is text you might want to create the content as a paragraph If the content model of the selected node is other elements you might want to create the selected element as a table with the child elements forming the columns of the table If the selected node is an attribute you might want to create the attribute as an image with the value of the attribute being the location of the image Or yet again you may wish to create the selected node as a data entry device to accept XML input in Authentic View e Advanced processing You can build conditional templates to process a
92. often correspond with a certain code page However if you open a Unicode encoded file e g UTF 8 or UTF 16 STYLEVISION 2004 will be unable to determine which code page to use and will thus bring up a dialog box that asks you to specify a code page to be used for editing In order to correctly view and edit a Unicode file under Windows 98 ME it is extremely important that you use this dialog box to a choose the correct code page that includes all characters contained in the file and b later select a font and script from the settings dialog box that also supports the same code page If the file contains any characters that are not available in the selected code page the user will receive an error message including a detailed list of offending characters before they will be replaced by a _ underscore S info dev xml test International sample sjis xml Your document contains 82 character s that cannot be represented in the ISO 8853 1 Latin 1 est European character set encoding If vou proceed these characters will be replaced by an under score character in the output file Do you wish to continue saving the document using this encoding The offending characters are t 0x307 A 6 033061 0x3083 0x304F L 0333057 x 0x3079 Z 0x308 B amp 033055 amp 0x3089 amp 033068 1 039 7F3 amp 013092 fe 0x305F T We therefore highly recommend using only the Windows NT
93. out during the processing of the command 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 6 Tips 176 Tips This section lists tips that enable you to use STYLEVISION features to advantage It also points out some common errors The section is divided into sub sections according to function Tips and commonly made errors for each heading are discussed together For more information about issues raised in this section refer to the relevant sections in the STYLEVISION How To Use section STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tips The schema for the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 177 6 1 The schema for the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet XML Schema and the Root Template If you use an XML Schema and not a DTD as your schema you will very likely have declared more than one global element In such a case it is not possible for STYLEVISION to determine which one of these global elements it should consider the document element top level element Consequently the Root Template will be empty and the global elements will only appear in the Global Templates list In order to enable STYLEVISION to select a document element assign a Working XML File File Assign Working XML File The document element of the Working XML File will then be used as the document element in the Root Template Modifying your schema It is best to finalize your schema before you start building a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SP
94. overview in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 119 Target namespaces 96 and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 96 TCP 365 Technical Information 357 Technical support for STYLEVISION 303 304 Template 34 saving XSLT files 34 Template XML file 14 for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 263 Text formatting 84 194 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 84 194 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 47 Text state icons 259 defining in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 259 for Authentic View 84 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 84 Text Style Window 47 for formatting in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 47 Text styles 196 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 196 Text View 32 of Working XML file 32 Tool tips 256 for Authentic View nodes 256 Tutorial 331 HTML to XML conversion 331 Tutorial STYLEVISION 32 U UCS 2 362 UCS 4 362 UDP 365 Undo 215 in STYLEVISION 215 in HTML to XML conversion 334 353 Unicode 362 capabilities 363 consortium 362 standard 362 support 362 Unicode characters 362 Universal font 362 Updating a node 132 with an Auto Calculation result 132 URL 361 Use 365 369 license 365 369 for Authentic View nodes 256 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 88 User Manual 1 Using Global Templates 103 UTF 16 363 UTF 8 362 363 2004 Altova GmbH 388 Index V Validating parser 358 Validation 256 additional in Authentic View 256 Validator 358 Vertical alignment of table cell c
95. placeholder is inserted 5 Format the placeholder as desired using the Text Style Window This part of the Design Document will look something like this 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 66 Tutorial Using Auto Calculation Name gt c ontents lt Name count Pers First Last Title Fitst gt contents Fist Las contents Last Tile contents Tie Note that the parentheses in the figure above have been inserted as a design item they are not placeholder delimiters 6 Check the HTML and PDF Previews The HTML Preview of the Auto Calculation result for the first department is shown below Administration 3 First Last Title Vernon Callaby Office Manager Frank Further Accounts Receivable Loby Matise Accounting Manager Auto calculating departments and employees in each office 1 2 Place the cursor in front of the start tag of the Office Desc element Note that the context node will therefore be Of fice Use the method above to create Auto Calculation values for the number of departments count Department and the number of employees in the department count Department Person Add the word departments after the auto calculation for the number of departments and employees after the auto calculation for the number of employees Format the line as required count Depart departments count Depart employees Peso para
96. row in which the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 243 8 7 6 Insert Column fe The Insert Column command inserts a column to the left of the column in which the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 244 User Reference Table 8 7 7 Delete Row ee The Delete Row command deletes the row in which the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 245 8 7 8 Delete Column B8 The Delete Column command deletes the column in which the cursor is This command applies to both static and dynamic tables 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 246 User Reference Table 8 7 9 Join Cell Left join The Join Cell Left command joins the cell in which the cursor is to the adjacent cell on the left The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell All property values of the cell to the left are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 247 8 7 10 Join Cell Right The Join Cell Right command joins the cell in which the cursor is to the cell on the right The contents of both cells are concatenated in the
97. schemas can produce complex namespace prefixing The rules followed by STYLEVISION are given in the tables below The tables below show how STYLEVISION displays the prefixes of elements and attributes from the main schema and the imported schema respectively according to e the values of the elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes of each and e whether the target namespace is set as the default namespace of the main schema or with a defined prefix Handling of element namespace prefixes The following table gives STYLEVISION s handling of the namespace prefixes of elements Note that Main Schema column describes the handling of Main Schema elements while the Imported Schema column describes the handling of Imported Schema elements EFD stands for elementFormDefault NS for Namespace 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 102 How To Use Namespaces elementFormDefault EFD Main Schema Imported Schema Target Namespace has Target Namespace is EFD qualified EFD Namespace Prefix Default NS no prefix unqualified Main Schema Prefix of all elements Prefix of all elements Prefix of all Prefix of global EFD qualified exposed exposed Target NS prefix elements elements is default no prefix exposed exposed Main Schema Prefix of global elements Prefixes of global Prefix of all Prefix of global EFD exposed elements exposed Target elements elements unqualified Namespac
98. see XSLT and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and Uses of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets Assigning a Working XML File is also the only way to resolve ambiguity about which global element in an XML Schema STYLEVISION should select as the Document Element see File New You will not be able to see an Authentic Preview or HTML or PDF Preview without assigning a Working XML File If a Working XML File has not been assigned and you click any preview tab you will be prompted to select a Working XML File Working XML File and databases If your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is related to a database then the data from the database is used in the HTML and PDF previews The Assign Working XML File command is disabled Changing the Working XML File To change the Working XML File click File Assign Working XML File select the new Working XML File The new Working XML File is assigned Save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet if you want to keep the change Unassigning the Working XML File Open the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in an XML editor such as XMLSPY 2004 or a plain text editor such as Notepad The root element of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is structure Delete the contents of the workingxmlfile attribute of structure so that the attribute has an empty value The start tag of the structure element should now look something like this structure version 2 schemafile test xsd workingxmlfile templatexmlfile gt S
99. see Formatting and Formatting the components STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Insert 227 8 6 4 Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering command allows you to create an element which has multiple instances as a list For example the persons in a department can be presented in a numbered list or the paragraphs in a section can be presented as a bulletted list In each case it is the element which is to appear as the listitem that must be created as the list The Bullets and Numbering command should be used as a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component type rather than inserted around an element or independently of one that is an element must be created as a list when it is dropped into the Design Document or changed to a list via the context menu obtained by right clicking a selected element The Bullets and Numbering dialog looks like this Bullets and Numbering E X Plain Bullets Numbering Cancel You can specify the required listitem marker in this dialog For a description of usage see Lists 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 228 User Reference Insert 8 6 5 Horizontal Line The Horizontal Line command inserts a horizontal rule at the cursor insertion point It is not available when a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component is selected By default the inserted rule is black and has a thickness of 1pt You can change the default
100. selected row up and down relative to the other rows of the table A row is selected by placing the cursor inside it Note Each row of a dynamic table represents an occurrence of a repeatable element within the set of all those repaetable elements 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 266 User Reference Authentic 8 8 7 Markup With the Markup command you can select between the Hide Markup and Show Full Markup modes In Hide Markup mode node tags are not displayed In Show Full Markup mode opening and closing tags with their node names are displayed STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Authentic 267 8 8 8 Define Entities With the Define Entities command you can define entities that you want to add to your XML document After an entity has been defined it can be inserted in the document by right clicking at the location where you wish to insert the entity and from the context menu that pops up selecting Insert Entity and then the name of the entity to be inserted An entity that you define with this command can be any of three types e Internal parsed entity The value of the entity is a text string that usually occurs frequently in the document Using an entity ensures that all occurrences are expanded to the valu defined here e External parsed entity This is an external XML file that will replace each occurrence of the entity The value of the entity is the URI of t
101. template is then exited If no condition is evaluated as true either a default processing if you have defined one is used for the node or no processing is used at all The order in which conditions are specified is therefore significant Right clicking a condition causes the following sub menu for the Condition command to appear Condition Show not Address Insert Show Address Show Address EU Cut Umschalt Entf Copy Strg C ae Paste Strq a Delete Add New Add Copy Remove All Block Styles Edit condition Delete The currently selected condition is indicated with a check mark The Edit condition command allows you to edit the XPath expression that defines this condition To edit another condition you have to first select the condition you wish to edit and then select the Edit condition command You can move the currently selected condition up or down the list of conditions in the conditional template by clicking the Move Up or Move Down commands The use of conditional templates is described with examples in Conditional templates in the How To Use section STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 237 8 7 Table The Table menu provides commands enabling you to insert a static table and to change the structure and properties for both static and dynamic tables You can edit edit table structure by appending inserting deleting joining an
102. the Republic of Austria excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 376 Appendices Licensing and Distribution way to your use of the Software resides in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna in connection with any such dispute or claim If you are located in the United States or are using the Software in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts USA excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software resides in the federal or state courts of Massachusetts and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the federal or state courts of Massachusetts in connection with any such dispute or claim If you are located outside of the European Union or the United States and are not using the Software in the United States then t
103. the XML document For example you could create a global template for the element para The advantage of using a global template for para would be that you define in one place the same processing rules for all para elements in the XML document When the XML is processed all para elements whether they occur in chapter section appendix Or footnote will be processed according to the rules defined in the global template for para You can also build variations for different para elements by using conditional templates within the global template Thus you can make a condition so that a para in a footnote has text that is two points smaller in size than text of other para elements When to use global templates and local templates If you use only global templates the processor will run through the XML document and for each element that it encounters that has a global template it will process that element accordingly So it will follow the XML document structure This is generally fine if your XML is a text document like an article because the structure of the output document will generally correspond to the XML document structure Since the Root Template specifies the structure of the output document you should use the Root Template and local templates within it if you wish to e Produce an output with a structure that is different from the XML document structure for example output an Appendix before the Chapters e Insert overarching externa
104. the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation communication systems or air traffic control equipment where the failure of the Software could lead to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage 2 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS Acknowledgement of Altova s Rights You acknowledge that the Software and any copies that you are authorized by Altova to make are the intellectual property of and are owned by Altova and its suppliers The structure organization and code of the Software are the valuable trade secrets and confidential information of Altova and its suppliers The Software is protected by STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Licensing and Distribution 371 copyright including without limitation by United States Copyright Law international treaty provisions and applicable laws in the country in which it is being used You acknowledge that Altova retains the ownership of all patents copyrights trade secrets trademarks and other intellectual property rights pertaining to the Software and that Altova s ownership rights extend to any images photographs animations videos audio music text and applets incorporated into the Software and all accompanying printed materials You will take no actions which adversely affect Altova s intellectual property rights in the Software Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice including identification of trad
105. the schema tree you can also add elements that do not correspond to any HTML content You can right click a node and from the context menu that pops up choose whether to add a child element insert a sibling element before the selected node or append a sibling element Now do the following 1 Right click the Art icle node and from the context menu select Add Child element Notice that Insert element and Append element are grayed out This is because Article is the document element and cannot have any sibling STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 337 Schema from HTML Import Document Root Rename Add Child element Insert element Append element Convert to attribute Convert to element Delete 2 Name the newly created node Unorderedlist We will create the unordered list in the next section 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 338 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 10 1 4 Importing an HTML list You can import the unorderedlist HTML list as an XML structure in the following way 1 Select the bulleted list in the Design Document and drop it into the schema tree as a child of Unorderedlist The following menu pops up i Schema from HTML Import 4 Document Root Q Article Title Para Unorderedlist Convert selection to elements Convert selection to
106. the total number of pages to be displayed insert lt fo page number citation ref id end within an lt fo block gt element if required 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 152 How To Use PDF processing and page layout 5 11 2 PDF cover page To create a cover page click the Cover Page item in the Page Layout PDF list in the Schema Window A sign appears to the left of Cover Page indicating that a cover page has been defined and will be created in the PDF When no sign is present then no cover page has been defined and none will be created To make a cover page do the following 1 2 With the Design window selected go to the document tree view expand the Page Layout PDF entry and click the Cover Page icon to access the cover page template T Global Templates s Page Layout PDF J Cover Page ET Header All Header Odd Header Even Footer All Footer Odd Footer Even In the template you can enter any of the components normally available in the Design window whether static or dynamic For example you can insert static or dynamic text or images static or dynamic tables and format components with the Text and Block Style windows An example is shown below Pd Si d N Nan null racha Name conten ts Nane acha Design Cover Page XSLT Stylesheet HTML Preview A XSL FO 3 Click the PDF Preview tab to see the result in the Preview window
107. this global template Very often it is best to use a combination of both the Root Template for control of structure and global templates for universal application of certain rules What you use depends entirely on the output you want from your XML Note that STYLEVISION allows you to apply global templates within the Root Template So you can define a default formatting in a global template and then use it or override it in the Root Template General mechanism e Alocal template defines the processing of one particular element in the Root Template e Aglobal template defines the processing of an element type For example a global template can be created for the element type title and this global template could then be used for any title element in the document e g book title chapter title section title etc e You can build variations in the global template by using conditional templates for particular elements for example book title could be given a different text color e lf an element used in the Root Template has a global template defined for it either the local template or the global template can be used e f an element only has a global template defined then in order for the template to be processed and produce output it must be reached It is reached if there are other local or global templates that specify processing for each element in the hierarchy starting from the root element and reaching down to this
108. to it then the spacing component will take effect but the text formatting component will not e The text formatting component of pre defined formats does not apply to data entry devices STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Formatting 197 e Only one pre defined format applies to a component at any given time Block Style properties Block style properties are assigned in the Block Style window When an element attribute is created it is created with the default pre defined format of Normal and is not a block To make the element attribute a block assign it any pre defined format other than Normal Caution When applying block styles within a table cell remember that the table cell is a block It may be that the component in the table cell is also a block you can find out by checking its pre defined formatting If the component is also a block be sure to select the correct block i e table cell block or component block Note that you can also apply table formatting through the Table Properties dialog Tip You do not need to make a component a block in order to apply certain block styles such as spacing to it You can apply such block styles in the Text Style window Text Style properties Text style properties are assigned in the Text Style window and the properties are assigned as inline markup surrounding the component in the markup of the output Text style properties therefore override b
109. values after inserting the rule by right clicking the rule and selecting Edit Properties The following dialog appears Edit Properties Horizontal Line f x 000000 Cancel Edit the color and thickness values as required and then click OK STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Insert 229 8 6 6 Contents The Contents command inserts the contents placeholder for that node This placeholder represents all the content of the element text element or mixed content or in the case of an attribute its value The contents placeholder corresponds to the xs1 apply templates rule of XSLT which causes the relevant templates to be applied to all child nodes including attribute and text nodes The contents placeholder can be formatted by selecting it and using a Predefined Format and or properties in the Text Style and or Block Style windows This formatting is visible in the Design Document and in the output it will be applied to the content of the node If another node from the schema tree is dropped into a node containing a contents placeholder then the existing contents placeholder is replaced by the new node The contents placeholder can be deleted by selecting it and pressing the Del key on the keyboard It can also be inserted for a node by placing the cursor inside the node tags right clicking and selecting Insert Contents Note You can create an empty tem
110. via the Select a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet button If a Template XML File has been assigned to that STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet then a template XML document is opened in Authentic View Unassigning the Template XML File Open the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in a plain text editor such as Notepad The root element of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is lt st ructure gt Delete the contents of the templatexml file attribute of structure so that the attribute has an empty value The start tag of the structure element should now look something like this structure version 2 schemafile test xsd workingxmlfile templatexmlfile gt Save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The Template XML File is now unassigned 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 264 User Reference Authentic 8 8 5 Auto add Date Picker This is a toggle command that switches the Auto add Date Picker ON and OFF When the Auto add Date Picker is ON any xs date datatype element that is created as contents or as an input field will have the Date Picker automatically inserted within the element tags and after the contents placeholder or input field Also see Date Picker in the How To Use section STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Authentic 265 8 8 6 Table The Table command allows you to manipulate the rows of a dynamic table You can append insert duplicate and delete rows and you can move the
111. xsl stylesheet gt To view the stylesheet for XSL FO output click the XSL FO tab at the bottom of the Main Window This is what it will look like syntax coloring added and indentation changed lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt xsl stylesheet version 1 0 xmlns xsl http www w3 org 1999 XSL Transform xmIns fo http www w3 org 1999 XSL Format xmlns ni http www xm spy com schemas orgchart xmlns ipo http www altova com IPO xmlns xsi http Www w3 org 2001 XxMLSchema instance lt xsl variable name fo layout master set gt lt fo layout master set gt lt fo simple age master master papes default page page height 11in page width 8 margin left 0 6in margin right 2A 6in gt lt fo region body margin top 0 79in margin bottom 0 79in gt lt fo simple page master gt lt fo layout master set gt xsl variable xsl template match gt STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Setting up the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 37 fo root xsl copy of select fo layout master set gt fo page sequence master reference default page initial page number z 1 format 1 gt fo flow flow name xs1 region body gt lt fo block gt lt xsl for each select n1 0rgChart gt lt xsl for each select n1 Name gt xsl apply templates gt lt xs1 for each gt lt xs1 for each gt lt fo block gt fo flow lt fo page sequ
112. your product Information on the following topics is given in this section Technical Background Information XML Parser Schema dialects OS and memory requirements Internet usage Unicode support License metering Licensing and Distribution e Electronic software distribution e Copyright e Software product license STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Background Information 357 11 1 Technical Background Information This chapter contains useful background information on the technical aspects of STYLEVISION 2004 If you run across a technical term in the remainder of this help system you may occasionally find a link to some of the background materials provided here 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 358 Appendices Technical Background Information 11 1 4 XML Parser When opening any XML document STYLEVISION 2004 uses its built in incremental validating parser to both check the document for well formedness and validate it against any specified DTD DCD XDR BizTalk or XSD Schema The same parser is also used while editing a document that refers to a DTD DCD XDR BizTalk or XSD Schema to provide intelligent editing help and immediately display any validation error that is encountered This is possible through the incremental design of the new parser that is optimized for the special needs of an integrated development environment The built in parser implements
113. 04 Altova GmbH How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 159 5 12 Databases in STYLEVISION In STYLEVISION you can create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS file based on a database This enables you to use STYLEVISION with databases in the following ways e As a reporting tool for databases you can view and manipulate DB data in a customized design e Togenerate an XML Schema having a structure based on the database e Togenerate an XML file with data from the database e Todesign and generate HTML and PDF reports containing data from the database in a customized design This section describes how you work with databases in STYLEVISION General mechanism Working with databases in STYLEVISION consists of two broad parts e Building a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet based on the database In this part you generate an XML Schema from the database design the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and preview the HTML and PDF outputs of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet using a Working XML File that is temporarily created from the DB data e Generating output from within the GUI and from the command line Building the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Building the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet involves the following steps e Connecting to a database and loading it into STYLEVISION What you load is a temporary XML Schema The XML Schema is created with a document element called DB The DB element contains children elements which correspond to the top
114. 166 DB tables 161 selecting for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet schema 161 DCD 358 359 Decimals 139 formatting of 139 Default user dictionary 287 for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet spell checks 287 Delete 239 table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 239 from table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 245 Delete command 214 in STYLEVISION 214 Delete row 244 from table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 244 Deleting 166 a DB Filter 166 in HTML to XML conversion 352 Deleting schema tree nodes 334 in HTML to XML conversion 334 Design Document 178 moving components 178 selecting nodes for placement 178 Design Window 191 symbols and icons 191 Dictionaries 287 for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet spell checks 287 Distribution 367 Document Content Description 359 Document element 332 in HTML to XML conversion 332 Document structure 16 overview 16 Document Type Definition 359 DTD 358 359 DTDs and namespaces 95 Dynamic components content 29 2004 Altova GmbH 380 Index Dynamic images 40 224 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 40 224 Dynamic tables 123 and global templates 123 editing 318 how to create 123 how to format 126 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 52 119 modifying properties of in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 52 E Edit menu 214 in STYLEVISION 214 Editing XSLT 182 manually 182 Electronic Software Distribution 367 Element 359 inserting in STYLEVISION Power Styl
115. 2004 User Manual 132 How To Use Auto Calculations 5 6 A Auto Calculations Function The Auto Calculation feature i displays the result of an XPath evaluation at any desired location in the output document and ii optionally updates a node in the XML document with the result of the XPath evaluation The Auto Calculation feature is a useful mechanism for including e Calculations based on string or number operations on dynamic data e Calculations based on the dynamic structure of the document relative position of a node etc e Inserting dynamic XML content at any location in the output document Calculations based on string or number operations The result of an XPath operation on dynamic node content can be displayed at any location in the document The result can also be saved to an XML node if in the Auto Calculation dialog you specify an XML node to update Calculations based on the dynamic structure of the document Since an XPath expression can also operate on aspects of the document structure the Auto Calculation function can be used to display meta information about a dynamically changing document structure For example you can use it to count the number of Person elements in an Office element and in this way obtain the total number of employees in an office The result is dynamically updated as the number of Person elements changes Or you can use the position function of XPath to dynamically insert row numbers in a
116. 275 menu in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 275 table 278 clear DB Filters 281 edit DB Filters 280 Q Qualifying elements and attributes 96 98 101 Quick reference 348 HTML to XML conversion 348 R Radio button 109 creating in Authentic Stylesheets 109 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 114 RAM 360 Recently used files 212 in STYLEVISION 212 Recursion 183 for numbering elements in parent context 183 Redo command 216 in STYLEVISION 216 Reference 348 HTML to XML conversion 348 Registering your Altova software 301 Registration 361 367 Removing pre defined formats 196 Renaming schema nodes 352 in HTML to XML conversion 352 Renaming schema tree nodes 334 in HTML to XML conversion 334 Rendering 364 Requirements 360 Reseller 367 Rest of Contents 230 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 230 Return key 196 and pre defined formats 196 Right to left 364 Root element 332 in HTML to XML conversion 332 Root template 16 description of 16 in HTML to XML conversion 332 353 is empty in schema tree 177 Row 240 append to table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 240 delete from table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 244 insert in table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 242 Rule 228 inserting in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 228 S Same name siblings 346 in HTML to XML conversion 346 Save 209 files generated from STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 209 Working XML File 208 in STYLEVISION 207 Save
117. 286 User Reference Tools 8 11 1 Spelling The Spelling Shift F7 command runs a spell check on the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The dialog shown below appears Words that are not present in the selected dictionary are displayed in the Not in Dictionary field of the dialog and highlighted in the Design Document Spelling English U 5 x Not in Dictionary Ignore Once Suggestions Ignore All i Add to Dictionary Change Change All Recheck Document Options You can then select an entry from the list in the Suggestions pane and click Change or Change All to change the highlighted instance of this spelling or all its instances respectively Double clicking a word in the Suggestions list causes it to replace the unknown word Alternatively you can ignore this instance of the unknown word Ignore Once or ignore all instances of this unknown word Ignore All or add this unknown word to the default user dictionary Add to Dictionary Adding the unknown word to the dictionary causes the spell checker to treat the word as correct and to pass on to the next word not found in the dictionary After all the words not found in the dictionary have been displayed in turn and an action taken for each the spell checker displays the message The spelling check is complete You can then recheck the document from the beginning Recheck Document or close the dialog Close The Options button opens t
118. 46 creating HTML content as nodes 350 352 creating schema tree attributes 343 delete node 334 generating output 347 global templates 353 HTML file import 332 moving nodes in the schema tree 343 multiple node instances 346 open HTML file 349 points to note 353 quick reference 348 renaming nodes in schema tree 334 Root Template 353 same name siblings 346 saving schema 333 saving the document 353 saving XML file 333 undo command 334 353 viewing generated schema 333 viewing generated XML 333 HTML to XML conversion 330 tutorial 331 Hyperlinks 345 in HTML to XML conversion 345 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 62 234 IANA 365 ICComNet 365 Icons 84 for Authentic View text 84 for formatting text in Authentic View 259 in Authentic Stylesheets 84 in STYLEVISION 191 Image formats 328 in Authentic View 328 Images 344 in HTML to XML conversion 344 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 40 224 Import 269 HTML 269 2004 Altova GmbH 382 Index Import 269 and namespaces 96 Importeds chemas 101 and namespace prefixing 101 Importing HTML 332 349 for conversion to XML 332 349 Input field 109 creating in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 109 how to use 111 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 38 Input formatting 282 defining format strings 282 Input methods 362 Insert 272 HTML import 272 in table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 243 Insert menu 223 STYLEVISION 223 Insert
119. 5 and 1s privately held Nanonull has been actively involved in developing nanoelectronic software technologies since 1996 and released the first version of its products in February 1999 Due to the fact that nanoelectronic software components are so small that nobody can see it the company 1s not well known to the public Note To control vertical spacing for text components use the line break feature in the Design Window and or the properties in the Position tab of the Text Style window Text formatting icons You can also make text bold italic or underlined by highlighting the text and then clicking the appropriate icon in the toolbar These icons are shortcuts to creating the required values in the Text Style Window Specifying Block Style properties Block Style properties are applied to blocks via the Block Style Window In order for this window to be enabled the selected component must be a block A component is specified as a block by assigning it any pre defined format other than Normal 1 Select the href element that has been created as an image not the one created as an Input Field by clicking its start tag 2 From the drop down Pre defined Format menu in the toolbar select Block div This makes the image display as a block and enables the Block Style Window 3 Place the cursor before the CompanyLogo start tag and press Backspace to remove the line break 4 Inthe Block Style Window select the Layout tab shown bel
120. 99 Due to the fact that nanoelectronic software components are so small that nobody can see it the company 1s not well known to the public Nanonull Partners Inc On March 1st 2000 Nanonull established it s new office in Brenton WLA This subsidiary primarily 1s responsible for marketing technical support and sales to key customers and partner networks 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 46 Tutorial Processing element content for output The PDF Preview will look like this Nan null Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Nanonull Inc The company was established in Vereno in 1995 and is privately held Nanonull has been actively involved in developing nanoelectronic software technologies since 1996 and released the first version of its products in February 1999 Due to the fact that nanoelectronic software components are so small that nobody can see it the company is not well known to the public Nanonull Partners Inc On March 1st 2000 Nanonull established it s new office in Brenton MA This subsidiary primarily is responsible for marketing technical support and sales to key customers and partner networks Notice that although the formatting in both previews is generally similar there are some differences These are because the two outputs have different defaults for their formatting properties You can override these defaults by explicitly specifying the formatting you want
121. ASSPATH org apache fop apps Fop c o conf userconfig xml 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Setting up font support in XEP Edit the file etc onts xm1 in the XEP installation directory To add support for Bodoni for example you should add entries similar to the following font name Bodoni embed true ttf C Windows Fonts bodoni ttf gt lt font gt lt font name BodoniBold embed true ttf C Windows Fonts bodonibd ttf gt lt font gt lt font name Bodoniltalic embed true ttf C Windows Fonts bodonii ttf gt lt font gt lt font name BodoniBoldItalic embed true ttf C Windows Fonts bodonibi ttf gt lt font gt For more details see XEP Configuring Fonts Note on font copyrights Font usage is subject to copyright laws and the conditions for use vary Before embedding a font especially if you are embedding the entire font make sure that you are allowed to do so under the license you have purchased for that font Character sets 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 158 How To Use PDF processing and page layout Note that the character sets of fonts differ from each other The Base 14 fonts cover the ISO 8859 1 characters plus the glyphs in the Symbol and Zapf Dingbats fonts If your document contains a character that is not covered by the Base 14 fonts then you will have to use a font that contains this character in its character set STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 20
122. Appendices 356 Technical Background Information eese rene en rennen 357 ILLL XML Parserzssoe het oia tede o e ei emer rds 358 11 1 2 Schema Dialects sos echter reet oa tn Leib Benet atate epe 359 11 1 3 OS amp Memory Requirements esee eene rennen 360 11 1 4 Internet Usage ee eet eerta tetra tette epe ttn tenete 361 11 1 5 Unicode Support nectit etie theories reb eec pe en rte buena 362 Windows NT 4 0 amp Windows 2000 eese 362 Windows DS M DET 363 Right to Left Writing DVSTOINS iine ee rave E Re Eri R ved COSE Re EE SPEC E vee che 364 11 1 6 License Metering eiit Ere eere teet eb in te eoi edente eden 365 Licensing and Distribution esee eren nennen rentrer 366 STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 11 2 1 Electronic Software Distribution seeeeeeeeeee nennen 11 2 2 Copyright 11 2 3 Software Product License Index STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 1 Welcome to STYLEVISION 2004 Welcome to STYLEVISION 2004 1 Welcome to STYLEVISION 2004 stylevision amp 2004 Enterprise Edition is an intuitive visual editing tool that enables Web developers to easily create STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and XSLT stylesheets STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets are used to control the display of and entry of data into XML documents in the Authentic View of Altova products XSLT stylesheets are used to trans
123. Authentic Node settings Any non mandatory child of the Person element is indicated with the prompt Add element name STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Conditional Templates 71 4 10 Using Conditional Templates A conditional template defines how a component is to be processed in the event that a specified condition is fulfilled Multiple conditions can be specified for a component thus allowing you to provide alternative ways to process a component for a range of conditions In this section of the tutorial you will create conditional templates for the following situations e Depending on whether an office is located in the US or Europe the address field will be structured differently e Inthe Office Summary statement a condition will be used to select the correct city element dependng on whether the US or EU address model is used e f an employee is a shareholder the employee s name will be displayed in bold Setting up alternative address content models based on a condition The objective is to display the appropriate address content model depending on whether the office is located in the US or European Union EU You will first create a combo box to accept input for the Location element US or EU and then create two conditional templates One conditional template defines that if the Location element has a value of US the address content model for US locations is used The other conditional
124. Authentic XML Data 208 2004 Altova GmbH Index 385 Save command 206 in STYLEVISION 206 Saving 353 HTML to XML conversion 353 in HTML to XML conversion 333 Schema 359 and Root Template 177 dialects 359 editing for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 205 editing in mid session 205 effect of changing name or location on STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 177 effect of modifying on STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 177 from DB 159 opening to create STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 34 saving in HTML to XML conversion 347 viewing output of HTML to XML conversion 333 in HTML to XML conversion 334 Schema Window 191 symbols and icons 191 Schemas 96 importing modules 96 popular industry standards and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 5 Schemas and namespaces 95 Select all 222 in STYLEVISION 222 Selected object in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 284 properties of 284 Selective processing 180 of siblings in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 180 Settings 274 HTML 274 Show large markup 318 320 Show mixed markup 318 320 Show small arkup 318 320 Siblings 180 processing selectively 180 SimpleType 359 Single user 365 SMTP 361 Software Product 365 368 369 Spell checker 286 for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 286 for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 287 Split cell 250 horizontally 250 vertically 251 SPS file 200 creating from database 200 creating from schema 199 SPS tables 318 editing dynami
125. Customer Support Department i Other Restrictions You may not loan rent lease sublicense distribute or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software to third parties except to the limited extent set forth in Section 3 You may not copy the Software except as expressly set forth above and any copies that you are permitted to make pursuant to this Software License Agreement must contain the same copyright patent and other intellectual property markings that appear on or in the Software You may not modify adapt or translate the Software You may not directly or indirectly encumber or suffer to exist any lien or security interest on the Software knowingly take any action that would cause the Software to be placed in the public domain or use the Software in any computer environment not specified in this Software License Agreement You will comply with applicable law and Altova s instructions regarding the use of the Software You agree to notify your employees and agents who may have access to the Software of the restrictions contained in this Software License Agreement and to ensure their compliance with these restrictions you agree that you are solely responsible for the accuracy and adequacy of the software for your intended use and you will indemnify and HOLD harmless ALTOVA from any 3rd party suit to the extent based upon the accuracy and adequacy of the software in your use without limitation The Software is not intended for use in
126. DB XML Data The Save Generated DB XML Data command generates and saves an XML file that is i conformant with the XML Schema imported from the DB and ii contains data from the DB If DB Filters have been defined in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet these are applied to the data import 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 210 User Reference File 8 4 11 Print Preview The Print Preview command opens a window containing a preview of the Authentic View of the Working XML File Note This option is disabled if the current STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based on a DB STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 211 8 4 12 Print The Print command prints the Authentic View of the Working XML File Note This option is disabled if the current STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based on a DB 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 212 User Reference File 8 4 13 Most recently used files The list of most recently used files shows the file name and path information for the nine most recently used files which you can select with the mouse Print Preview amp Print 1 OrgChart sps 2 l sps 3 CBTMenu_Schema_5 sps 4 CBTMenu_Schema_4 sps 5 HTML Orgchart sps 6 OrgChart sps 7 ExpReport sps 8 CBTMenu Schema 4 soll sps 9 C workarealjayantitest sps Exit To access these files using the keyboard press ALT
127. Database Filters as first character in value signifies E i Append AND Append Append Doe elete Parameters Cancel 3 To add criteria use the Append AND and Append OR buttons To move a criterion up or down use the arrow buttons To delete a criterion use the Delete button 4 Specify the criteria for the DB Filter Each criterion consists of three parts Field Name Operator Value The options for Field Names and Operators are available in combo boxes The value of the expression must be keyed in and may be a parameter indicated by a preceding character Also see e For details about creating and working with DB Filters DB Filters in the How To Use section e For details about using parameters DB Parameters for parameters in DB Filters and Parameters for parameters in the stylesheet 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 220 User Reference Edit 8 5 6 Clear DB Filter The Clear DB Filter command deletes the filter after asking for and receiving a confirmation from you For details about working with DB Filters see DB Filters in the How To Use section STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Edit 221 8 5 7 Edit Stylesheet Parameters The Edit Stylesheet Parameters command enables you to declare and edit parameters and their default values When you click this command the Edit Parameters dialog shown below pops up Edi
128. Department italic gt contents lt italic 9 Desc z EMail Name Person CY italic Color Text 2 Select the menu option Authentic Text State Icons This opens the Text State Icons dialog box 3 Click the button to add a new Text State icon 4 n the drop down menu of the combo box select the element for which you wish to create the Text State icon italic in this case and click OK Text State Icons content name icon name bold bmp Cancel 5 Double click in the icon name column and enter the name of the icon image that you wish to have displayed in the Authentic View toolbar 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 260 User Reference Authentic Text State Icons strong bold bmp italic italic bmp 6 Click OK to confirm 7 Place the icon image file bmp file in the sps Picts folder of your application folder content name icon name When you edit an XML document in Authentic View using this STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the icon image appears in the toolbar as a Text State icon If the Authentic View user selects text and clicks the icon the element represented by that icon is created around the selected text and the formatting you defined in the global template for that element is applied to the selected text STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Authentic 261 8 8 3 CAL
129. Each step of the process is described in detail in the tutorial that follows this section Import the HTML file into STYLEVISION The HTML will be displayed without markup tags in the Design Document view of STYLEVISION At the same time a schema tree with a single element a document element called Root is created in the Schema Window Create the schema tree by i dragging nodes from the HTML document to the required location in the schema tree and optionally ii adding your own nodes to the schema tree In the Design Window HTML content that has been used to build nodes in the schema tree will now be displayed with node tags around the content HTML content that has no corresponding schema node will continue to be displayed without tags In the Design Document assign formatting to nodes refine processing rules or add static content as required These modifications will have an effect only on the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and the generated XSLT It will not have an effect on either the generated schema or XML file After you have completed the schema tree and the design of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you can generate and save the following 1 a schema DTD or XML Schema corresponding to the schema tree you have created an XML file based on the schema tree a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet sps file and or XSLT stylesheet based on your Design Document Note The generated schema and XML file are based on the schema
130. HER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SATISFACTORY QUALITY INFORMATIONAL CONTENT OR ACCURACY QUIET ENJOYMENT TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE OTHERS WHICH VARY FROM STATE JURISDICTION TO STATE JURISDICTION c Limitation Of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EVEN IF A REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE IN NO EVENT SHALL ALTOVA OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL DIRECT INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Licensing and Distribution 373 BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE OR THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES EVEN IF ALTOVA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ANY CASE ALTOVA S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE PRODUCT Because some states and jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability the above limitation may not apply to you In such st
131. ION 2004 User Manual 96 How To Use Namespaces 5 1 1 Namespaces and STYLEVISION Target namespaces If you wish to use a namespace with your XML document instance a target namespace must be defined in the XML Schema This is done with the targetNamespace attribute of the schema element If the targetNamespace attribute is specified then a namespace for the target namespace must also be defined for the schema xsd schema targetNamespace http www xmlspy com schemas orgchart xmlns xsd http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema xmlns org http www xmlspy com schemas orgchart elementFormDefault qualified attributeFormDefault qualified gt The handling of namespace prefixes in STYLEVISION is therefore dependent on i whether a target namespace is defined and ii whether the target namespace has been defined with a prefix as in the example above or as the default namespace The handling of namespace prefixes in STYLEVISION is explained in detail in Schemas with a single namespace and Schemas with multiple namespaces Schemas with no target namespace If you do not wish to use a namespace with your document instances then the targetNamespace attribute is omitted in the schema In these cases the document instance does not belong to any namespace and the schema tree in STYLEVISION reflects this in that elements and attributes have no prefix lt xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema elementFormDefault qualified
132. L Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 10 1 1 Opening the HTML Open the file article html in STYLEVISION by clicking HTML Import Import HTML file or File Import HTML file and browsing for article html This file is in the Altova STYLEVISION 2004 Examples folder In STYLEVISION article html will be displayed in the Design Document window Schema from HTML Import Document Root Q Root D Ras x Altova A Sample Article This is a simple article marked up in HTML It is the example HTML document used to demonstrate how STYLEVISION can generate schema files XML files and stylesheets from an HTML document It contains headlines paragraphs two lists a table an image a Note the following points e The HTML document is displayed without tags except for a Root tag e The schema tree in the Schema Window shows the Document Root with only one node a document element called Root e There is only the Root Template There are no global templates STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 333 10 1 2 The starting schema and XML files Now without adding anything to the schema generate and save the XML Schema and the XML files Do this by clicking File Save Design The following dialog pops up Save HTML import files a x Additionally to the design file sps you may choose to save the following files as a result of HTML import
133. ML Data Text View of Working XML File Occasionally you might want to see the text of your Working XML File to check whether changes made in Authentic View have been applied to the XML You can see the text by viewing the Working XML File in the Text View of your XML editor or by opening the file in a text editor Tutorial files The following files are used in this tutorial They are in the Examples folder of your application e STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet NanonullOrg sps e XML Schemas NanonullOrg xsd and the imported schema address xsd e Working XML File NanonullOrg xml Assign this file to the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet as the Working XML File You will create your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from scratch When you have completed it it should be similar to the finished STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet NanonullOrg sps Before you start work on the tutorial rename the supplied NanonullOrg sps to something else such as NanonullOrg original sps ltis also a good idea to make a copy of the XML file NanonullOrg xml before you start editing it STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets based on databases In the tutorial you will create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet based on an XML Schema Note that with STYLEVISION 2004 you can also create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet based on a database For information about how to work with databases see Databases in STYLEVISION in the How to Use section STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altov
134. Mail Name Person italic para strong Color Text In the example above note that only the font style property has been assigned a value Other properties such as font family font size and font weight have not been assigned any value For these properties the values are inherited from the respective parent of each instance of lt italic gt So if the parent of one instance of lt italic gt were lt para gt and lt para gt had a font size value of 11pt then this instance of lt italic gt would inherit the font size value of 11pt If the parent of another instance of lt italic gt were lt email gt and lt email gt had a font size value of 10pt then this instance of lt italic gt would inherit the font size value of 10pt Defining the global template for italic as above has the advantage that the italic markup changes only the font style to italic while the rest of the formatting is exactly the same as the surrounding text no matter what the surrounding text For example an italic element contained within a lt bold gt element would inherit the font weight value of bold thus producing text in bold italic Note You can use any STYLEVISION feature in a global template such tables conditional templates and auto calculations Using Global Templates Global templates are created in either of the two ways described in the section Creating Global Templat
135. N Power Stylesheet tables 253 of tables in PDF output 181 Cells 246 247 248 249 joining in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet tables 246 247 248 249 Change to 310 submenu in STYLEVISION 310 Changing schema 177 effect on STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 177 effect on SPS 177 Changing view 318 to Authentic View 318 Character set 363 Character set encoding 363 Check box 109 creating in Authentic Stylesheet 109 creating in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 113 Child nodes to add 256 in Authentic View 256 CJK 363 Code page 363 Column 241 append to table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 241 delete from table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 245 insert in table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 243 COM 365 and namespace prefixing 101 Combo box 109 creating dropdown list items with XPath 109 creating in Authentic Stylesheet 112 getting values from XML file 112 Command line 146 and parameters 146 using STYLEVISION from 172 Companion software 305 for download 305 ComplexType 359 Component download center 305 at Altova web site 305 Component types 310 changing in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 310 creating 310 Components 42 moving in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 42 moving 178 Concurrent use 365 Conditional template 180 for processing siblings 180 for expanding collapsing elements 134 how to use 134 in STYLEVISION 236 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 71 236 moving in STYLEVISION Power Stylesh
136. NE Total Used 2 v calaby Qnanonullcom 25 4 Office Manager v callaby Ginanonull com Vernon Callaby Frank Further Accounts 471 ffurther nanonull com 22 Receivable Accounting 963 lmatise nanonull com 25 Manager Loby Matise Notice that although the Leave fields are numeric fields no summary has been created for these columns in the footer This is because the Leave columns were appended to the table after the table was created If you wish to add a summary for a numeric field after the footer has been created insert an auto calculation for that column in the footer The PDF Preview will look like this Administration 3 Leave Leave Leave pm doom ee ew rona uses tan Callaby Office Manager yv callaby nanonull com 4 Fame _ assomeReokane 471 uuextnansnaican 2 gt 7 ase Asountng Mnoger 29 Laaissanannazzm 7 7 mme m eae mes ee ene Note In the PDF output if a table overflows onto a new page the footer with the full table summary is inserted before the page break and the header is created again at the top of the new page Restructuring the table header The header can be restructured by splitting and joining cells Content of header cells can also be modified and can include both static and dynamic content Restructure as follows Lig 1 Place the cursor in the header cell Leave Total and click sir or Table Split Cell V
137. Power Stylesheet can be created via the command line 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 16 Introduction STYLEVISION features 2 8 STYLEVISION features The following is a listing of the major design features supported in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets They are divided into the following categories XSLT transformation features XPath support Data entry devices Formatting features Document structure The Root Template is the template that defines the structure of the document It enables you to control the structure of the document by selecting nodes from the schema tree shown in the Schema Window below under Document Root and placing them in the document structure in the Design Window You can move nodes around in the design document and thus control the structure of the result document C Program Files AltovaSsMLSPY2004 E 4 Document Root HC OrgChart CompanyLogo Q Name Office Global Templates H Department l Desc EMail Name Person Hy bold H 7 italic para Page Layout PDF A global template can be created for each global element type XML Schema elements defined as global elements and all DTD elements Using a global template is convenient because it allows you to globally define rules for processing an element type You do not have to re create the same rules at each location in the design document where an element type occurs When an eleme
138. S Sometimes however you may not be able to avoid modifying your schema after having built the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet If you do change your schema after building the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the following effects must be considered e When an XML file is created or edited in Authentic View with a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet that references a modified schema then Authentic View will validate the XML file against the modified schema If the templates in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet are still valid according to the modified schema then the XML that is created will be valid and there should be no problem If however a template in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet uses an element or structure which is not valid according to the modified schema then an error results To prevent such an error from occurring you should change the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet so that it is valid according to the modified schema see next point e When a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet based on a modified schema is opened in STYLEVISION the modified schema appears in the Schema Window and any template that uses elements or structures which have been modified may now be incorrect STYLEVISION will indicate this To rectify this situation you have two options 1 If the change to the element or structure is minor or if the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet does not use complex template rules you could change the incorrect template rules 2 If the schema mod
139. S HTML Tables The CALS HTML Tables command pops up a dialog in which you specify e whether the Authentic View user may insert XML tables following either the CALS or the HTML table model in the XML document or not and e the XML elements that will constitute the XML table structure if XML tables are allowed When you click Authentic CALS HTML Tables the following dialog appears CALS HTML Table Properties xj J Enable XML tables in Document Editor Type HTML Description Default User Defined Table element Table caption caption Table group Table header thead tfoot tbody tr Column element td Header element th Cell with nested table Enabling XML Tables in Authentic View To enable XML tables in Authentic View check the box marked Enable XML tables in Document Editor Enabling XML tables allows the Authentic View user to insert tables that can be structured and formatted as required by the user This is as opposed to static and dynamic SPS tables which are structured and formatted by you the designer of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet When an XML table is inserted in Authentic View a set of XML elements conforming to either the CALS or HTML table model is inserted in the XML document Cell content in Authentic View is entered as content of the corresponding element in the XML document When the table is formatted in Authentic View the appropriate attributes and their values are added to t
140. S file and not for the entire application After the customized formats have been defined the SPS File must be saved in order for the formats to be available when the file is next opened Creating a predefined format string A predefined format string is specific to a datatype To create a predefined format string do the following 1 Click Properties Predefined Format Strings The following dialog appears Predefined Format Strings 3 Predefined formats for date BEL 2 Select a datatype from the drop down list in the combo box and then click the Append or Insert icon as required This pops up the Edit Format String dialog Edit Format String z Format string is empty Cancel id Insert Field Field Options Goto Error If you click the down arrow of the combo box a drop down list with the supplied predefined formats for that datatype is displayed shown in the screenshot below STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Properties 283 You can either select a format from the list and modify it or you can enter a format directly into the input field The syntax for defining a format is explained in Input Formatting If you need help with the syntax use the Insert Field and Field Options buttons 3 After you have defined a format click OK The format string is added to the list of predefined formats for that datatype and it will a
141. SPY 2004 and AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition interfaces and they work as described in this documentation e STYLEVISION 2004 is used to create the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet that controls the display and data entry of the document in Authentic View see Authentic View and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets STYLEVISION has a window for previewing the Authentic View of the Working XML File thus enabling the designer of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet to try out the Authentic View directly in STYLEVISION This preview window is similar to Authentic View in the XMLSPY 2004 and AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition interfaces but has a few limitations see below Instead of using entry helpers context menus can be used for data manipulation Changes made in the Authentic Preview are saved to the Working XML File Limitations of Authentic Preview in STYLEVISION e Entry helpers unavailable use context menu e Inserting XML Tables disabled e Text State Icons disabled use context menu Authentic View documentation The Authentic View documentation consists of the following sections e An introduction which describes Authentic View in relation to STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets highlights the advantages of Authentic View and explains the concepts behind the working of Authentic View e Adescription of the Authentic View interface e A How To section for commonly used Authentic View features Note e Authentic Menu commands are described in the User
142. STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Formatting the components 47 4 5 Formatting the components The formatting that can be applied to a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component is of two types text formatting and block formatting Text formatting is applied to text and includes font sizes font weights and font colors Block formatting can be applied to components that have been explicitly defined as blocks and include background colors for the block spacing around the block and borders for the block A component can be explicitly defined as a block by assigning it a pre defined format To apply formatting to a component the following three mechanisms are used either alone or in combination e Applying a pre defined format a pre defined format includes text and block formatting and is also used to define a component as a block e Applying Text Style properties in the Text Style Window or using toolbar icons e Applying Block Style properties in the Block Style Window additional properties are available with toolbar icons In this section you will learn to apply formatting using all three mechanisms Applying a pre defined format to para 1 Select the Desc para element by clicking the start tag of the para element 2 Right click and select Change to Paragraph This creates the pre defined paragraph formatting for each para element child of Desc The Design Document now looks like this B
143. STYLEVISION is made up of two broad parts e The tabbed Main Window which displays the design of the document code of the XSLT stylesheet s and the output preview s e The Schema Window and styling windows in which content is selected in terms of schema elements and attributes Schema Window and in which items selected in the Design Document can be formatted Text Style Window and Block Style Window The functions of individual parts of the interface are described below Schema Window Schema tree Global Templates PageLayout PDF Main Window Text Style Window Block Style Window Tabs for Document Views and Previews Title Bar The Title Bar contains the name of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet file and the Working XML File Menu Bar The Menu Bar contains the STYLEVISION menus Toolbar The Toolbar contains icons for common commands Some icons will be familiar from other Windows applications Others are for specialized STYLEVISION actions Note that the bottom row of the toolbar contains icons for the creation of static SPS tables and the editing of both static and dynamic SPS tables these icons correspond to commands in the Table menu Main Window The Main Window has six tabs Design Authentic Preview XSLT Stylesheet HTML Preview XSL FO and PDF Preview The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is designed in the Design Window or tab In the Design Window dynamic components content that comes from the XML
144. TYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS file In the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet one DB Filter can be created for each top level data table in the XML Schema i e for the data tables that are the children of the DB element Each time a DB Filter is created or modified the data from the database is re loaded into the temporary XML file that is generated for the database In this way DB Filters help you to keep the XML file down to an optimal size and to thus make processing more efficient Note Using a DB Filter modifies the data that is imported into the XML File If you save a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet with a DB Filter and then generate an XML File from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet via the command line then the XML File will be filtered according to the criteria in the DB Filter Creating a DB Filter 1 In the Design Document or Schema Tree select the top level data table element for which you wish to create a DB Filter either by clicking the start or end tag of the element or by selecting the element in the schema tree 2 Select Edit Edit Database Filters or click the icon in the toolbar The following dialog is displayed Edit Database Filters as first character in value signifies E Append AND Append Append beet elete Parameters Cancel 3 Click the Append AND or Append OR button This appends an empty criterion for the filter shown below STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual
145. TYLEVISION features A section with tips on how to use STYLEVISION efficiently and correctly STYLEVISION Tips A Troubleshooting section for commonly encountered problems A user reference containing a description of the various menu commands STYLEVISION User Reference A section on how to use the editing features of Authentic View A description of how to convert HTML to XML This documentation is available in the following formats Onscreen Help within the application click the Help menu in STYLEVISION 2004 to access Online Help at the Support Center at the Altova Website Downloadable PDF available at Documentation Download at the Altova Website Printed User manual which you can buy at Documentation Download at the Altova Website STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction XSLT and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 7 2 2 XSLT and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets XSLT stylesheets are used by XSLT engines to transform one XML document into another XML or HTML or text document In the transformation process according to instructions in the XSLT the XSLT engine selects content from the XML source and places it in the output document The selected content is usually placed as element content or as an attribute value If the output document is intended for rendition on some medium or is part of a processing chain that produces a document to be rendered then the stylesheet can also be used to add presentatio
146. User Manual 8 7 8 8 8 0 2 Pardgrapli e rhe The Pme E be asec ipsa feodi es tofu 225 5 009 FOON n A eene rete ePi ertet sc reet Tenet eet be t resp rore eR REED PRU 226 8 6 4 Bullets and Nut bering oii 00sec sieves eie nitet eeite rice nai 227 6 Horizontal Lame scien iue eoe eerie eae cannes sccseseaadewnaasaceunasaceumacescenuas 228 SQ SCONTO t6 terere stance feet Mast anes tat Sette rfe edo teed vee cat Stance IL 229 6 7 Restof Contents weccsccsscensccssesieccsunaadccuueaedccestanacevstaeeccsutaenccounaancdsucanaccueeasa cannes 230 808 Date Picket iui eer iet peo re EEE EE ERA 231 6 9 Pag c 232 8 6 10 Bookmark srci nia EE EEE 233 EOS BM Hyperlink m 234 6 12 Auto Calc lation 5 eite cesseaenccdiaaaaccantancccnaaeaa cconsharcanonanacensbaneccaes 235 5 015 C Ondon rn reto ree der reir peter tendi turbet rere peser death eens 236 diia statues vasadeis saeeutea at oauint R encereest 237 S T Den Table cette ree ter N BUE ERE atneuascebvous 238 Sra Delete table ere b P Ee esee o eeu e ese Lo emu CX evi Pea buw tthe ote 239 8 5 29 Append ROW etit sire esteri ipe vetet ttu arro tor E Deeded ee tds 240 8 1 4 Append Columm iet rb e rpm Gian eek D ipo en cios dius 241 8 5 2 Insert RON xn iet ette erit te enira chsvats rese FEVER ew E eene TERRO 242 8 202 Tier COMM i nee rire bees reditus Min i ieee 243 BLT Delete ROW coton nete cibos ERU Ee ER REUERE E T LERTVR TR RR 244 8 78 Delete Column ee casas sees cite t
147. User Manual 368 Appendices Licensing and Distribution 11 2 2 Copyright All title and copyrights in and to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT including but not limited to any images photographs animations video audio music text and applets incorporated into the SOFTWARE PRODUCT the accompanying printed materials and any copies of the SOFTWARE PRODUCT are owned by Altova GmbH or its suppliers The SOFTWARE PRODUCT is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions Therefore you must treat the SOFTWARE PRODUCT like any other copyrighted material Copyright 1998 2004 Altova GmbH All rights reserved Patent s pending The Sentry Spelling Checker Engine Copyright 2000 Wintertree Software Inc STLport Copyright 1999 2000 Boris Fomitchev Copyright 1994 Hewlett Packard Company Copyright 1996 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Licensing and Distribution 369 11 2 3 Software Product License THIS IS A LEGAL DOCUMENT RETAIN FOR YOUR RECORDS ALTOVA END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT Licensor Altova GmbH Rudolfsplatz 13a 9 A 1010 Wien Austria Important Read Carefully Notice to User This End User License Agreement Software License Agreement is a legal document between you and Altova GmbH Altova It is important that you read this document before using the Altova provided so
148. VA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OR LIABILITY OBLIGATIONS TO YOU OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHERE LEGALLY LIABILITY CANNOT BE EXCLUDED FOR PRE RELEASE AND OR EVALUATION SOFTWARE BUT IT MAY BE LIMITED ALTOVA S LIABILITY AND THAT OF ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE SUM OF FIFTY DOLLARS U S 50 IN TOTAL If the Evaluation Software has a time out feature then the software will cease operation after the conclusion of the designated evaluation period Upon such expiration date your license will expire unless otherwise extended Access to any files created with the Evaluation Software is entirely at your risk You acknowledge that Altova has not promised or guaranteed to you that Pre release Software will be announced or made available to anyone in the future that Altova has no express or implied obligation to you to announce or introduce the 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 372 Appendices Licensing and Distribution Pre release Software and that Altova may not introduce a product similar to or compatible with the Pre release Software Accordingly you acknowledge that any research or development that you perform regarding the Pre release Software or any product associated with the Pre release Software is done entirely at your own risk During the term of this Software License Agreement if requested by Altova you will provide feedback to Altova regarding testing and use of the Pre release Software including error o
149. VISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Namespaces 99 e C workarea doclitesdaclite xsd ZEE Document Root doc book doc id doc role doc title H doc chapter 9 doc appendix T Global Templates E Page Layout PDF Target namespace is default namespace of the schema and all nodes are unqualified When the target namespace is the default namespace of the schema document and elementFormDefault is set to unqualified then the prefix is exposed for global elements but is hidden for other elements Note that in this example element FormDefault and attributeFormDefault are setto unqualified xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema targetNamespace http www altova com workarea doclite xmlns http www altova com workarea doclite elementFormDefault unqualified attributeFormDefault unqualified gt Since the target namespace is defined as the default namespace of the schema that is no prefix is defined for it STYLEVISION assigns an arbitrary namespace prefix n1 to the namespace required because the prefix has to be exposed for global elements This prefix is exposed on the global elements all elements except title If attributeFormDefault is Set to unqualified as is the case above then the namespace prefix n1 is hidden on all attributes If attributeFormDefault is set to qualified then the namespace prefix n1 is exposed on attributes C wor
150. XML value of Name as defined in the dialog To edit the properties of the check box right click the check box not the node and select Edit Properties from the context menu that pops up Note When a new Name or check box element is created in Authentic View its XML value is empty it is not the Unchecked Value The Unchecked Value is entered only after the check box has first been checked and then unchecked To have a default value in a node create a Template XML file that contains the default value 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 114 How To Use Data entry devices 5 3 4 Buttons There are two types of button radio buttons and buttons Radio buttons allow the Authentic View user to enter data into the XML file Buttons do not allow data entry in Authentic View but are useful for triggering events in the HTML output Radio buttons Inserting radio buttons in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet allows you to give the user a choice among multiple alternatives Each radio button you insert maps to one XML value The way to use this feature is to create the node for which the data entry is required multiple times as a radio button For each radio button enter i some static text to indicate its value to the user and ii a different XML value The radio buttons for a node are mutually exclusive only one may be selected at a time and the associated XML value is entered as the value of the node Butto
151. YLEVISION Power Stylesheet you can generate files related to the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and DB and save them From within the STYLEVISION GUI 1 Inthe File menu select the Save Generated Files item This pops up the following submenu Save Generated XSLT File Save Generated HTML File Save Generated XSL FO File Save Generated FO File Save Generated PDF File Save Generated DB Schema Save Generated DB XML Data 2 Select the file you wish to generate and save This pops up the Save As dialog 3 Browse for the desired folder enter the desired filename and click OK Save generated XSL FO From the command line From the command line you can call STYLEVISION so that it generates and saves files associated with a DB based STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet You can save not only the XML Schema and XSLT files but also an XML file with data from the DB and HTML and PDF output files based on the design in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet For a description of how to use the command line see STYLEVISION from the command line 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 172 How To Use STYLEVISION from the command line 5 13 STYLEVISION from the command line The command line feature enables you to call STYLEVISION i e the STYLEVISION executable file from the command line to generate the required output files STYLEVISION runs silently i e without the GUI being opened generates th
152. You can register using either a free evaluation key or a permanent key code Issues relating to each type of key are described below Free evaluation key To activate the software for a 30 day evaluation click the Request FREE evaluation key button Enter your name company and e mail address in the dialog that appears and click Request Now The evaluation key is sent to the e mail address you entered and should reach you in a few minutes Now enter the key in the key code field of the registration dialog box and click OK to start working with STYLEVISION When you are ready to order a licensed version of STYLEVISION you can use the Order license key button in the registration dialog or Help Order form to proceed to the secure Altova Online Shop License Key Code Your permanent license will be of one of two types a single user or multi user license Both types are sent by e mail A single user license contains your license data and includes your name company e mail and key code Please make sure that you enter the data required in the registration dialog exactly as given in your license e mail A multi user license contains your license data and includes your company name and key code Please make sure that you enter the data required in the registration dialog exactly as give in your license e mail Also enter your personal name in the name field Note that the STYLEVISION License Agreement does not allow you to install more
153. a GmbH Tutorial 33 Note STYLEVISION supports unlimited undo So you can go back as many steps as you want even after saving the file 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 34 Tutorial Setting up the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 4 1 Setting up the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Setting up a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet entails the following Opening a schema in STYLEVISION Assigning a Working XML File Creating a rudimentary document outline Saving the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet with a name Starting STYLEVISION and opening a schema 1 Start STYLEVISION by double clicking the STYLEVISION icon 9 on your Desktop or by clicking Start Programs STYLEVISION 2004 STYLEVISION starts The Schema Window and the Design Document window are empty 2 Select the menu option File New and open the supplied NanonullOrg xsd schema file in the Examples folder of your STYLEVISION 2004 installation folder gt File Edit Insert Table Authentic HTML Import Properties Tools Help TAICEILE SI IEAA Normal J EB ER ES R9 8 ge de m 2 5 e HSE C Program Files Altovaxmlspy E xamples sd_tutorial xsd Document Root gm OrgChart T Global Templates amp Page Layout PDF This creates a schema tree with the element OrgChart as the root element in the Schema Window as well as entries for Global Templates and Page Layout features immediately below the schem
154. a tree A contents placeholder for the root element is also created in the Design Document window Note We use the word schema not capitalized to denote the superset that contains DTDs and XML Schemas capitalized While this tutorial uses an XML Schema NanonullOrg xsd note that you can also use DTDs in STYLEVISION Assigning the Working XML File The Working XML File is used to preview how an XML file based on the selected schema will be processed by your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet STYLEVISION provides an Authentic Preview and previews of the HTML and PDF outputs of the Working XML File so you can quickly see how your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet will process the XML To assign a Working XML File select File Assign Working XML File Then browse and select NanonullOrg xml Which is in the Examples folder Before assigning the Working XML File you should save a copy of the original NanonullOrg xml with some other name The Working XML File including the path to it now appears in the title bar Creating the document outline in the Design view 1 In the Schema Window expand the OrgChart element 2 Select the OrgChart Name element and drag it into the Design window Position it just after the contents placeholder A blinking cursor appears after the contents placeholder and the dragged element becomes an arrow When you release the mouse button a popup menu appears STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova
155. a valid connection string by clicking on the build button Once the connection string is generated click on the next button to proceed Provider SQLO LEDB 1 Integrated Security SSPI Persist 5 Next Cancel 6 Click Next The connection to the DB is made and the Select Base Table Information dialog is displayed Note If a password is required to access the DB it must be saved in the connection string Select Base Table Information The Select Base Table Information dialog is displayed when STYLEVISION connects successfully to a DB This dialog displays database tables by owner Select Base Table Information Exi Database Owners Database Tables Table C Views System 4 Se Categories Ele CustomerCustomerDemo Se CustomerDemographics Ele Customers Els EmployeeT erritories Eis Order Details Ele Orders x E Select All Deselect All Select All Deselect All Selected T ables Table Eje Categories Els Employees B Cancel To select database tables do the following 1 Inthe Database Owners pane check the owners if any for which you want DB tables displayed in the Database Tables pane 2 Inthe Database Tables pane select the tables you wish to use in the STYLEVISION STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 165 Power Stylesheet The selected tables are shown in the Selected Table
156. able structure see the HTML OrgChart XML Schema in the Examples folder HTML OrgChart xsd A table model corresponding to the HTML table model would have a structure as shown in the XML fragment below lt table gt lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td gt ftr lt tbody gt lt table gt The element names in the example above are the default names you will find in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet If the names of the table elements in your schema do not match these default names you must map the names of the table elements in your schema to the default names in the Table Properties dialog of STYLEVISION You can do this when you check the Enable XML tables option in the dialog If there is more than one element in the schema that has a valid table content model then the mapping to the default names determines which element will be used as the table element Caution If an element called table exists in the schema it will be treated as the XML table element if XML tables have been enabled in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet because table is the default name for the table element in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet This could lead to errors if the element table is not intended to be used as a table element Enabling XML tables with STYLEVISION In order for the user of Authentic View to be able to create XML tables in an XML document XML tables must be enabled in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet To enable XML tables click Authentic
157. able command is used Toolbar table editing icons The table editing icons in the second row of the toolbar are shortcuts to the Table menu commands These commands allow you to insert delete edit the structure of and assign formatting properties to the static table These icons can also be used for dynamic tables They cannot be used for XML tables since XML tables cannot be created in STYLEVISION but must be created in Authentic View by the user XML tables can only be enabled in STYLEVISION STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Tables 123 5 5 2 Creating dynamic tables Creating a dynamic SPS table A dynamic SPS table is created by dragging an element from the XML tree into the Design window On dropping the element into the desired location the following context menu appears Create Contents Create Paragraph Create Table Create Bullets and Numbering Create Image Create Input Field Create Multiline Input Field Create Combo Box Create Check Box Create Radio Button Create Button Click Create Table This brings up the following dialog Create dynamic table x foreach Person Table Growth Header Footer Top Down v Create Header C Left Right v Create Footer MV Summary for Numeric fields Cancel Display cells as 4 r Select attributes elements Contents C Combo Box C Field C Multiline Field aiio n LeaveT otal
158. able header and footer appears on each page that contains the table The following points should be noted e If the footer contains Auto Calculations the footer that appears at the end of the table segment on each page contains the Auto Calculations for the whole table not those for only the table segment on that page e The header and footer will not be turned off for individual pages for example if you want a footer only at the end of the table and not at the end of each page 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 128 How To Use Tables 5 5 4 XML tables In order for users of Authentic View to be able to insert XML tables the following two conditions must be fulfilled e Anelement must exist in the schema DTD or XML Schema with a content model corresponding either to the HTML or CALS table model e XML tables must be enabled in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Defining the table content model in the schema The table element in the schema must have a content model corresponding to either the HTML or the Exchange model subset of the CALS table model The content model of the table element in your schema must correspond exactly with either of these two table models i e all elements and attributes defined in the table model must be correspondingly present in the element content model For information about the CALS table model see the CALS table model at OASIS For an example of a table element having an HTML t
159. aca EampargLoge fere L9 ren Location of logo Erer contents Name gt contents lt Name ifice gt Name gt contents lt Name Desc yparag Alternatively select the contents placeholder of the Desc para element by clicking the placeholder and in the drop down Pre defined Format menu in the toolbar shown below select Paragraph p 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 48 Tutorial Formatting the components File Edit Insert Table Authentic HTML Import Properties Tools Help aelo TS My 7 nom z E Formatted pre EB ES H3 de de P es oe ES SE B Heading 1 h1 of C Program FilessAltovaN mlspyE xamplessQrgCha bers E e Document Root Heading 4 h4 OrgChart 9 CompanyLogo 6 href E p This applies the same formatting as above Note that in the first case the para element was selected and its processing was changed from normal to paragraph in the second case the contents placeholder was selected and a pre defined paragraph format was applied In both cases each para child element of Desc is created as a paragraph Note If you select the para element and not the contents placeholder and then apply the pre defined paragraph format from the Drop down Format menu in the toolbar the contents of all para elements in that Desc element will run on and be displayed as a single paragraph i e the entire selection is fo
160. aks and numbers 232 paragraph format in 225 pre defined formats in 226 Properties menu 275 setting HTML page properties 276 setting PDF page properties 277 spell checker 286 symbols 191 table formatting 126 table properties 253 terminology 14 Text Style 194 uses of 8 STYLEVISION Tutorial 32 files used in 32 STYLEVISIONTUtorial 32 introduction 32 Support for STYLEVISION 303 304 Symbols 191 in STYLEVISION 191 2004 Altova GmbH Index 387 T Table 241 append column to 241 append row to 240 delete column from 245 delete in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 239 delete row from 244 formatting of in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 253 insert column in 243 insert row in 242 inserting a static table 238 menu in STYLEVISION 237 properties 278 show hide borders in STYLEVISION 252 vertical alignment of cell content 254 formatting with Block Style Window 194 Table footers 80 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 80 Table formatting 181 in PDF 181 Table properties 52 cellpadding 126 253 in STYLEVISION 253 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 57 65 80 Tables 126 background colors of rows 126 editing dynamic SPS tables 318 formatting in Stylesheet Designer 191 formatting in STYLEVISION 126 headers and footers in PDF 126 in HTML to XML conversion 341 inserting in Authentic View 261 joining cells in 246 247 248 249 moving in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 178
161. al 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Conditional Templates 73 2 Build the expression by double clicking the Location element in the Select Schema Attribute or Element pane This causes Location to be entered into the Expression field Then click the operator and enter US The XPath should read Location UST 3 Click OK The start and end of the conditional template are indicated by cyan tags with a question mark P Location gt lt The conditional template in the Design Document will look like this Address 4 ipo street daana DO street ipo city des DO City ipo state deuan Do s ste ipo zip Aa DO ZD a Notice that the entire dynamic table contained by the Address element is contained by the tags of the conditional template This is because you have inserted the condition around the Address element 4 Since the content model of the Address element already in the table is that for the US do not alter it This conditional template defines that its contents will be processed and displayed as specified when the Location element has content with a value of US Now create a conditional template for displaying the content model for European addresses whenever the value of the Location element is EU Do the following 1 Right click either of the condition tags of the conditional template you have just created and select Condition Add Copy 2 Inthe Edit XPath expression dialog that appears
162. al Mirror Margins Left 0 6in Right 0 6in r Page numbering Format 123 Start at fi Cancel Note These settings apply to the PDF page output and not to the printout of the Authentic View of an XML document For explanations of these properties see PDF page definition Also see Setting up STYLEVISION and PDF processing and page layout 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 278 User Reference Properties 8 10 3 Table The Table command opens the Table Properties dialog box which allows you to define specific properties of static and dynamic tables See Formatting static and dynamic tables and Table Properties for details STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Properties 279 8 10 4 Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering command allows you to edit the bullet and numbering styles of the selected list in the case of a numbered list the initial number can also be specified Bullets and Numbering f x Plain Bullets Numbering Note This command should be used to change the list style of an already created list Also see Lists and Bullets and Numbering 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 280 User Reference Properties 8 10 5 Edit DB Filters The Edit DB Filters command allows you to create and edit a filter for a database table a DB Filter A DB Filter determines what
163. al format by default Any pre defined format must be explicitly assigned Pre defined formats can be assigned by clicking Insert Format and then the required format or by selecting the required format from the Format drop down list in the Toolbar shown below File Edit Insert Table Authentic HTML Import Properties Tools Help sBlo Te me fife BERBEA MEAE Boney Heading 2 h2 C Program FilessAltovassmlspysE xamplessOrgCha Heading 3 h3 A Document Root Heading 4 h4 OrgChart Heading 5 h5 CompanyLogo 6 href Paraaqr Ba p Note Assigning a pre defined format to a component makes that component a block component The pre defined formats used in STYLEVISION have either one or both of the following two components e atext formatting component e aspacing component For example the pre defined para p format has a spacing component only it puts vertical space before and after the selected component and does not apply any text formatting On the other hand the pre defined Heading 1 h1 format has both a text formatting component and a spacing component The following points about pre defined formats should be noted e The spacing component of a pre defined format applies for any type of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component but the text formatting only if it can be applied For example if you select an image and apply a pre defined format of Heading 1 h1
164. al structure of the DB Filter and the relationship between any two criteria or sets of criteria is indicated graphically Each level of the logical structure is indicated by a square bracket Two contiguous criteria or sets of criteria indicate the AND operator whereas if two criteria are separated by the word or then the OR operator is indicated The criteria are also appropriately indented to provide a clear overview of the logical structure of the DB Filter Edit Database Filters d as first character in value signifies variable State nage City Los Angeles OA City San Diego a Append AND i B v San Francisco iCustomerNr 125 Append DR Delete Parameters The DB Filter shown in the screenshot above may be represented in text as State CA AND City Los Angeles OR City San Diego OR City San Francisco AND CustomerNr 25 You can re order the DB Filter by moving a criterion or set of criteria up or down relative to the other criteria in the DB Filter To move a criterion or set of criteria do the following e Select the criterion by clicking on it or select an entire level by clicking on the bracket that represents that level e Click the Up or Down arrow button in the dialog The following points should be noted e fthe adjacent criterion in the direction of movement is at the same level the two criteria exchange places e A set of criteria i e criterion within a bracket changes position within the sa
165. all its descendants including the current element STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Authentic View Authentic View How To 325 9 2 2 Using the Date Picker The Date Picker is a graphical calendar used to enter dates in a standard format into the XML document Having a standard format is important for the processing of data in the document The Date Picker icon appears near the date field it modifies it is shown below Organization Chart Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 Il To display the Date Picker shown below click the Date Picker icon Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 4 September p 4 ZME Nanonull Inc e 23 4 40 Location US To select a date click on the desired date month or year The date is enterd in the XML document and the date in the display is modified accordingly You can also enter a timezone if this is required 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 326 Authentic View Authentic View How To 9 2 3 Define Entities You can define entities for use in Authentic View whether your document is based on a DTD or an XML Schema Once defined these entities are displayed in the Entities Entry Helper and in the Insert Entity submenu of the context menu When you double click on an entity in the Entities Entry Helper that entity is inserted at the cursor insertion point An entity is useful if y
166. all pay actual damages costs and attorney fees awarded against you or payable by you pursuant to a settlement agreement in connection with a Claim to the extent such damages and costs are not reimbursed to you by insurance or a third party to an aggregate maximum equal to the purchase price of the Software If the Software or its use becomes the subject of a Claim or its use is enjoined or if in the opinion of Altova s legal counsel the Software is likely to become the subject of a Claim Altova shall attempt to resolve the Claim by using commercially reasonable efforts to modify the Software or obtain a license to continue using the Software If in the opinion of Altova s legal counsel the Claim the injunction or potential Claim cannot be resolved through reasonable modification or licensing Altova at its own election may terminate this Software License Agreement without penalty and will refund to you on a pro rata basis any fees paid in advance by you to Altova THE FOREGOING CONSTITUTES ALTOVA S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY FOR INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY INFRINGEMENT This indemnity does not apply to infringements that would not be such except for customer supplied elements SUPPORT AND MAINTENANCE Altova offers multiple optional Support amp Maintenance Package s SMP for the version of Software product edition that you have licensed which you may elect to purchase in addition to your Software license The Support Period hereinafter defin
167. ally free of charge 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 306 User Reference Help 8 12 9 XMLSPY on the Internet The XMLSPY on the Internet command is a link to the Altova web site http www altova com on the Internet STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Help 307 8 12 10 Japanese distributor If you are located in Japan you may prefer to contact our Japanese distributor on the Internet Click Japanese distributor for the Japanese language web site of the Japanese distributor of Altova products 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 308 User Reference Help 8 12 11 About STYLEVISION The About STYLEVISION command displays the splash window and version number of your product STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Context menus 309 8 13 Context menus Context menus are opened by right clicking a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component in the Design Window What items are displayed in the context menu depends on what component you right click they are commands relevant to the selected component A typical context menu is shown below Change to Make Global Template Insert Cut Shift Delete Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Delete Remove All Text Styles Remove All Block Styles NA Authentic Node Settings The Change to and Insert menu items each has a su
168. alues must be use are listed entered without quotes or any other delimiter Values must also have the same formatting as that of the corresponding database field otherwise the expression will evaluate to FALS E For example if a criteria for a field of the date datatype in an MS Access database has an 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISIO N 2004 User Manual 168 How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION expression StartDate 25 05 2004 the expression will evaluate to FALSE because the date datatype in an MS Access database has a format of vyvyv MM DD Using parameters with DB Filters DB Parameters You can also enter the name of a parameter as the value of an expression This causes the parameter to be called and its value to be used as the value of that expression The parameter you enter here can be a parameter that has already been declared for the stylesheet or it can be a parameter that you declare subsequently Parameters are useful if you wish to use a single value in multiple expressions or if you wish to pass a value to a parameter from the command line see STYLEVISION from the command line for details To enter the name of a parameter as the value of an expression type into the value input field followed without any intervening space by the name of the parameter If the parameter has already been declared see Parameters then the entry will be colored green If the parameter has not been declared
169. appears enter http www nanonull com as the static address of the hyperlink target 3 Click OK The hyperlink is created 4 In the HTML and PDF documents click the logo image The www nanonull com Web page appears in the view Inserting a hyperlink to a pre addressed e mail The objective is to create a link to an e mail that has in its address field the correct office or employee address 1 In the Design Document right click the OrgChart Office EMail element or its contents placeholder and in the popup menu that appears select Insert Hyperlink 2 Inthe Insert Hyperlink dialog click the Static and Dynamic tab 3 The address consists of a static part and a dynamic part Fill these in as shown in the 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 64 Tutorial Inserting bookmarks and hyperlinks figure below Don t miss the period in the dynamic part of the address this specifies that the content of the current node shown in the Selection field is to be processed Insert Hyperlink Selection OrgChart Office EMail Above field shows the current Document selection Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Static Dynamic Static Address mailto caer Compose Address by combining two Static and one Dynamic expression Cancel 4 Click OK The hyperlink is created The static mailto part of the address is the protocol part of the URL The dynamic part of the address is the content of the O
170. are available as a single set of properties for both outputs in the Text Style and Block Style windows and they are converted to the appropriate CSS and XSL FO properties in the HTML output and PDF output respectively See Formatting for usage CSS properties are applied in the Authentic View and XSLT for HTML outputs STYLEVISION STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction STYLEVISION features 21 supports the majority of CSS properties XSL FO properties are generated in the XSLT for XSL FO XSL FO properties that are supported by the Apache Project s current FOP processor are supported in STYLEVISION 2004 Data or input formatting For nodes with certain datatypes such as numbers and the XML Schema date datatype the node content can be formatted as required For example an element that contains currency amounts can be formatted so that it has two decimal places commas after the million and thousand places and a dollar sign before the amount 450 000 00 Input Formatting j x m Formats for type date C Unformatted Standard format YYY MM DD Formatted DD Month Vv je applied Such formatting known as Input Formatting appears in the Authentic View output and for a subset of the formattable datatypes optionally in the HTML and PDF output 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 3 Getting Started 24 Getting Started 3 Getting Started T
171. as well Keyboard The Keyboard tab allows you to define or change keyboard shortcuts for any STYLEVISION command 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 292 User Reference Tools Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Category Set Accelerator for File m Default m Commands Current Keys Ctrl 0 Press New Shortcut Key Reset All Description uc Open an existing document Assigned to Copy To assign a shortcut to a command 1 Select the category in which the command is by using the Category combo box 2 Select the command you want to assign a shortcut to in the Commands list box 3 Click in the Press New Shortcut Key input field and press the shortcut keys that are to activate the command The shortcut immediately appears in the Press New Shortcut Key input field If this shortcut has already been assigned to a command then that command is displayed below the input field For example in the screenshot above Ctrl C has already been assigned to the Copy command and cannot be assigned to the Open File command To clear the New Shortcut Key input field press any of the control keys Ctrl Alt or Shift 4 Click the Assign button to permanently assign the shortcut The shortcut now appears in the Current Keys text box To deassign or delete a shortcut 1 Select the command for which the shortcut is to be deleted 2 Click the shortcut you want to delete in the Curren
172. ater concat string st number less or equal contains string number greater or equ count nodes E 9 CompanyLogo Name DateToday number add false Office number subtract floor number Name number multiply last The context node is highlighted in gray 3 Build the XPath expression by double clicking schema nodes and XPath operators and functions Alternatively you can enter the XPath expression directly in the Expression field 4 Click OK The start and end of the conditional template are indicated by cyan tags with a question mark Location gt lt 5 Place the cursor within the conditional template tags and add the content static or STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Conditional templates 135 dynamic to be processed and output if the condition specified in the XPath expression is true If a node or static content was selected in Step 1 the conditional template tags are placed around this document fragment and that document fragment is the content of the conditional template 6 To add an alternative condition right click either the start or end tag of the conditional template and select Condition Add New or Condition Add Copy In either case the Edit XPath expression dialog appears in which you enter the XPath expression to test for the alternative condition 7 Click OK Another condition is added to the condi
173. ates and jurisdictions Altova s liability shall be limited to the greatest extent permitted by law and the limitations or exclusions of warranties and liability contained herein do not prejudice applicable statutory consumer rights of person acquiring goods otherwise than in the course of business The disclaimer and limited liability above are fundamental to this Software License Agreement between Altova and you e Infringement Claims Altova will indemnify and hold you harmless and will defend or settle any claim suit or proceeding brought against you that is based upon a claim that the content contained in the Software infringes a copyright or violates an intellectual or proprietary right protected by United States or European Union law Claim but only to the extent the Claim arises directly out of the use of the Software You must notify Altova in writing of any Claim within ten 10 business days after you first receive notice of the Claim and you shall provide to Altova at no cost with such assistance and cooperation as Altova may reasonably request from time to time in connection with the defense of the Claim Altova shall have sole control over any Claim including without limitation the selection of counsel and the right to settle on your behalf on any terms Altova deems desirable in the sole exercise of its discretion You may at your sole cost retain separate counsel and participate in the defense or settlement negotiations Altova sh
174. ation of a schema tree lt Para gt STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 339 ListNode ListNode lt Para gt Design of an Authentic Stylesheet lt Para gt ListNode lt Unorderedlist gt lt Article gt Note e Notice that for all elements created with contents placeholders the corresponding HTML content is imported into the XML file Notice also that the second HTML paragraph for which no element was created has not been imported into the XML document e Inthe schema file art icle xsd notice that all the newly created element types are global elements The Para element in List Node is created by referencing the global element Para e f you need to use Global Templates in your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet then you should use the generated schema to build the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 340 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 10 1 5 Creating a section Now create a lower level section for your article To do this you repeat steps you have learned earlier 1 Add an element called Section asa child of Article 2 Select the HTML headline Output and create it as the Title child of Section 3 Select the first paragraph after Output and create it as a Para child of Sect ion 4 Select the numbered list and import it as a list child of Section Orderedlist When y
175. attributeFormDefault qualified gt The schema tree in STYLEVISION for such a schema will have no namespace prefixes C Program Files Altova XMLSPY2004 Examples ExpReport xsd Z Document Root El expense report detailed currency total sum Person expense item T Global Templates E Page Layout PDF Qualifying elements and attributes An element or attribute in the XML instance document is said to be qualified when its namespace prefix is exposed Whether an element or attribute is qualified depends on the values of the elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes of the schema element respectively and in the case of elements whether the element is globally declared or not When the elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes have a value of qualified then elements and attributes in the XML instance document must have their prefix exposed When the value is unqualified then only globally declared elements must have their prefix exposed The effect of the values of the elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes on the handling of namespace prefixes in STYLEVISION is detailed in Schemas with a single namespace and Schemas with multiple namespaces STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Namespaces 97 Note The default values of the elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes are both unqualified As a result if these attr
176. ave the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The Working XML File is now unassigned Note that the Authentic Preview in STYLEVISION cannot be used if no Working XML File is assigned STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 205 8 4 6 Edit Schema Definition in XMLSPY This command opens the schema file in XMLSPY 2004 so that you can edit it After you have edited and saved the modifications to your schema you must reload the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet so that the schema in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is updated with the changes you made 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 206 User Reference File 8 4 7 Save Design zi The Save Design command saves the currently open STYLEVISION file as a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet with the file extension sps Note When you create an XML Schema from an imported HTML file a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is simultaneously created To save additional files created or generated from the imported HTML file click the Save Design command This pops up a dialog that gives you the option of saving the created XML Schema generated XSLT stylesheets and generated XML file to save th STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 207 8 4 8 Save Design As The Save Design As command shows the familiar Save as dialog of Windows systems and prompts you for the name of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet to be save
177. b menu These sub menus are described in the sub sections of this section There is one other context menu you will encounter This context menu shown below pops up when you drag an element or attribute from the Schema Window and drop it into the Design Window It requires you to specify what component type the element or attribute is to be created as Create Contents Create Paragraph Create Bullets and Numbering Create Image Create Input Field Create Multiline Input Field Create Combo Box Create Check Box Create Radio Button Create Button The commands in this menu perform the same task as the corresponding commands in the Change to submenu above 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 310 User Reference Context menus 8 13 1 Change to The Change to item of a context menu has a number of subitems These are shown in the figure below and are described below Change to Contents Paragraph Change to Global Template Table r4 Authentic Node Settings Bullets and Numbering Insert Image Cut Shift Delete Input Field Multiline Input Field Copy Ctrl C Delete Combo Box Check Box Radio Button Remove All Text Styles Remove All Block Styles Button The Change to submenu allows you to change the component type see Document design process of the selected node Note that t
178. bute names in the tags Enter the department The element Name in the figure above is expanded i e the start and end tags as well as the content of the element are shown An element attribute can be contracted by double clicking either its start or end tag Department Name JPerson gt To expand the contracted element attribute double click the contracted tag In large markup attributes are recognized by the symbol in the start and end tags of the attribute approved Hide all markup All XML markup is hidden Since the formatting seen in Authentic View is the formatting of the printed document this viewing mode is a WYSIWYG view of the document Content display In Authentic View content is displayed in two ways e Plain text You type in the text and this text becomes the content of the element or the value of the attribute Enter the department e Data entry devices The display contains either an input field text box a multiline input field combo box check box or radio button In the case of input fields and multiline input fields the text you enter in the field becomes the XML content of the element or the value of the attribute In the case of the other data entry devices your selection produces a corresponding XML value which is specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Thus the selection approved in the display example below could map to an XML value of 1 or to approved or anythi
179. c images is specified as node content in the XML document In the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the location of a dynamic image is referenced via the node containing it Thus in a repeating data structure the image referenced can be different for each node in the nodeset and depends on the image location information contained in that node Edit Image Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Dynamic Address I Schema Use above field to enter a dynamic Path Address Use button to select Schema content Treat as unparsed entity for XSLT transformation Inserting static and dynamic images where part of the address is static and part is dynamic is STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction STYLEVISION features 19 also possible Static and dynamic hyperlinks A static or dynamic hyperlink can be inserted anywhere in the document As with static and dynamic images hyperlink addresses can be contained in either the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet or in the XML document or partly in both Static bookmarks A static named bookmark or anchor can be inserted anywhere in the document and can be referenced by a hyperlink Static and dynamic tables A static or dynamic table can be inserted anywhere in the document A static table is used to generate a table in the result document in which cell content comes from unrelated nodes in the document In the static table shown below nodes from anywhere
180. c View of the Working XML File The Authentic View of the dynamic table with the footer modifications will look like this STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Creating the Table Footer 83 Administration Vernon M v calla nanonull com ED Frank Further 79055 ei leen ull f et n eceivable i er nanonull com Accounting Employees 3 20 of Office 9 of Company Shares 1500 13 of Office 6 of Company Hon Shareholders Frank Further Loby Matise 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 84 Tutorial Text formatting with global templates and text state icons 4 12 Text formatting with global templates and text state icons The schema NanonullOrg xsd contains two elements that are intended for applying text styling These two elements are bold and italic they are child elements of para and are recursive with respect to themselves and each other i e they can occur multiple times within themselves and each other The bold and italic elements can occur at any location and at multiple locations within a para element Since their location cannot be precisely fixed in the Design Document the formatting for these two elements must be specified in a global template Creating a global template for the bold element 1 In the Schema Window expand the Global Templates entry A tree showing all the elements for which global templates are allowed is displayed C Program Fi
181. c tables 318 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 119 Standard industry schemas 5 STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets based on 5 Static components content 29 Static images 40 224 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 40 224 Static table 238 inserting 238 how to create 122 how to format 126 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 57 119 joining cells in 57 modifying properties of in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 57 specifying column widths 57 Static text 38 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 38 Styles 194 in STYLEVISION 194 STYLEVISION 10 and Authentic View 10 and document creation process 10 and tables 119 Block Style 194 Block Style Window 27 bookmarks in 233 closing 27 closing an STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 27 creating lists 115 data entry devices 109 description of interface 27 description of Schema Window 27 document design 29 documentation overview 5 Edit menu 214 FO compliance levels Enterprise Edition 25 formatting in 196 getting started 24 How to use 94 hyperlinks in 234 icons 191 images in 224 2004 Altova GmbH 386 Index STYLEVISION 10 in document creation process 8 insert auto calculation 235 insert Date Picker 231 Insert menu 223 inserting a horizontal line 228 inserting node contents 229 inserting Rest of Contents 230 introduction 4 5 lists 227 namespaces in 95 page breaks and numbers 232 paragraph format 225 p
182. cates the current node When the number of characters in the current node the PhoneExt node is equal to 3 the XPath expression is true and the data is valid The expression is false when the number of characters in the PhoneExt node is any other than 3 If this happens the node content will be displayed red in Authentic View and a mouseover displays the error message that you key into the Error message box of the Additional Validation field 5 Now enter the error message in the Error message box of the Additional Validation field such as Telephon xtensions must be three digits long 6 You can also key in text for the User Info The text you key in here is displayed in Authentic View shortly after the cursor is placed over that node When the Authentic View user validates the XML document any invalid data will generate the error message for that node 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 88 Tutorial Completing the stylesheet 4 14 Completing the stylesheet To complete the stylesheet you should check the following e Whether Auto Calculations Conditional Templates and Additional Validation statements are correct especially whether all user situations are covered e Whether formatting and layout is as required e Whether the Authentic Node Settings for individual nodes are correctly set Checking Auto Calculations Conditional Templates and Additional Validation Two kinds of error are likely here
183. cing schema nodes correctly When you drag nodes from the Schema Window and drop them into the Design Document place them in a structure that is efficient In the example below a static table is created within the Address element tags because all content of the table cells are planned to be children of the Address element Street postee contents postest City ipe cityo c ontents ipacity p exam contents amp ddress Do not create the table outside the Address element and then drag the children of Address into the table cells In the example shown below the context node for the static table is not the Address element but the parent of Address Street Address gt lipo street gt contents Xipo street Address City Address gt pa street gt contents ipastree Address Peri BSieconens As a result the Address element is repeated in the XPath expressions of each table cell node The processing of the nodes is slowed down and the Design Document becomes harder to read Such constructs should therefore be avoided Moving components in the Design Document You can move or copy any component from one part of the Design Document to another You can do this using the following mechanisms e Drag and drop move component e Cut and paste move component e Copy and paste copy component To move a component first select it either by clicking on it in the case
184. cked Header and footer cells can be joined and split and rows can be inserted appended and deleted this gives you considerable flexibility in structuring headers and footers Additionally headers and footers can contain any type of static or dynamic content including conditional templates and auto calculations Tables for elements with text content To create columns or rows for child elements the element being created as a table must have a child element or attribute node Having a child text node does not work If you are in the situation where you need to create a child element called say Text and put your text node in the TableElement Text elements Now you will be able to create TableElement asa dynamic table Contents of table body cells When you create a dynamic table you can create the node content as any one of a number of STYLEVISION components In the examples above the table body cells were created as contents They could also be created as data entry devices There are two points to note here e The setting you select is a global setting for all the table body cells If you wish to have an individual cell appear differently edit the cell after you have created the table right click in the cell and in the context menu that appears select Change to and then the required cell content type e f you create cells as element contents and if the element has descendant elements then the content of the cell wil
185. cking this command a dialog opens in which you can browse for the HTML file you wish to import and convert to XML Having selected the file you want to import it then appears in the Design Document window You then drag the elements you want to convert to XML into the schema window at left Please see the HTML to XML Converter documentation for details STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference HTML Import 271 8 9 2 Add to Parent Adds the selected item in the Design window as a child item to the currently active element attribute in the Schema window 1 Select the XML parent item by clicking it in the schema window not necessary if the root element is the only visible element in the schema view 2 Select the HTML item e g header or text you want to define as the child item in the Design Document window and 3 Select the specific menu item from the list below Convert selection to elements Converts the HTML selection s in the Design Document window into an XML element Convert selection to attributes Converts the HTML selection s in the Design Document window into an XML attribute Surround selection with element Embeds the current HTML selection between an XML start and XML end tag Convert selected Table List to elements Converts the HTML selection even if the text cursor is only set in a table into an XML table where all HTML items are converted into XML elements Con
186. create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet based on an XML Schema derived STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction Uses of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 9 from the DB structure and use this STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet to generate HTML and or PDF output files See Databases and STYLEVISION and the description of how to work with DBs for more details 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 10 Introduction STYLEVISION and Authentic View 2 4 STYLEVISION and Authentic View The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you create with STYLEVISION is used to control the display of an XML document in Authentic View a document view available in Altova products see Authentic View in Altova Products With Authentic View users who are unfamiliar with XML can easily enter XML document content without needing to learn XML A document creation process that involves Authentic View consists of two separate stages document design and content editing The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet that is created with STYLEVISION in the document design stage is linked to the XML document in Authentic View and controls the way the XML document is processed and displayed D ment Creation Pr Document Design Content Editing STYLEVISION XML Power Document Stylesheet SPS Document design with STYLEVISION In the document design stage a developer typically an XML knowledgeable person uses Altova s STYLEVISION to creat
187. created as the list The mechanism and usage are explained below General mechanism e Any element can be created as a list e When an element is created as a list the instances of that element are created as the items of the list For example if in a department element there are several person elements i e instances and you wanted to create a list of all the persons in the department then you must create the person element as the list e Once the list has been created for the element you can modify the appearance or content of the list or list item by inserting additional static or dynamic content such as text Auto Calculations dynamic content etc Usage Basic 1 Create the required element as a list In the example below the element person is created as the list 4 Document Root E list E person first Create Paragraph Create Contents Q last age Create Table H T Global Templates Create Bullets and Numbering After you select the appropriate list formatting bullets or numbering this part of your Design Document will look like this Z Document Root list E person Q first Q last age The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 116 How To Use Lists 7 Document Root 1 JohnNewman43 I list E person 2 JamesKilroy36 Q first 3 MartnKingsley40 Q last
188. ctly create elements as children or siblings of a selected node as well as convert a selected node to an element or attribute These commands are available in a context menu that pops up when you right click a node Rename Add Child element Insert element Append element Convert to attribute Delete The commands of this menu are explained below Rename Allows you to rename the selected node Add child element Adds a child element to the selected node Insert element Inserts a sibling element before the selected node Append element Appends a sibling element after the selected node Convert to attribute Converts the selected element to an attribute Convert to element Converts the selected attribute to an element Delete Deletes the node in the schema tree If the node was created from HTML content and if the HTML content has been created as a contents placeholder by selecting Convert selection to elements or Convert selection to attributes when the HTML content was dropped into the schema tree then the node is deleted in the Design Document and the original HTML content is restored Otherwise the node is deleted from the Design Document but the original HTML content is not restored STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Quick Reference 353 10 2 4 Points to note The following important points should be noted If you wish to edit either
189. cture is generated and displayed as a tree in the Schema Window An element extraneous to the DB called DB is created as the Document Element and the DB structure is created within this Document Element You will be prompted to select which tables from the database you wish to import in the Select Base Table Information dialog The database tables you select will be created in the XML Schema as children of the DB element and also as items in the Global Templates list Setting up a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from a DB consists of two steps e Browsing for the DB file if it is a MS Access DB or building a connection string all other DBs except MS Access Note that only ADO connections are supported This is because ADO s shape command support enables data to be generated hierarchically e Selecting the Base Table information which enables you to select what tables from the database to import The temporary XML Schema that is generated and the XML file that is created will be based on the selected data tables Creating a new SPS from a DB To create a new STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from and for a DB do the following 1 Click File New from DB The following dialog is displayed Select a Source Database xj Please select a source database or a stored connection and click on next Microsoft Access ADO C Microsoft SQL Server ADO C Oracle ADO C MySQL ADO C Sybase ADO C BM DB2 ADD C Any ADO
190. d and the location where you want it saved The newly saved file becomes the current file in STYLEVISION 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 208 User Reference File 8 4 9 Save Authentic XML Data The Save Authentic XML Data command enables you to save modifications to the Working XML File directly in STYLEVISION so you do not have to open a separate application to open the Working XML File This means that you can edit the Authentic View of an XML file in STYLEVISION Note This option is disabled if the current STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based on a DB STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 209 8 4 10 Save Generated Files The Save Generated Files command pops up a submenu which contains options for saving the following files For the relationship between the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and the various generated files see Uses of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and STYLEVISION and HTML PDF output Save Generated XSLT File The Save Generated XSLT File command generates an XSLT file for HTML output from your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet You can use this XSLT file subsequently to transform an XML document to HTML Save Generated HTML File The Save Generated HTML File command generates an HTML file This operation requires two input files e The Working XML File assigned to the currently open SPS file If no Working XML File has been assigned th
191. d format will be shown in the Pre defined Format combo box Change this option to Normal Also see Document design process Text and Block Style Windows and Input Formatting 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 198 User Reference File 8 4 File The File menu contains commands for working with STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and related files Some of these commands such as Open and Save will be familiar from other Windows software products STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 199 8 4 4 New The New command allows you to create a new STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet or SPS document from a schema i e an XML Schema or DTD The schema is loaded into the Schema Window in a tree form The Document Element or Root Element is created immediately below the Document Root After the schema is loaded you can start designing the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet by dragging and dropping elements from the Schema Window into the Design Window Creating the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from an XML Schema e If there is more than one global element in the XML Schema then the Document Root will be empty This is because it is not known to the application which one of the global elements should be used as the Document Element To indicate this to the application assign a Working XML File File Assign Working XML File which is based on the same XML Schema to the STYLEVISION Power Styl
192. d make any desired formatting changes such as adding or deleting line breaks changing text color and background color and so on In the static table that contains the US address fields the last row contains two elements ipo state and ipo zip In order to make the input areas for the two elements easily recognizable to the Authentic View user change the ipo state and ipo zip nodes to a Combo box and an Input Field respectively To change the ipo state element to a combo box do the following 1 Right click the element in the Design Document and select Change to Combo Box 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 90 Tutorial Completing the stylesheet The following dialog pops up Edit Combo Box for Element ipo state Use schema enumerations C Use list of values Visible Entry XML Value Use Path expression E B 2 Check the Use Schema Enumerations option so that the values enumerated in the schema become the options available in the combo box The Visible Entries will be the same as the XML Values that have been enumerated in the schema 3 Click OK to finish creating the combo box To change the ipo zip element to an input field right click the ipo zip element and select Change to Input Field The Design Window after these two changes have been made should now look like this Street postre contents pastreel City fpocity gt contents pocity State TES amp Zip
193. d on dynamic content in the output In this tutorial you will use the Auto Calculation feature to add the following information to your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet e The number of employees in each department e The number of departments and employees in each office e The leave available to each employee which is the total leave allowed each employee minus the leave used up Auto calculating employees in each department 1 Place the cursor after the end tag of the Department Name element 2 Right click and from the popup menu select Insert Auto Calculation Value The Auto Calculation dialog appears Auto Calculation Path Expression Please enter a Path expression which will be used to calculate result value count Person m Update XML node in AUTHENTIC When working in AUTHENTIC you may choose to automatically update some existing XML node with a result of expression above in order to keep it in your ML document If you wish to do so please choose this node with an gt Path statement below Schema 3 Build the XPath expression by clicking the Build button Notice that the context node is Department indicated by its being highlighted in gray Now build the XPath expression count Person by double clicking the required node and XPath operators and functions Alternatively you can type the XPath expression directly into the XPath expression field 4 Click OK The Auto Calculation
194. d splitting rows and columns Properties of the table as well as of individual columns rows and cells are defined in the Table Properties dialog The Table commands are available in the Table menu and as icons in the toolbar The availability of various table commands depends on the current cursor position A static table can be inserted at any location in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet by clicking the Insert Table command A dynamic table is inserted by creating an element as or changing an element to a table To edit the table structure place the cursor in the appropriate cell column or row and select the required editing command To edit a formatting property place the cursor in the appropriate cell column row or table and define the required property in the Table Properties dialog Headers and footers When you create a dynamic table you can specify whether you wish to include headers and or footers Footers are allowed only when the table grows top down You can create a header and footer in a static table by manually inserting a top and bottom row respectively The structures of headers and footers in both static and dynamic tables can be modified by splitting and joining cells Navigating in tables Use the Tab and arrow keys to navigate the table cells Adding cell content You can inset any type of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component as the content of a cell The component should be formatted using the standard format
195. d the toolbar CI x Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Categories Commands zr Open fel Save Save As Assign Working XML File Save generated XSLT file Save generated XSL FO file E All mmm mA Description Save generated XSLT file with HTML To add a command to the menu bar or toolbar select the command in the Commands pane of the Commands tab and drag it to the menu bar or toolbar When the cursor is placed over a valid position an I beam appears and the command can be dropped at this location If the location is invalid a check mark appears When you drop the command it is created as an icon if the command already has an associated icon otherwise the command is created as text After adding a command to the menu bar or toolbar you can edit its appearance by right clicking it and then selecting the required action To delete a menu bar or toolbar item with the Customize dialog open right click the item to be deleted and select Delete Note e The customization described above applies to the application and applies whether a document is open in STYLEVISION or not e To reset menus and toolbars to the state they were in when STYLEVISION was installed go to the Toolbars tab and click the appropriate Reset button See also Tools Toolbars The Toolbars tab allows you to activate or deactivate specific toolbars to show text labels for toolbar items and to reset the m
196. d up correctly to the required table width on the page Pagination e One master page is defined by default The master page defines margins header extents page numbering formats etc If Multiple Pages Mirror Margins are specified in the PDF Page Properties dialog then two master pages are created instead an even page master and an odd page master The optional cover page is created as a separate master page but takes the page dimensions of the default master page Definitions for additional master pages are not supported e The default page sequence consists of the optional cover page plus the default master page which repeats till the content is exhausted If Mirror Margins is specified the page sequence consists of the optional cover page plus the repeatable sequence of odd and even page masters repeating till the content is exhausted Either of these sequences is selected with the Multiple Pages option Creating any other sequence is not supported e Specifying the number of columns on a page is not supported All pages are one column wide Inline properties e The document font can be specified by clicking the document element and assigning a font family value in the Text tab of the Text Style window This value is passed to each node if Full Usage of FO standard is selected in the Tools XSL FO options dialog Default is Helvetica or Arial MT depending on the Acrobat PDF Reader version used See PDF Fonts for details e
197. data from the selected database table is imported and displayed A DB Ffilter consists of one or more criteria When you specify criteria you use an expression which is a combination of operators 2 or and values text or numbers Additionally criteria can be joined by the logical operators AND or OR For details about creating and working with DB Filters see DB Filters in the How To Use section and Edit DB Filter in the Edit menu STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Properties 281 8 10 6 Clear DBFilters The Clear DB Filter command deletes the filter after asking for and receiving a confirmation from you For details about working with DB Filters see DB Filters in the How To Use section 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 282 User Reference Properties 8 10 7 Predefined Format Strings Any contents placeholder input field or Auto Calculation which is of a numeric date time dateTime or duration datatype can be assigned a custom format with the Input Formatting dialog In the Input Formatting dialog you can either create a format directly or select from a drop down list of predefined formats This list consists of two types of predefined formats e Supplied predefined formats delivered with STYLEVISION and e customized predefined formats that you define with the Predefined Format Strings command These customized formats are created for the currently open SP
198. der All Header Odd O Header Even El Footer All Footer Odd HH El FooterEven w Change the header as required Note that you can use both static and dynamic content and even images C Program Files Altova a p 4 Document Root T Global Templates m Page Layout PDF O Cover Page C Header All O HeaderOdd ado Nanonull Organization Chart Page page number TEXT STYLE A font family vjz Color Text Posit gt BLOCK STYLE font family Color Text Design Header All 4 XSLT Stylesheet HTML F 4 Click the PDF Preview tab to see the results in the PDF Preview window The illustration below shows Page 2 of the Organization Chart document with the header as defined above STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use PDF processing and page layout 155 Nanonell Organization Chart Nan hull Organization Chart Nanonull Inc Street 119 Oakstreet Suite 4876 Cty State Zip 29213 Emai offioeg2nancn ull oom The company was efust ssod in Vereno in 1995 and is privately heki Namoeul has been actively involved in eeveloping nancelectromc software technologies since 1995 and released the first version of its producis in February 1999 Due to the fact thal nancetectroexc software components are so small that nobody can see it the company is not well known to the public The following points should be noted
199. different groups in your organization as long as you can ensure by other means that your license agreement is not violated You will also notice that STYLEVISION 2004 contains many useful functions that make use of your Internet connection but these are unrelated to the license metering technology 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 366 Appendices Licensing and Distribution 11 2 Licensing and Distribution This appendix contains important legal information concerning your rights to use this software product Please read carefully this information is binding as you have agreed to these terms upon installation of this software product STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Licensing and Distribution 367 11 2 1 Electronic Software Distribution We are making STYLEVISION 2004 available through electronic software distribution only because this method offers many unique benefits for our customers e you can freely evaluate the software before making a purchasing decision once you decide to buy the software you can place your order online and immediately get a fully licensed product within minutes you can be sure to always get the latest version of our software e we include both a comprehensive integrated online help system and an electronic manual that you can also print out if you prefer to read your documentation on paper Once you download this software product you may evalua
200. during your Support Period For the duration of your SMP s Support Period you will also be eligible to receive upgrades to the comparable edition of the next version of the Software that succeeds the Software edition that you have licensed for applicable upgrades released during your Support Period The specific upgrade edition that you are eligible to receive based on your Support Period is further detailed in the SMP that you have purchased Software that is introduced as separate product is not included in SMP Maintenance releases updates and upgrades may or may not include additional features In addition Altova will provide Priority Technical Support to you for the duration of the Support Period Priority Technical Support is provided via a web based support form only and Altova will make commercially reasonable efforts to respond via e mail to all requests within forty eight 48 hours during Altova s business hours MO FR 8am UTC 10pm UTC Austrian and US holidays excluded and to make reasonable efforts to provide work arounds to errors reported in the Software During the Support Period you may also report any Software problem or error to Altova If Altova determines that a reported reproducible material error in the Software exists and significantly impairs the usability and utility of the Software Altova agrees to use reasonable commercial efforts to correct or provide a usable work around solution in an upcoming maintenance release or u
201. e or that it have a customized formatting If you are formatting an Auto Calculation field the following dialog appears Input Formatting f r Format for amp utoCalc field C Unformatted Formatted please choose data type Mo errors in format Insert Field Field Options v Apply same format to XSLT 1 0 output not all Since an Auto Calculation field has no datatype assigned to it you must select one from the drop down menu shown in the figure above 3 To specify a customized format select the Formatted radio button then enter a format in the input field You can enter a format by selecting a pre defined format from the drop down menu shown below by building one using the Insert Field and Field Options buttons or by typing in the format What pre defined formats are available depends upon the datatype of the element or in the case of an Auto Calculation the datatype you select x m Formats for type date C Unformatted Standard format YYY MM DD Formatted DD Month Vv je applied For details of syntax see the section below 4 The formatting that you enter will apply to the Authentic View of an XML document By default the check box Apply same format to XSLT 1 0 output is checked which means that the formatting will also be applied to HTML and PDF outputs via the generated XSLT stylesheets If you wish to not have the formatting apply to HTML and PDF outputs
202. e Authentic View of the XML document The menu commands available in Authentic View are described in the User Reference section of your product documentation The use of special Authentic View features is described in the How To section of this documentation STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Authentic View Authentic View Interface 317 9 1 1 Overview of the GUI The Authentic Preview provides you with menu commands toolbar icons and context menus with which to edit the XML document that is displayed in the Main Window Menu bar The menus available in the menu bar are described in detail in the User Reference section of your product documentation Toolbar The symbols and icons displayed in the toolbar are described in the section Authentic View toolbar icons Main window This is the window in which the Working XML document is displayed and edited It is described in the section Authentic View main window Status Bar The Status Bar displays the XPath to the currently selected node In the Authentic Preview of STYLEVISION the XPath to the currently selected node is indicated in the Schema Tree where the currenly selected node is highlighted in gray The XPath in Authentic Preview is not displayed in a status bar Context menus These are the menus that appear when you right click in the Main Window The available commands are context sensitive editing commands i e they allow you to manipulate structure
203. e Save Generated HTML File command is disabled e An XSLT file which is generated from the currently open SPS file Save Generated XSL FO File The Save Generated XSL FO File command generates an XSLT for FO XSL FO file from your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet You can use this XSL FO file subsequently to transform an XML document to an FO document Save Generated FO File The Save Generated FO File command generates an FO file This operation requires two input files e The Working XML File assigned to the currently open SPS file If no Working XML File has been assigned an error message saying the XML file could not be loaded is displayed e An XSLT for FO XSL FO file which is generated from the currently open SPS file Save Generated PDF File The Save Generated PDF File command generates a PDF file It requires the following inputs and settings e A Working XML File If no Working XML File has been assigned an error message saying the XML file could not be loaded is displayed e An XSLT for FO XSL FO file which is generated from the currently open SPS file e The path to the FO processor must be set in the Tools XSL FO Options dialog Save Generated DB Schema When you connect to a DB in order to create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet STYLEVISION generates and loads an XML Schema based on the DB structure The Save Generated DB Schema command enables you to save this XML Schema Save Generated
204. e an STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet basically processes the XML document to produce a display of the XML document Most importantly however and unlike typical XSLT stylesheets which are used to process finished XML documents the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet also provides mechanisms for the Authentic View user to input data into the XML file Authentic View therefore provides users the opportunity to input XML data and to instantaneously preview the output of the XML document The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet controls the data input as well as defines how the data should be processed and output The broad mechanism used is as follows A STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based on a given schema It specifies the outline of the XML document that will be displayed in Authentic View in terms of the schema s elements and attributes It specifies how content entered in Authentic View is to be translated into XML document content Further it specifies how each of the schema components is to be processed and output These processing definitions are used to produce the end outputs the Authentic View display and HTML and PDF files Content editing with Authentic View Authentic View is an interface for editing an XML document that is linked to a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction STYLEVISION and Authentic View 11 e When anew XML document is created it ca
205. e and your compliance with the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement at all times Altova shall be under no obligation to provide the above technical support if in Altova s opinion the Software has failed due to the following conditions 1 damage caused by the relocation of the software to another location or CPU ii alterations modifications or attempts to change the Software without Altova s written approval iii causes external to the Software such as natural disasters the failure or fluctuation of electrical power or computer equipment failure iv your failure to maintain the Software at Altova s specified release level or v use of the Software with other software without Altova s prior written approval It will be your sole responsibility to 1 comply with all Altova specified operating and troubleshooting procedures and then notify Altova immediately of Software malfunction and provide Altova with complete information thereof iii provide for the security of your confidential information iv establish and maintain backup systems and procedures necessary to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs SOFTWARE ACTIVATION UPDATES AND LICENSE METERING a License Metering Altova has a built in license metering module that helps you to avoid any unintentional violation of this Software License Agreement Altova may use your internal network for license metering between installed versions of the Software
206. e attribute to Type This part of the schema tree will look like this E Section Title Para Y Orderediist Output E f BasedOn j XML Schema j Authentic Stylesheet C C XML C XSLT The relevant XML file fragment will look like this Output lt BasedOn Type Schema Tree lt DTD gt lt DTD gt lt XML_Schema gt lt XML_Schema gt XML XML Authentic Stylesheet Authentic Stylesheet lt XSLT gt lt XSLT gt lt BasedOn gt lt BasedOn Type Authentic Stylesheet gt lt DID gt lt DTD gt lt XML_Schema gt lt XML_Schema gt lt XML gt lt XML gt lt Authentic_Stylesheet gt lt Authentic_Stylesheet gt lt XSLT gt lt XSLT gt lt BasedOn gt lt Output gt Creating HTML content as attributes You can create attributes from HTML content by dragging the selected content to the element node for which you want to make this content an attribute Create an attribute as follows 1 Select the words Altova GmbH in the Copyright line at the bottom of the HTML document 2 Drop it into the schema tree as a child of the Article element 3 In the context menu select Convert selection to attributes 4 Name the attribute Copyright In the same way select the text 2004 in the same Copyright line and create it as an attribute Year of the Article element Moving nodes in the schema tree Both these attributes will be appended to the bo
207. e elements to be expanded collapsed If the collapse attribute has a value of yes then set the conditional template to display a collapsed form of the element Otherwise display the descendants of the element STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Date Picker 137 5 8 Date Picker Function The Date Picker is a graphical calendar in Authentic View for entering dates in the ISO format YYYY MM DD in the XML document The Date Picker can be enabled for any element of datatype xs date Including the Date Picker is useful since it provides a quick and easy way for the Authentic View user to enter a date in the fixed XML format General mechanism e The Date Picker must first be enabled for one or more XML schema elements of datatype of xs date in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet e n Authentic View dates are entered via the Date Picker by clicking the required date e Dates entered via the Date Picker are stored in the standard XML Schema format YYYY MM DD Creating the Date Picker In order to insert the Date Picker in your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you must toggle on the Auto Addition of the Date Picker You can do this by toggling the icon ON or toggling on Authentic Auto add Date Picker When the Auto Addition of the Date Picker is switched on the Date Picker is inserted when any element of datatype xs date is created as either contents or an Input Field or changed to either of these two com
208. e is placed in the design document Where it is dropped determines the location of that particular element attribute in the design document Since the actual content i e data comes from the XML document and could vary depending on the XML content of the element attribute this kind of content is known as dynamic content and its containing component is known as a dynamic component STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Components STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet components can be categorized in terms of e Type static or dynamic and e Form e g contents data entry device table image etc Type of component Static components are those with static content that is content entered in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet static content does not come from the XML document The most common examples of static content are text and images Static text is text that is entered directly in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Static images are those that have their URLs specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Dynamic components on the other hand are those components which have content that comes from the XML document Form of component This refers to the form the component takes which could be text or a table image hyperlink etc Two forms that require explanation are the content s placeholder and data entry devices The contents placeholder is used with dynamic components specifically an element or attribute and serves to output the contents
209. e prefix is n1 exposed exposed Handling of attribute namespace prefixes The following table gives STYLEVISION s handling of the namespace prefixes of attributes The EFD value of the Main Schema does not have an effect on the prefixing of attributes Note that Main Schema column describes the handling of Main Schema attributes while the Imported Schema column describes the handling of Imported Schema attributes AFD stands for attributeFormDefault NS for Namespace attributeFormDefault AFD Main Schema Imported Schema Target Namespace Target Namespace is AFD qualified AFD has Namespace Prefix Default NS no prefix unqualified Main Schema Prefix of all attributes Prefix of all attributes is Prefix of all Prefix of all AFD qualified exposed nl attributes exposed attributes hidden Main Schema Prefix of all attributes Prefix of all attributes Prefix of all Prefix of all AFD hidden hidden attributes exposed attributes unqualified hidden Note If the Target Namespace is the default namespace and EFD is qualified when AFD is qualified attributes will not be prefixed STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Global Templates 103 5 2 Global Templates Function The Design Document consists of a Root Template and one or more optional global templates The Root Template defines the structure of the output document For example it could specify t
210. e required location in the Design Document e Alist of all elements and attributes for which global templates are possible When you select an element or attribute from this list a global template is created The formatting that you specify in a global template is applied to all occurrences of that element in the document e Alist of page layout components for PDF output such as a cover page design and headers and footers These components are specific to paged media and need to be defined additionally Text Style Window The Text Style Window has tabs each with different groups of text formatting properties such as font weight and font style When text or a node containing text is selected in the Design Document text formatting properties are applied to the text via the properties in the Text Style Window Some text style properties such as font weight are also available as icons in the toolbar Block Style Window The Block Style Window has tabs each with different groups of block formatting properties such as spacing before and after a block When a block component is selected in the Design Document block formatting properties are applied to the block via the properties in the Block Style Window If the selected Design Document component is not a block the Block Style Window is disabled grayed out Note Only one STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet can be open at a time in STYLEVISION The STYLEVISION title bar and the STYLEVISION Powe
211. e required output files and closes Output files Using the command line you can generate one or more of the following files Syntax XSLT directly from the specified STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet HTML file using the XML and XSLT specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet or using alternative XML and or XSLT XSLT for FO XSLFO directly from the specified STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet FO file using the XML and XSLT for FO XSLFO specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet or using alternative XML and or XSLT for FO XSLFO PDF file using XML and XSLT for FO XSLFO specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet or using alternative XML and or XSLT for FO XSLFO XML Schema file of a database specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet XML data file of a database specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The command line syntax is as follows names that can vary are indicated in italic optional arguments are enclosed in square brackets StyleVisionBatch Stylevision executable file sps parameter declarations options StyleVisionBatch located in the Altova STYLEVISION2004 folder Stylevision exe specify only if your STYLEVISION executable is not stylevision exe in the same folder file sps the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet sps file to open parameters DB Parameters or parameters for the XSLT must have the form Sparamname paramvalue Multiple parameters must be separated with spaces Options FOPBatF
212. e that an XML file based on your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet will have the same namespace prefixes as your schema and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 98 How To Use Namespaces 5 1 2 Schemas with a single namespace Target namespace is default namespace of the schema and all nodes are qualified When a target namespace is specified in the schema then the XML instance document belongs to this namespace In the schema fragment shown below a target namespace is specified and the same namespace is defined as the default namespace of the schema document that is the namespace is defined without a prefix Note also that elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault are setto qualified xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema targetNamespace http www altova com workarea doclite xmlns http www altova com workarea doclite elementFormDefault qualified attributeFormDefault qualified gt The schema tree in STYLEVISION for such a schema which specifies that elements must be qualified will have no namespace prefixes This is because the target namespace is the default namespace which has no prefix The same will also be the case if attributeFormDefault is set to unqualified For the handling of namespace prefixing when elementFormDefault is set to unqualified see below of C workarea doclite doclite xsd Document Root F lt book id role title
213. ed covered by such SMP shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase a SMP Your rights with respect to support and maintenance as well as your upgrade eligibility depend on your decision to purchase SMP and the level of SMP that you have purchased a If you have not purchased SMP you will receive the Software AS IS and will not receive any maintenance releases or updates However Altova at it s option and in it sole discretion on a case by case basis may decide to offer maintenance releases to you as a courtesy but these maintenance releases will not include any new features in excess of the feature set at the time of your purchase of the Software In addition Altova will provide free technical support to you for thirty 30 days after the date of your purchase the Support Period for the purposes of this paragraph a and Altova in its sole discretion on a case by case basis may also provide free courtesy technical support during your thirty 30 day evaluation period Technical support is provided via a web based support form only and there is no guaranteed response time 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 374 Appendices Licensing and Distribution b If you have purchased SMP then solely for the duration of its delineated Support Period you are eligible to receive the version of the Software edition that you have licensed and all maintenance releases and updates for that edition that are released
214. eets 178 Conditions 71 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 71 Connection string 161 building for DB 161 Content model 359 Contents 229 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 229 2004 Altova GmbH Index 379 Context menus 322 324 in Authentic View 322 324 in STYLEVISION 309 Contract 366 Convert 269 HTML to XML 269 Copy command 214 in STYLEVISION 214 Copyright 366 368 369 Cover page 152 designing for PDF 152 CPU 360 Create STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 200 from database 200 from schema 199 Criteria 166 in DB Filters 166 Custom dictionaries 287 for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet spell checks 287 Cut 191 and copy in Designer 191 in STYLEVISION 214 D Database Filters 219 220 clearing 219 220 creating and modifying 166 Databases 12 and STYLEVISION 12 filtering data for XML file 166 working with in STYLEVISION 159 Data entry device 284 properties of 284 how to use 109 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 38 Datatypes 166 in DB Filters 166 Date 139 formatting of 139 creating the Date Picker 137 Date Picker 264 auto add 264 how to use 137 insert 231 using in Authentic View 325 DB 161 connecting to from STYLEVISION 161 generating XML files and HTML PDF output 171 parameters in DB Filters 146 clearing 220 creating and modifying 166 datatypes in 166 editing 219 DB Parameter Defaults 166 DB Parameters 221 creating and editing 221 usage
215. emark owners names Trademarks may only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software and such use of any trademark does not give you any right of ownership in that trademark XMLSPY AUTHENTIC STYLEVISION MAPFORCE MARKUP YOUR MIND AXAD NANONULL and ALTOVA are trademarks of Altova GmbH registered in numerous countries Unicode and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows 2000 and Windows XP are trademarks of Microsoft W3C CSS DOM MathML RDF XHTML XML and XSL are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the World Wide Web Consortium W3C marks of the W3C are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio Except as expressly stated above this Software License Agreement does not grant you any intellectual property rights in the Software Notifications of claimed copyright infringement should be sent to Altova s copyright agent as further provided on the Altova website LIMITED TRANSFER RIGHTS Notwithstanding the foregoing you may transfer all your rights to use the Software to another person or legal entity provided that a you also transfer each of this Software License Agreement the Software and all other software or hardware bundled or pre installed with the Software including all copies updates and prior versions and all copies of font software converted into other formats to such person or entity b you retain no copies i
216. ence Insert 235 8 6 12 Auto Calculation An Auto Calculation uses an XPath expression to generate a result that is placed in the document at the point where you insert the Auto Calculation Note the following points e An Auto Calculation can be inserted anywhere in the Design Document e The point at which you insert the Auto Calculation determines the context node for the XPath evaluation e An Auto Calculation result is non editable e Any node in the XML document can be updated with the result of the Auto Calculation To insert an Auto Calculation do the following 1 Place the cursor in the Design Document at the point where you wish to insert the Auto Calculation 2 Click Insert Auto Calculation The following sub menu appears Auto Calculation Value Condition Input Field Multiline Input Field 3 Click an option according to what you wish to create the Auto Calculation as value input field etc Note however that the Auto Calculation is non editable in Authentic View even if created as an input field This pops up the Auto Calculation dialog Auto Calculation Path Expression Please enter a Path expression which will be used to calculate result value count Person r Update XML node in AUTHENTIC When working in AUTHENTIC you may choose to automatically update some existing XML node with a result of expression above in order to keep it in your XML document
217. ence gt lt fo root gt lt xsl template gt lt xsl stylesheet gt You are not allowed to edit the XSLT code If you wish to modify these XSLT files you can save them as a generated XSLT or XSL FO file and then edit the generated files in XMLSPY 2004 or other editor If you do this however note that the modified file will be different from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet which you can modify only in the Design view of STYLEVISION The generated XSLT stylesheets can be saved by selecting the menu command File Save Generated Files Save Generated XSLT file Saving the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is saved as an SPS sps file it controls the display and processing of the Authentic View of an XML document The SPS file also contains information about related files such as the underlying schema Working XML File and Template XML File See STYLEVISION concepts and terminology for a description of these terms To save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet click File Save Design and enter NanonullOrg sps as the name of the file Be sure to save a copy of the original supplied NanonullOrg sps file under another name The name you enter appears in the title bar 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 38 Tutorial Processing attribute values for output 4 2 Processing attribute values for output The Design Document defines how the XML document is to be processed XML con
218. enter or build the XPath Location EU 3 Click OK You have now created a second conditional template Only one conditional template is shown at a time To see which conditional template is currently displayed right click and select Condition The following context menu appears iti ion Location Condition Show Location UT Show Location State Cut Umschalt EntF rova Up amp Zip Copy Strg C Add New a Delete Add Copy Remove All Text Styles Edit condition Delete Which conditional template is currently displayed is indicated with a check mark next to it If you wish to edit a condition select Edit condition The currently displayed conditional template specifies processing to be carried out when 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 74 Tutorial Using Conditional Templates Location has a value of EU The address content model within it however is that for the US since this is a copy of the first conditional template Change this as follows 1 Delete the entire Address element by clicking either its start or end tag and pressing Delete 2 From the schema tree drag the element Address EU into the static table drop it between the conditional template tags and create it as a table The following dialog appears x foreach Address EU Table Growth Header Footer Cancel C Top Down v Create Header __ Cancel Left Ri
219. enu bar and toolbars to their installation state STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Tools 291 Customize Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Toolbars Reset Main Menu Bar Reset All Table Show text labels The STYLEVISION interface displays a menu bar and three toolbars Format Main and Table Toolbars Each toolbar can be divided into groups of commands Commands can be added to a toolbar via the Commands tab A toolbar can be dragged from its docked position to any location on the screen Double clicking a toolbar s maximized or minimized title bar docks and undocks the toolbar In the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog you can toggle a toolbar on and off by clicking in its checkbox When a toolbar is selected in the Toolbars tab you can cause the text labels of that toolbar s items to be displayed by clicking the Show text labels check box You can also reset a selected toolbar to the state it was in when STYLEVISION was installed by clicking the Reset button You can reset all toolbars and the menu bar by clicking the Reset All button Menu Bar Commands can be added to and items deleted from the menu bar see Commands above To reset the menu bar to the state it was in when STYLEVISION was installed select Menu Bar in the Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog and click the Reset button Clicking the Reset All button will reset the toolbars
220. eo teet aera ce tege bees xe deae Reged dat 245 8 7 9 Jom Cell Lell accirni et etna t oreet e segna deret AAE 246 8 7 10 Jom Cell Right eot rete iet eet ten Posee sees ha EEEE acaso een 247 SEE S Jom C ll BelOW nc M 248 8 7 12 Join Cell Above sssssssesessseeeee eene nnne nnns enean nenne 249 8 7 13 Split Cell Horizontally sees 250 8 71 14 Spit Cell Ver cally etr eere thee reel eo oet 251 SAMS View Gell Bounds eie ten entente atero RE rhet teneas eh atn a 252 8 7416 Table Properties cerei tein etre te E cene eo pe EST a EE SR 253 8 7 17 Vertical alignment of cell content eene 254 Puit 255 8 5 1 NOMS Settings siete erepti end ipe ede Rhe eto idee bna PF dg Mage Dueb seas 256 8 8 2 Text State COflS eiie tee ee ehe eee nad iaa rii Reese ede ER dae aiiai iania 259 8 8 3 CAL S7 HTML Tables ier eie oett reran en R Y HR us en eas atrae eeu 261 8 8 4 Assign Template XML File eese nennen 263 8 8 9 Auto add Date Picker 5 5r tinere cen Ere i P RE E EE HEY Lx Lg n 264 5 8 0 Table siue ri eerte erre eed DR ER TREER ER dde Pere deb OU eese Fev sg ERU Re dUER 265 8 8 7 MAarKkU paiscinceet nee ERE UR ERI E a eS a RE EROR ias 266 8 8 Delne Enties eco tote tenere Ee ee abe ab penas Ferne sa acea e eben paren ae teenie 267 88 9 Validate OLET cse 268 STYLEVISION 2004 User
221. er Stylesheet a data entry device cannot be used for data entry purposes Data entry devices in HTML or PDF output only display the relevant XML data No input is accepted in these formats The data entry device is intended for input of XML data in Authentic View Shown below is the PDF preview of your document Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Notice that the input field is rendered as underlined text and that the content of the input field is the content of the component in this case the value of the href attribute 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 40 Tutorial Including an image 4 3 Including an image An image can be included in the output of the XML document by including a link to it in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet If the link is explicitly specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the included image is referred to as a static image because its address does not and cannot be changed in the XML document If on the other hand the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet specifies instead of the image address a location in the XML document where the address is to be found then the image is dynamic it changes when the corresponding XML content changes Inserting a dynamic image In the previous section we created an input field for the value of the href attribute This value provides the address of the logo image and it can be specified by the Authentic View user Now we will
222. er information to log on to the server Use Windows NT Integrated security C Use a specific user name and password User name Password Blank passwo Allow saying password Northwind C Attach a database file as a database name TL Using the filename Test Connection 3 Enter the name of the server server log on information and the DB name all of which are user specific If for the log on information you enter a required password note that you must check Allow saving password to save the password in the connection string If a password is required it must be saved in the connection string Otherwise the connection will fail 4 Click Test Connection to test whether a connection can be successfully made with the connection string you have built If a password has been entered it will be used for testing the connection However the password will be saved in the connection string only if the Allow saving password option has been checked 5 If the connection test fails rebuild the connection string correctly If the connection test is successful click OK to complete The connection string you build is entered in the ADO Connection String dialog A password will be entered in the connection string only if the Allow saving password option is checked 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 164 How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION MS SQL Server ADO Connection String xi Generate
223. er trademarks and or registered trademarks of the respective owners The publisher and the author make no claim to these trademarks While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document Published 2004 2004 Altova GmbH 1998 2004 Altova GmbH amp Altova Inc Patent s pending Printed in the United States of America 54321 ISBN 0 9723 5595 2 Table of Contents 1 Welcome to STYLEVISION 2004 1 2 Introduction 4 2 AboutSTYLBEVISION eee rede n Ra Renee erg ass ed E EE e tel le eee an repe RE REL enS 5 2 2 XSLT and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets eese 7 2 3 Uses of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets eese ene 8 2 4 STYLEVISION and Authentic View sseseeseeseeeneeeterennennee nen en nennen entren 10 2 5 Databases and STYLEVISION erroreren eeina enne Re then Ta EEEE a 12 2 6 STYLEVISION and HTML PDF output eeeeeeeeeeeenrenenen enne nennen 13 2 STYLEVISION concepts and terminology eee en enne 14 2 5 STYLEVISION features citi te
224. erlink dialog specify the document or document fragment you wish to link to You do this by specifying a URL in one of the following forms e a static address that you enter you can select an HTML file via the Browse button and a fragment in the current document via the Bookmark button Examples would be http www altova com static Web page URL U documentation index htm1 via Browse button or top of page via Bookmark button e a dynamic address that comes from a node in the XML document you specify the node An example would be a node such as otherdocs docl e a combination of static and dynamic text for an address you specify the static text and the XML document node An example would be www altova com department nam intropara 4 Click OK The hyperlink is created and the component is underlined to indicate this Note When specifying the node for a dynamic hyperlink entry you can enter the XPath expression as an absolute XPath by checking the Absolute Path check box If this check box is not checked the XPath for the node you select via the Schema button is entered as being relative to the currently selected component Removing a hyperlink The link for the selected component can be removed by clicking the Remove Link button in the Insert Hyperlink dialog Also see Inserting bookmarks and hyperlinks in the Tutorial section and Bookmark STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Refer
225. ers a value that is equal to or greater than the last two digits considered together as a number of the base year then the century is the same as that of the base year If the user value is less than the last two digits the century is the century of the base year plus one For example if you set base 1940 then if the Authentic View user enters 50 the XML value for the year will be 1950 if the user enters 23 the XML value will be 2023 Although two digits are commonly used as the short year format one digit and three digit short year formats can also be used with a base year Note that if you use the y field type the base year is taken to be 1930 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 146 How To Use Parameters 5 10 Parameters In STYLEVISION you can declare parameters globally for the entire STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet A parameter is declared with a name and a string value This value is the default value and can be overridden by a value passed from the command line Mechanism 1 You declare one or more global parameters using the Edit Edit Stylesheet Parameters command This pops up the Edit Parameters dialog shown below Declaring a parameter involves giving it a name and a string value which is its default value If no value is specified the default value is an empty string Edit Parameters j In this dialog enter parameter names without leading Parameter Name Default Value statel
226. ertically 2 Do the same for the Leave Used and Leave Left headers sa 3 Place the cursor in the cell containing the text Leave Left and click or Table STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Auto Calculation 69 Join Cell Left s 4 Click or Table Join Cell Left once more 5 Now edit the text in these header cells as shown in the HTML Preview below Administration 3 nn Last Title IE realisan Vernon Callaby Office Manager v callaby nanonull com 21 Frank Further Accounts f further nanonull com Receivable Loby Matise Accounting Lmatise nanonull com Manager Now look at the PDF Preview Administration 3 emen coner Tonne se nsnm o 21 a rete nre 71 ranas 22 2 2 o uates horno worms S55 unsisstnannatse 7 18 LL LLLLCLL Legs ld The background color of the second row of the header is painted over the first row covering the bottom part of text in header columns that have not been horizontally split This is because of the way FOP currently renders tables The workaround is to remove the background color from the second row and if you wish from the first row as well and then apply background color to each cell of the header Do this as follows 1 Place the cursor in the cell with the text Total 2 Inthe Table Properties dialog Table Table Properties go to the
227. es above If you wish to use a global template with any element occurrence after it has been created you have to specify this explicitly By default each occurrence of an element uses the local template So for example if from the three occurrences of an email element company address email and employee office email and employee home email you wish to use the global template with the two occurrences employee office email and employee home email then you have to specify that these two occurrences should use the global template There are two ways to specify that a given element occurrence should use a Global Template 1 Ifa global template exists for a given element name and an element with that name is STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Global Templates 107 then dragged from the Schema window then on dropping the element into the Design window a menu shown below pops up In the figure below the lt Desc gt element for which a global template exists has been dragged to a location just before the Department tag location shown by cursor Since a global template exists for lt Desc gt the Use Global Template command appears in the pop up menu Use Global Template Create Contents Create Paragraph Create Table Create Bullets and Numbering Create Image Clicking Use Global Template creates this element occurrence lt Desc g
228. es in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 253 text in Authentic View 259 in Authentic Stylesheets 196 Formatting text 84 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 84 G Generated XSLT 182 editing manually 182 2004 Altova GmbH Index 381 Generating output 347 in HTML to XML conversion 347 Global 362 and dynamic tables 103 and mixed content 103 creating and using 103 description of 16 for Authentic text formatting 84 in HTML to XML conversion 353 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 84 Graphics formats 328 in Authentic View 328 H Headers 126 for large PDF tables 126 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 237 in PDF output 154 Hebrew 364 Help menu 297 298 299 300 in STYLEVISION 297 298 299 300 Hide markup 318 320 Hiragana 362 Horizontal line 228 inserting in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 228 Horizontal rule 284 properties of 284 HTML 271 add to parent 271 and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 13 append 273 insert 272 open file 270 settings 274 importing for conversion to XML 332 349 HTML import 269 HTML page 276 specifying properties of in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 276 specifying in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 276 HTML tables 128 261 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 128 261 HTML to XML 353 attributes 353 converting HTML hyperlinks 345 converting HTML images 344 converting HTML lists 338 converting HTML tables 341 creating element nodes 334 3
229. esc para that s one Office element too many The correct XPath in the context of the of fice element is Desc para not Office Desc para In the error dialog click OK then press Ctrl Z to undo the move Select the Desc para element by clicking the start Desc tag Drag the Desc para element and drop it before the end tag of the of fice element on the line above Your Design Window will now look like this O BrgChart k Location of logo contents Name contents Name Difice Name contents Name Desc pars c ontents paral Desc Office Difice gt lt Office COrgChart 7 Delete the Office start and end tags on the last line and put a line break after the Office Name element and after the Office Desc element Your Design Window should now look like this STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Processing element content for output 45 Dara Ears Eso ETET Location of logo fever contents LompanyLogo Name contents Name Orice Name contents Mame Desc para contents paral Desc amp OrgChat Q The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this or Nan null Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Nanonull Inc The company was established in Vereno in 1995 and 1s privately held Nanonull has been actively involved in developing nanoelectronic software technologies since 1996 and released the first version of its products in February 19
230. esheet 34 and global templates 103 Element creation 334 346 in HTML to XML conversion 334 346 elementFormDefault 96 98 101 Elements 350 352 creating HTML content as in HTML to XML 350 352 inserting in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 42 Encoding 363 Entities 326 defining in Authentic View 326 Entity 326 definitions in Authentic View 326 ESD 367 Evaluation key 301 for your Altova software 301 Exit 213 STYLEVISION 213 Expanding and collapsing elements in Authentic View 134 Expressions 166 in DB Filter criteria 166 E Facets 359 FAQs on STYLEVISION 304 File 202 opening STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 202 open recently used in STYLEVISION 212 Filters for database 220 clearing 220 editing for DB 219 Find 217 command in Authentic Preview 217 command in Authentic Preview 218 FO 25 compliance levels Enterprise Edition 25 FO issues 181 FO processor 295 setting up in STYLEVISION 295 setting up in STYLEVISION Enterprise Edition 25 Font 362 adding new for PDF output 156 customizing for PDF output 156 Footers 126 for large tables 126 in Authentic tables 80 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 237 in PDF output 154 FOP 156 configuring fonts 156 in STYLEVISION Enterprise Edition 25 FOP compliance 295 Format 191 marking 191 defining for Inout Formatting 282 Formatting 194 in STYLEVISION 194 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 47 196 226 of numeric fields 139 of tabl
231. esheet As soon as you do this the Document Element of the XML file is selected as the Document Element of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and the schema tree is displayed in the Schema Window If you do not have a Working XML File handy create a rudimentary XML document with the desired Docment Element e Only elements defined as global elements in the XML Schema are created in the Global Templates list in the Schema Window Creating the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from a DTD e Avalid DTD must define a single Document Element So if you create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from a DTD the Document Element is known and a schema tree is displayed without you having to assign a Working XML File e All elements defined in the DTD are created in the Global Templates list in the Schema Window Note e lf your schema is not well formed or is invalid you may get an error message when you try to load it In this case open the schema and try to resolve the problem in it e Only one file can be open at a time in STYLEVISION A newly opened file replaces the previously opened file If you have not saved changes to the previously opened file you will be prompted about whether you wish to save your changes or not 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 200 User Reference File 8 4 2 New from DB This command allows you to create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS file for a database DB An XML Schema based on the DB stru
232. eview Note e Only one file can be open at a time in STYLEVISION A newly opened file replaces the previously opened file If you have not saved changes to the previously opened file you will be prompted about whether you wish to save your changes or not e The Authentic Preview tab option is not supported for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets based on databases and is not displayed for these if the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you open is based on a DB related schema then the Authentic Preview is automatically disabled STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference File 203 8 4 4 Import HTML File The Import HTML File command allows you to import an HTML file into STYLEVISION You can then convert this HTML file to an XML file in STYLEVISION How one does this is explained in the HTML to XML conversion section of this documentation 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 204 User Reference File 8 4 5 Assign Working XML File The Assign Working XML File command assigns an existing XML file to the currently open STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS file The name of the Working XML File including its path is displayed in the title bar of STYLEVISION The Working XML File must conform to the same schema that is used for the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet It is used to provide the Authentic Preview and HTML and PDF previews of the output you get using the generated XSLT stylesheets
233. ew or as double byte values where the first most significant bit of the first byte is typically used to indicate that this is a so called wide character in case of CJK writing systems We therefore provider a special Windows 98 ME version of STYLEVISION 2004 that is automatically installed whenever you are using the Setup program on these operating systems This version of STYLEVISION 2004 supports the following code pages for viewing and editing XML documents for good background information about code pages please refer to Character Sets at Cyzborra Code page Equivalent XML Encoding 1252 ISO 8859 1 Western Latin 1 1250 ISO 8859 2 Eastern Europe Latin 2 1251 ISO 8859 5 Cyrillic 1253 ISO 8859 7 Greek 1254 ISO 8859 9 Turkish 1255 ISO 8859 8 Hebrew 1256 ISO 8859 6 Arabic 874 ISO 8859 1 1 TIS 620 Thai 932 Shift JIS Japanese 936 GB2312 Chinese 949 EUC KR Korean 950 Big5 Taiwanese Whenever you open an XML file STYLEVISION 2004 detects the character set encoding used in that file expands the file to an internal full Unicode representation and then transforms the document to a code page supported by Windows 98 in order to enable viewing and editing of 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 364 Appendices Technical Background Information the document In most cases this process will be entirely automatic as the available ISO 8895 x encodings as well as some of the CJK encodings
234. ew user the option of inserting a table type data structure in the XML document This XML data structure can then be transformed to the table markup of the output format The data structure for an XML table must correspond to either the HTML or CALS table model This XML table element and its content model must exist in the schema An XML table can be inserted at any point in the XML document where it is allowed according to the schema An XML table is formatted after it is inserted in the XML document Shown below is the Authentic View of an XML table that corresponds to the HTML table model Name Phone John Merrimack 6517890 Joe Concord 6402387 Data that is entered into the table s cells is entered as content of the corresponding XML elements For example the text view of the XML table shown in the illustration above looks like this table border 1 widthz 409 lt tbody gt lt tr gt lt td gt Name lt td gt lt td gt Phone lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt John Merrimack lt td gt lt td gt 6517890 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Joe Concord lt td gt lt td gt 6402387 lt td gt lt tr gt lt tbody gt lt table gt Note that the structure of the table exists as XML elements An element in the XML table STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Tables 121 hierarchy can have any name it is only important that the table structure correspond to
235. expression and displays the result in Authentic View Optionally the result can be entered as XML node content This is useful for example for 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 18 Introduction STYLEVISION features totalling amounts in a column or for counting the total number of employees in an office or for any mathematical operation involving node content in various parts of the document Auto Calculation r XPath Expression Please enter a XPath expression which will be used to calculate result value Update ML node in AUTHENTIC When working in AUTHENTIC you may choose to automatically update some existing XML node with a result of expression above in order to keep it in your ML document If you wish to do so please choose this node with an Path statement below LeaveLeft Schema Static and dynamic text Static or dynamic text can be inserted anywhere in the document Static text is text that is contained in a template It is output as invariable text such as labels and table column headers in the result document Dynamic text on the other hand is text that comes from the XML document It changes with each node in a nodeset and when the XML document is edited Static and dynamic images A static or dynamic image can be inserted anywhere in the document The location of static images is specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet while the location of dynami
236. f logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Now in Authentic Preview change the value of the href attribute and see the dynamic effect on the logo display Do it this way 1 In Authentic Preview place your cursor in the Location of logo input field 2 Replace nanonull gif with altova gif or any other image in any folder use a relative path to specify the logo s location Your Authentic Preview will look like this ALTOVA www altova com Location of logo altova gif Organization Chart 3 Now change the logo back to nanonull gif Note You cannot change XML values in the HTML Preview of STYLEVISION since this is an output of the XML document Authentic View on the other hand is a view of the XML document 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 42 Tutorial Processing element content for output 4 4 Processing element content for output The processing of element content is defined in the Design Document in the same way as the processing of attribute values is drag the element from the schema tree drop it into the Design Document as a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component specify further XSLT XPath processing and apply the required formatting In this section you will add element content to the Design Document The objective is to create the contents of the Office Name element on one line and the contents of the Desc para elements below it This is how you will do it Inserting the o
237. f the element that was created as the table creating an alternation of occurrence row and appended row s not a footer of appended row s We will format the footer in the Creating the Table Footer section later in the tutorial 2 When you set column widths as percentages they must add up to 100 3 You can also modify column widths by dragging column borders However it is advisable not to mix different measurement formats percentages and absolute values or different measurement units px and mm STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Inserting a static SPS table 57 4 7 Inserting a static SPS table A static SPS table is a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component that you use for improved visual presentation The cells of a static SPS table may contain either dynamic content from the XML document or static content text images etc The structure and formatting of a static SPS table are defined by you the designer of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The Authentic View user is not allowed to modify either the structure or formatting The Authentic View user is allowed to edit only the dynamic XML content of the table excepting for Auto Calculation nodes and nodes that you specify as non editable Inserting a static table with miscellaneous content The objective is to create a table that presents the contact details of each office in a visually attractive way Let us put the address in the
238. first column of a two column table and the telephone and fax numbers and the e mail address in the second column We start with a table of two columns and one row and edit it as we go along To create the static SPS table do the following 1 In the Design Window place the cursor after the end tag of the Office Name element by clicking the element s end tag and pressing Cursor Right You get a blinking cursor after the end tag of Office Name 2 Olick H8 or select Table Insert Table This causes a static SPS table to be inserted at the cursor location The Insert Table dialog shown below appears FT Columns 2 Rows 1 Cancel v Use the whole available width 3 In the Insert Table dialog specify a table of 2 columns and 1 row and click OK A 2x1 table is inserted in the Design Document shown below office Name contents Name 4 Dragthe Address element from the schema tree and drop it into the first cell of the table 5 Select Create Table from the popup This opens the Create dynamic table dialog box 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 58 Tutorial Inserting a static SPS table x foreach Address Table Growth Header Footer Cancel C Top Down v Create Header __ Cancel Left Right Create Footer M Summary for Numeric fields Display cells as _ p Select attributes elements Contents C Combo Box C Field C Multiline Field
239. form XML documents into HTML and PDF output Additionally STYLEVISION can also generate an XML Schema based on a database structure an XML file with data from a database and XSLT stylesheets for customized HTML and PDF reports p stulevision ag 7 7 ALTOVXA wuualtava com Copyright 1998 2004 Altova GmbH All rights reserved Use of this software is governed by and subject to an Altova software license agreement XMLSPY STYLEVISION AUTHENTIC MAPFORCE and ALTOVA are trademarks registered in numerous countries of Altova GmbH Patent s pending XML XSL XHTML and W3C are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the world Wide Web Consortium marks of the W3C are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio UNICODE and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc This software contains material that iz 91334 1338 Dun daz S oftware Ltd all rights reserved The Sentry Spelling Checker Engine 92000 Wintertree Software Inc STLport 91333 2000 Boris Fomitchev 91934 Hewlett Packard Company 91936 37 Silicon Graphics Computer Systeme Inc 91337 Moscow Center For SPARC Technology Scintilla Copyright 91938 2002 by Neil Hodgson lt neilh zcintilla org gt All other names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 2 Introduction 4 Introduction 2 Introduction stylevision 2004 is an intuitive visual editin
240. ftware Software and any accompanying documentation including without limitation printed materials online or electronic documentation Documentation By clicking the I accept and Next buttons below by installing or otherwise using the Software you agree to be bound by the terms of this Software License Agreement as well as the Altova Privacy Policy Privacy Policy including without limitation the warranty disclaimers limitation of liability data use and termination provisions below whether or not you decide to purchase the Software You agree that this agreement is enforceable like any written agreement negotiated and signed by you If you do not agree you are not licensed to use the Software and you must destroy any downloaded copies of the Software in your possession or control Please go to our Web site at http www altova com eula to download and print a copy of this Software License Agreement for your files and http www altova com privacy to review the privacy policy 1 SOFTWARE LICENSE a License Grant Upon your acceptance of this Software License Agreement Altova grants you a non exclusive non transferable except as provided below limited license to install and use a copy of the Software on your compatible computer up to the Permitted Number of computers The Permitted Number of computers shall be delineated at such time as you elect to purchase the Software During the evaluation period hereinafter defined only
241. g parameters as described above allows you to declare parameters with default values in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet When you generate the XSLT stylesheets parameters will be included in these You can then use the command line STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Parameters 147 to generate HTML and PDF output Parameters are currently not supported in Authentic View This means that parameters used in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet will not be processed for the Authentic View output e The Edit Parameter dialog contains all the parameters that have been defined for the stylesheet e While it is an error to use an undeclared parameter in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet it is not an error to declare a parameter and not use it 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 148 How To Use PDF processing and page layout 5 11 PDF processing and page layout Generating PDF output from your XML file is a two step process 1 An XSLT transformation is used to transform the XML file into an XSL FO file FO file In the transformation process page sequencing and page layout properties are added so that the FO file contains this information in addition to the content 2 The FO file is processed by an FO processor to generate the PDF STYLEVISION generates from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the XSLT that will transform an XML file into an FO file Besides allowing you to format the compo
242. g tool that enables Web developers to easily create STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and XSLT stylesheets STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets are used to control the display of and entry of data into XML documents in the Authentic View of Altova products XSLT stylesheets are used to transform XML documents into HTML and PDF output STYLEVISION 2004 also allows you to use a database as a source thereby making it a reporting tool for databases Based on the design of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet that has been created you can generate a report in HTML and PDF formats With stylevision 2004 Web designers can quickly and easily create a single stylesheet using familiar GUI techniques This graphical design document is simultaneously a stylesheet composed of stylesheet components and also a preview of the output document produced by the stylesheet Writing even the simplest XSLT stylesheets by hand is a difficult task It requires an understanding of XSLT elements the XPath language and complicated rules based document processing models By abstracting away the underlying error prone syntax stylevision 2004 enables you to write stylesheets using considerably less time thus leading to substantial cost savings stulevision 2004 Copyright amp 1338 2004 Altova GmbH All rights reserved Use of this software is governed by and subject to an Altova software license agreement XMLSPY STYLEVISION AUTHENTIC MAPFORCE and ALTOVA are trademarks regi
243. ght Create Footer v Summary for Numeric fields r Display cells as _ r Select attributes elements Contents export code C Combo Box C Field Multiline Field Check Box Radio Button 3 Deselect Gexport code and ipo name Select Create Header Table Growth Left Right and Display cells as Field 4 Click OK The table is created 5 Format the headers in bold by highlighting the text and clicking the Bold icon or setting font weight to bold 6 Setthe following table properties border to 0 cellspacing to 4px table width to 100 The Design Document looks like this Address EU Street po steet gt contents City poscit contents Post Code porpostcade gt contents Address EU lt Note that the EU address components have Input Fields the US address components are created as normal text However both types of display can be edited in Authentic View STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Conditional Templates 75 The Authentic Preview looks like this Nanonull Europe AG Location EU Street Kennedyplatz 30 Phone 43 1 555 5000 City E evffice nanomull com Post Code A 1200 maj fice nanonull com Vienna Fax 43 1555 5009 Creating a condition to select the correct city element In the Office Summary line for each office the city is selected using an Auto Calculation Since the ci
244. hange to e Inthe HTML and PDF output the visible entry that has been selected by the user is displayed in the output Changing the value of a data entry device in the HTML file does not change the text value in either the XML file or HTML file e Inthe case of some data entry devices such as check boxes where the device cannot 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 110 How To Use Data entry devices correctly be rendered in print an alternative rendition is implemented See also Context menus STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Data entry devices 111 5 3 4 Input fields You can insert an Input Field or a Multiline Input Field in your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet when you drop a node from the schema tree into the Design Window The text that the Authentic View user enters into these fields is entered into the XML node for which the field was created Editing the dimensions of input fields You can modify the dimensions of fields in two ways by dragging the border s of the field or entering a value in the Edit Properties dialog for the field which you access by right clicking the field not the node and selecting Edit Properties For Input Fields the width can be modified drag the right border or in the Edit Properties dialog enter the number of characters the field should accommodate For Multiline Input Fields both width and height can be modified drag the right or bot
245. he Change to submenu is available when a node is selected it is not available when the component within a node is selected The commands in the Change to submenu perform the same tasks as the items in the context menu that appears shown below when a element or attribute is dragged from the Schema Window into the Design Window Create Contents Create Paragraph Create Bullets and Numbering Create Image Create Input Field Create Multiline Input Field Create Combo Box Create Check Box Create Radio Button Create Button The explanations of the Change to commands given below apply to the corresponding Create commands as well Change to Contents The Change to Contents option causes the text content of the selected node element or attribute and of all its descendants to be output in document order There will be no whitespace between text output of descendant elements and the output document structure and all local inline formatting will disappear However if a global template is in use for the selected element STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Context menus 311 or any of its descendants the inline properties of that template will be retained for that element Change to Paragraph The Change to Paragraph option causes the text content of the selected node element or attribute and of all its descendants to be output in document order and within a single parag
246. he Spelling options dialog in which you can specify options for the spell check STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Tools 287 8 11 2 Spelling options The Spelling options command opens a dialog box shown below in which you specify options for the spell check Options EE Spelling v Always suggest corrections Make corrections only from the main dictionary v Ignore words in UPPER case Ignore words with numbers Custom Dictionaries m Dictionary Language English U S Cancel Always suggest corrections Selecting this option causes suggestions from the current dictionary main dictionary plus listed custom dictionaries to be displayed in the Suggestions list box Oherwise no suggestions will be shown Make corrections only from main dictionary Selecting this option causes only the main dictionary to be used none of the custom dictionaries is used Additionally the Custom Dictionaries button is disabled which prevents editing of the custom dictionaries Ignore words in UPPER case Selecting this option causes all upper case words to be ignored Ignore words with numbers Selecting this option causes all words containing numbers to be ignored Dictionaries Each spell checking round uses the current dictionary The current dictionary consists of one uneditable main dictionary and the listed custom dictionaries The number of
247. he child element s have been specified within the template for the parent element Solution Delete the templates for the child element s in the parent element Define the template for the parent element to contain just the contents placeholder and define Global Templates for the child elements 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 8 User Reference 190 User Reference 8 User Reference This section contains a complete description of STYLEVISION windows and menu commands It is divided into the following broad parts e A description of symbols icons Text and Block Style Windows and options for Formatting e All menu commands e Context menus While the User Reference section contains a description of individual commands the mechanisms behind various STYLEVISION features are explained in detail in the How To Use section For complex issues refer also to the Tips and Troubleshooting sections STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Symbols and icons 191 8 31 Symbols and icons The following symbols and icons are used in STYLEVISION Schema Window symbols and icons The Schema Window contains three parts each of which is displayed as a tree the Schema Global Templates and Page Layout PDF C Program FilessAltova x MLSPYY 2004 E 4 Document Root E OrgChart CompanyLogo Name Office Global Templates Department Desc EMail
248. he external XML file e External unparsed entity This is an external resource that will be called when the entity is processed The value of the entity is the URI of the external resource Clicking the command pops up the Define Entities dialog shown below DK Internal Nanonull Inc m Internal Nanonull Europe AG M Cancel Internal Nanonull Partners Inc Internal http www nanonull com Append branches xml Insert Delete For a description of how to use this dialog see Define Entities in the Authentic View documentation 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 268 User Reference Authentic 8 8 9 Validate XML This command checks the validity of the XML file against the associated schema Any additional validation requirement that you have entered for individual nodes Authentic Node Settings is also checked The result of the validation check is displayed in a pop up message box STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference HTML Import 269 8 9 HTML Import The HTML Import menu enables you to convert HTML files to XML and to auto generate the XML Schema DTD XSLT stylesheet and XML content files For a detailed explanation see the tutorial Converting HTML to XML 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 270 User Reference HTML Import 8 9 1 Open HTML file The Open HTML file command enables you to open an HTML file in STYLEVISION On cli
249. he following sequence Name of company Company address and contact details List of products Board of directors An alternative sequence could specify the board of directors before the list of products Each item in the Root Template is defined by means of a local template What is important to note is that the Root Template determines the structure of the entire output document from beginning to end Additionally global templates can be defined for certain elements If the Root Template invokes the global template of an element at some point during its processing then the rules of this global template are processed at that point after which the processor returns to processing the rest of the Root Template An extreme case of the use of global templates is when the Root Template does not specify any structure but only that templates be applied to children of the Root Element In such a case elements are processed in the source XML document order with global templates being applied if these exist otherwise default templates are used The default templates output element content In such a case the structure of the output document follows the structure of the source XML document This is in direct contrast to cases where the structure of the output document is specified explicitly with the Root Template Global templates can be created for individual element types and they define the processing of elements with that name wherever they occur in
250. he relevant elements in the XML document Defining schema elements for the selected table model In the combo box select the table model CALS or HTML with which you want your schema table structure to correspond This combo box is enabled only if the Enable XML tables check box has been checked Note the following points e The table elements in the schema must correspond exactly with the structure of the selected table model either CALS or HTML to ensure the correct functioning of this feature however they do not need to have the same names as those of the table model elements e lfatable element in the schema is named differently from the corresponding element in the selected table model then the schema element must be mapped to the corresponding table model element by entering its name in the User Defined column of the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 262 User Reference Authentic e The names of all attributes of schema table elements must correspond exactly with the relevant attribute names in the table model These attributes must therefore be defined in the schema Attribute names must correspond exactly because when the Authentic View user modifies the table structure or enters for HTML tables table properties Authentic View enters attributes and enters modifies attribute values for the appropriate element in the XML file If these attributes are not present in the sche
251. he restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in FAR 12 211 and 12 212 48 C F R 12 211 and 12 212 or DFARS 227 7202 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with the above as applicable Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Documentation licensed to U S government end users only as commercial items and only with those rights as are granted to all other end users under the terms and conditions set forth in this Software License Agreement Manufacturer is Altova GmbH Rudolfsplatz 13a 9 A 1010 Vienna Austria EU You may not use or otherwise export or reexport the Software or Documentation except as authorized by United States law and the laws of the jurisdiction in which the Software was obtained In particular but without limitation the Software or Documentation may not be exported or reexported 1 into or to a national or resident of any U S embargoed country or ii to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Department of Commerce s Table of Denial Orders By using the Software you represent and warrant that you are not located in under control of or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list GENERAL PROVISIONS If you are located in the European Union and are using the Software in the European Union and not in the United States then this Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of
252. her provided that all such copies shall bear the original and unmodified copyright patent and other intellectual property markings that appear on or in the Software You may not transfer 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 370 Appendices Licensing and Distribution the rights to a backup or archival copy unless you transfer all rights in the Software as provided under Section 3 e Home Use You as the primary user of the computer on which the Software is installed may also install the Software on one of your home computers for your use However the Software may not be used on your home computer at the same time as the Software is being used on the primary computer f Key Codes Prior to your purchase and as part of the registration for the thirty 30 day evaluation period as applicable you will receive an evaluation key code You will receive a purchase key code when you elect to purchase the Software The purchase key code will enable you to activate the Software beyond the initial evaluation period You may not relicense reproduce or distribute any key code except with the express written permission of Altova g Title Title to the Software is not transferred to you Ownership of all copies of the Software and of copies made by you is vested in Altova subject to the rights of use granted to you in this Software License Agreement As between you and Altova documents files stylesheets generated program code and
253. herefore Authentic View and HTML outputs as well as the PDF output will closely resemble each other You can see previews in the HTML and PDF windows XSLT for HTML output For HTML output obtained by using a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet generated XSLT the following points should be noted e The formatting and layout of the HTML will be identical to the HTML Preview of STYLEVISION and near identical to the Authentic View of the XML document e Data input devices text input fields check boxes etc in the HTML do not allow input These data input devices are intended for XML data input in Authentic View and though they are translated unchanged into the graphical HTML equivalents they cannot be used for data entry in the HTML document XSLT for XSL FO output XSL FO is a markup language used for producing PDF The XSL FO file has to be processed with an FO engine to obtain the PDF The following points should be noted e n general the translation of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet formatting and layout properties to the XSL FO syntax is a straightforward correspondence However to render a document to paged media requires some special specifications such as for left right pagination the location and composition of headers and footers the design of a cover page etc In the Enterprise Edition of STYLEVISION you can design these additional features for your document and these are included in the XSLT stylesheet for XSL FO e f data
254. his Software License Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Republic of Austria excluding its conflict of laws principles and the U N Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods and you expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute with Altova or relating in any way to your use of the Software resides in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna and you further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in the Handelsgericht Wien Commercial Court Vienna in connection with any such dispute or claim This Software License Agreement will not be governed by the conflict of law rules of any jurisdiction or the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded This Software License Agreement contains the entire agreement and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior written and oral understandings of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof Any notice or other communication given under this Software License Agreement shall be in writing and shall have been properly given by either of us to the other if sent by certified or registered mail return receipt requested or by overnight courier to the address shown on Altova s Web site for Altova and the address shown in Altova s records for you or such other add
255. his pops up the Data Link Properties dialog B5 Data Link Properties a xj Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogMergedDB OLE DB Provider MediaCatalogw ebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft ISAM 1 1 OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Intemet Publishing Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services 8 0 Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Outlook Search Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SOL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services OK Cancel Help 2 Select the provider driver to connect to the DB For SQL databases we recommend that you set up and use Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server For Oracle MySQL Sybase and IBM DB2 databases we recommend that you set up and use Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Then click NEXT gt gt This takes you to the Connection tab STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 163 B5 Data Link Properties 1 x Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to SOL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name rs soL Refresh 2 Ent
256. his section discusses issues related to starting work with STYLEVISION It covers the following e A discussion about installing STYLEVISION and setting up related components A high level description of the STYLEVISION interface A discussion of the document design process STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Getting Started Setting up STYLEVISION 25 3 1 Setting up STYLEVISION In order to preview HTML output and PDF output in STYLEVISION you need an XSLT processor and FO processor XSLT processor STYLEVISION has an internal XSLT processor No additional installation or setting is required When you click the HTML Preview tab in the Main Window see STYLEVISION interface the XSLT processor carries out the XSLT transformation using an XSLT generated on the fly from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and displays an HTML preview of the Working XML File When you click the PDF Preview tab the XSLT processor uses an XSLT for FO which is generated on the fly by the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet to transform the Working XML File into an XSL FO document The XSL FO is then transformed by an FO Processor to obtain the PDF FO processor In order to obtain the PDF preview you need to install an FO processor on your system An FO processor processes the XSL FO generated by the XSLT and produces the PDF The Apache Project s FOP processor and the XEP processor from RenderX are available as convenient installer packages
257. hose XML values operated on in the Auto Calculation XPath must be modified in Authentic View Solution Force the Authentic View user to modify the value of a node used in the XPath for the Auto Calculation You could do this explicitly with a message to the user via Authentic Node Settings or implicitly by creating an XPath for the Auto Calculation that uses a node which must be updated If you are using a static value as the XPath of your Auto Calculation such as a string value for example string www altova com replace the string with a locator expression such as company ur1 where ur1 is the node that contains the required value However the value of the XML node e g ur1 will have to be modified in Authentic View for the Auto Calculation function to pass the result to the XML node that is to be updated See How to use Auto Calculations XML tables do not display in HTML and PDF output Cause No global template has been defined for the XML table element Solution Since it cannot be known where in the XML document the user will insert an XML table you must use a global template for the XML table element This global template must be added manually to the XSLT stylesheet you generate from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet In Authentic View optional child elements are listed in a specific order as add childl add child2 etc even though the schema specifies that child elements can occur in any order Cause Templates for t
258. ibutes are not specified then they are taken to be present with a value of unqualified Importing schema modules A schema would typically belong to a single namespace Schema modules that belong to different namespaces can be combined by using the xsd import element Since each schema has its own elementFormDefault and attributeFormDefault attributes mixed values across combined schemas can produce complex namespace prefixing in STYLEVISION These rules are given in Schemas with multiple namespaces Namespace binding When the XML instance document is created it will be in the target namespace The namespace declaration in the XML document can bind the target namespace to any prefix It does not necessarily have to be the same binding as that used in the schema or STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet What is important is that the namespace URI referenced by the namespaces in each document be the same So even though a namespace in the schema has a prefix of doc in the schema the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and the generated XSLT stylesheets for HTML and XSL FO and the same namespace has a prefix of org in the XML instance document the XML instance file is valid and will transform correctly with the stylesheets If you are creating an STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet for use with Authentic View we recommend that you create a Template XML File that uses the same prefixes as those used in the schema and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet This would ensur
259. ice in order to combine these cells into one cell 2 Type in Shares 3 Insert an Auto Calculation to sum the number of shares held by department employees The XPath expression will be sum Person Shares 4 Insert an Auto Calculation to sum the number of shares held by department employees as a percentage of shares held by all shareholders in that office The XPath expression willbe zound sum Person Shares div sum Department Person Shares 100 The round function is used to round off the result of the Auto Calculation 5 Insert an Auto Calculation to sum the number of shares held by department employees as a percentage of shares held by all shareholders in the whole company The XPath expression will be round sum Person Shares div sum Office Department Person Shares 100 6 Insert text so that your output reads Shares X Y of Office Z of Company where X v and z are the Auto Calculations you have created 7 Format the entire footer text suitably The Design Document will look like this Leave Total Used Shares contents Shares LeaveTotal contents lt Leavel otal eaveUsec contents Les Shares sum Person sum Perso of Office sum Perso of Co The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Creating the Table Footer 81 Leave Total Used E 3 Shares 1500
260. if Organization Chart Note that the href attribute has been created as an input field while the Name element was created as contents The Authentic View user will be able to edit both types of display The input field however indicates more clearly to the user that data in this field can be modified Adding non XML XSLT text In order to indicate what data is contained in the input field text can be added before the input field This text is part of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet it does not come from the XML document To add text to the XSLT document type it into the Design Document at the required location In your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet do the following 1 Place the cursor before the start tag of the CompanyLogo element and press Enter This adds a line break 2 Type Location of logo before the opening tag of the href attribute The Design Document now looks like this STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Processing attribute values for output 39 O DraChart DompanyLogo Location of logo contents Name contents Name DraChart lt 7 The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart A note on data entry devices Data entry devices are used by the Authentic View user to enter XML data into the XML document In an HTML or PDF file that has been created with an XSLT generated from an STYLEVISION Pow
261. ifications are too complex or too many or if the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet uses complex template rules it is preferable and may even be necessary to build the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from scratch all over again Renaming the schema or changing its location If you rename your schema or change its location you can open the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in XMLSPY 2004 or a plain text editor and change the value of the schemafile attribute of the st ructure element to specify the changed name or location of the schema file lt structure version 2 schemafile NanonullOrg xsd workingxmlfile NanonullOrg xml templatexmlfile gt Importing schemas The schema on which the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based can import other schemas If you import schemas pay attention to rules that govern the application of namespaces See Namespaces in the How To section of this documentation 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 178 Tips Handling components in the Design Document 6 2 Handling components in the Design Document A component in the Design Document can be a node including text nodes data entry device placeholder table image etc see Document design process Learning to handle components in the Design Document well will give you greater flexibility in using STYLEVISION and will enable you to create better STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets Given below are a few tips for handling components Pla
262. ifth column 30 If you wish to assign the column headers some text formatting mark each header and assign properties in the Text Style Window You can also set text alignment properties The Authentic and HTML Previews should look something like this leila ttt Vernon Callaby Office Manager 582 v callaby nanonull com Accounts Frank Further Receivable 471 f further nanonull com Accounting Loby Matise Manager 963 matise nanonull com The PDF Preview will look like this 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 56 Tutorial Inserting a dynamic SPS table Callaby Office Manager v callaby nancoull com by Matise Accounting Manager 963 matise nancnull com m E LEE L1 ELT Advanced table formatting Later in the tutorial we will increase the complexity of this dynamic table at which stage you will learn advanced table formatting In the Using Auto Calculation section you will append columns to the dynamic table and split the header into two rows In Creating the Table Footer you will add content to the footer and format it Note 1 Footers must be created when the table is first created You cannot append a row and treat it as a footer This is because in the Design Document you will be appending rows to the construct usually a single row that defines how each occurrence is displayed This results in the appended row s being placed after each occurrence o
263. ile file set FOP processor batch file InpXML file set input XML file InpXSLT file set input XSLT file InpXSLFO file set input XSLT for FO file OutXSLT file output stylesheet for HTML OutHTML file output HTML OutXSLFO file output XSLT stylesheet for FO OutFO file output FO file OutPDF file output PDF file OutDBXML file output XML generated from DB OutDBSchema file output schema generated from DB help Or outputs help at the command line verbose Of v reports all steps in the process at the command line Note When StyleVisionBatch is called it looks in the current directory for stylevision exe lf your STYLEVISION executable is named otherwise or located in another folder use the option to specify the executable STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use STYLEVISION from the command line 173 Paths may be absolute or relative and should use backslashes Commands paths and folder and file names are case insensitive If the SPS file is specified the Working XML File associated with it and XSLT generated from it will be used to generate output therefore no input XML or XSLT file is required If however the SPS file is not specified an input XML file and input XSLT file must be specified as options An input XML File must also be specified if the SPS file does not have a Working XML File assigned it it For output from a DB the SPS must be specified Parameter declarations refer to pa
264. in the schema can be dropped into any table cell Bifice Name contents ame A dynamic table below generates a table in the result document for a repeating data structure the child nodes form one dimension of the table while the element occurrences form the other dimension Name gt c ontents lt Name Last Title PhoneExt Last contents contents contents contents sum Person Both static and dynamic tables can be re structured and re formatted as required Static and dynamic lists A static or dynamic list can be inserted anywhere in the document A static list is a list in which the list items are created directly in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet A dynamic list is one in which it is defined that multiple instances of a single element in the XML document are to be created as the list items of a list Additional Validation One or more XPath expressions can be set for each node The content of the node can be evaluated against this expression and a suitable error message displayed in Authentic View in 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 20 Introduction STYLEVISION features the event that the XPath is evaluated as false In the example below Additional Validation is set for the node PhoneExt If the value of the PhoneExt node is a string of length not equal to three then a validation error is generated and the message entered in the Error me
265. in table Duplicate current table row i e cell contents are duplicated m Move current row up by one row Move current row down by one row E Deletes the current row Note These commands apply only to dynamic SPS tables They should not be used inside static SPS tables The various types of tables used in Authentic View are described in the Using tables in Authentic View section of this documentation Define Entities icon This icon opens the Define Entities dialog which allows the Authentic View user to define entities that can then be used in the XML document STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Authentic View Authentic View Interface 319 Save XML icon Saves changes made in Authentic Preview to the Working XML File 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 320 Authentic View Authentic View Interface 9 1 3 Authentic View main window There are four viewing modes in Authentic View Large Markup Small Markup Mixed Markup and Hide All Markup These modes enable you to view the document with varying levels of markup information In Authentic Preview of STYLEVISION only two markup modes are available Hide Markup and Show Large Full Markup To switch between modes use the commands in the Authentic menu or the icons in the toolbar see the previous section Authentic View toolbar icons Large markup This shows the start and end tags of elements and attributes with the element attri
266. ined If the bookmark is created around a component then the component is shown with a dashed underline if the bookmark is free standing then it is indicated with a blue flag Note e A bookmark is created for a single fixed location in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and by extension in the XML document If you create a bookmark around an element the bookmark is created around the first occurrence of that element and not around each occurrence of that element e The name of the bookmark is a static name that you give It does not come dynamically from the XML document You cannot assign a dynamic name to a bookmark You can delete a bookmark after it has been created by selecting the bookmark in the Other Bookmarks on this page list in the Insert Bookmark dialog and clicking the Clear button Also see Inserting bookmarks and hyperlinks in the Tutorial section and Hyperlink 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 234 User Reference Insert 8 6 11 Hyperlink a The Hyperlink command icon allows you to insert a link from a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component to any document or document fragment To insert a hyperlink do the following 1 Select the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component or text fragment to be made into a hyperlink 2 Click the Hyperlink icon in the toolbar or select Insert Hyperlink or right click and select Insert Hyperlink or use the shortcut CTRL K 3 Inthe Insert Hyp
267. ing data structure In this part of the tutorial you will first insert the department s name and below it a table containing the names and other details of the persons in that department Do the following 1 Drag the Department Name element from the schema tree and drop it just after the end tag of the Desc element Create it as contents and give it suitable text formatting 2 Drag the Department Person element from the schema tree and drop it just after the end tag of the Department Name element 3 In the pop up menu that appears select Create as Table The Create dynamic table dialog appears STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Inserting a dynamic SPS table 53 x Cancel foreach Person Table Growth Top Down C Left Right Contents C Combo Box C Field C Multiline Field C Check Box C Radio Button Display cells as Header Footer v Create Header IV Create Footer First Last Title PhoneE xt EMail Shares LeaveT otal Leavellsed LeaveLeft v Summary for Numeric fields Select attributes elements 4 Allthe child element fields are highlighted by default and will be created as columns Deselect Shares LeaveTotal LeaveUsed and LeaveLeft The default setting creates a header row for the table in which the header for each column is the name of the respective child element If the table grows from top to bottom you can als
268. input devices have been used in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet then where possible these are rendered as graphics on the PDF page When a data entry device cannot easily be simulated as a graphic e g check boxes a substitute presentation is used Using the command line to generate output You can use the command line to call STYLEVISION and generate various output files For details see STYLEVISION from the command line 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 14 Introduction STYLEVISION concepts and terminology 2 7 STYLEVISION concepts and terminology The following concepts and terminology are important for an understanding of how STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and Authentic View work e ASTYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is a sps file created with STYLEVISION It is built around the XSLT programming language e ASTYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based on a particular schema DTD or XML Schema or database e AWorking XML File is assigned to a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in STYLEVISION in order to preview the output of an XML document in STYLEVISION It also resolves ambiguity about the document element if such exists see Troubleshooting e A Template XML File is an XML file that provides the starting data of the XML Document that is used as the Authentic View template It must be conformant with the schema on which the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based A Template XML file is assigned to a STYLEVISION Po
269. ious types of tables available in STYLEVISION Also see STYLEVISION interface 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 194 User Reference Text and Block Style Windows 8 2 Textand Block Style Windows Text Style Window The Text Style window allows you to apply formatting to text and to text components such as the contents placeholder and data entry devices To apply text formatting select the text or text component to be formatted and enter a value for the required property TEXT STYLE font variant font weight text decoration text transform letter spacing line height direction unicode bidi varias slaw Color Text Block Style Window The Block Style window allows you to apply formatting to block components Block components include paragraphs headings tables lists etc Any component that is not a block component i e itis an inline component can be made into a block component by assigning it a pre defined format When a block component is selected the Block Style window is enabled otherwise it is grayed out BLOCK STYLE color background color background attachmer background image background position background positiores background position r background repeat Position Layout Note e When a property is assigned in the Block Style window it applies to the entire block For example if a table is selected and a text property is assigned in the Block Style
270. is click File Save Design The following dialog appears Save HTML import files x Additionally to the design file sps you may choose to save the following files as a result of HTML import Do you want to save the following files also Schema DTD file W3C Schema C DTD Cancel XSLT file v XML file Select the file types you wish to save The schema file and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet must be saved Take a look at the generated XML file If you wish to try out some changes go back to STYLEVISION and make the desired modifications and re save 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 348 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Quick Reference 10 2 HTML to XML Quick Reference This Quick Reference section covers all the commands you need to use the HTML to XML conversion utility of STYLEVISION effectively The required HTML to XML specific commands are available in the File and HTML Import menus In the File menu the Save Design command in addition to saving the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS file also prompts you about whether you wish to save the SPS XSLT and or XML files Complementary information about the HTML to XML utility can be found in the HTML to XML Tutorial and in the User Reference section of the STYLEVISION 2004 manual STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Quick Reference 349 10 2 1 Impo
271. ite tenete eter e erp reip iere Eden 324 9 22 Using the Date PICKer i enit er ter i tette EE 325 923 De HE Entities P 326 9 24 Images nacnucn ce dte ete ert ne n Deoa tas fen ig oe ib eoe et oed ER Dee dete RR buda 328 HTML to XML Conversion 330 HIEML to X MIs Tutorial 3 1 2n rtr rre ere ete le ere eene EI ae eR UEH 331 10 1 1 Opening the HTML eene 332 10 1 2 The starting schema and XML files sese 333 10 1 3 Creating element nodes seen een emen 334 10 1 4 Importing an HTML list eese 338 10 1 5 Creating a section edere terri ie Prat ei pepe eo Hep pL eda rap ei dde 340 10 1 6 Importing HTML tables esee 341 10 1 7 Creating schema attributes esssseseeeeneeeeee eene ene 343 10 1 8 Importing an HTML image eee 344 10 1 9 Converting HTML hyperlinks occ ceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeecaeecaaecsaesnaeenaeens 345 10 1 10 Completing the import enne 346 10 1 11 Generating the output seen rennen 347 HTML to XML Quick Reference esses rennen nennen enne nis 348 10 2 1 Importing the HTML file seen emen 349 10 2 2 Building the schema tree 1 eee eeeceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneesaeeeaeecaaecaecsaeenaeee 350 10 2 3 Building the schema tree 2 iater Lotta etg beaten ed cones 352 10 2 4 Points to note ice eene torre tipo rape anae EP E He RE Prae Ee CO 353
272. its content Creating HTML content as an empty element node If when creating the Title node in the schema tree you had selected Surround selection with element the Title node would appear in the XML document but it would be empty the selected HTML content would not be passed on to the XML document as the content of the Title element You can try this out by doing the following 1 Inthe schema tree right click Title and select Delete This deletes the node in the schema tree and restores the contents placeholder to its original text form A Sample Article 2 Select the title text drag it to the schema tree so it will be a child of Article and after dropping it select Surround selection with element Schema from HTML Import Document Root C Article Dene El Ate Q NewNode mA Sample Article Notice that instead of a contents placeholder being created the original text remains and is surrounded by the start and end tags of the new node 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 336 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 3 Rename NewNode to Title 4 Save the schema and XML files If you look at the XML file you will find that the Title element is empty Article xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation C workarea html2xml article xsd gt lt Title gt lt Article gt This is the main difference between i converting the selection t
273. karea doclite doclite xsd ZEE Document Root n1 book id role title E nl chapter id role OQ title nt secti ni para nlitemizedlist ni orderedlist amp nl appendix T Global Templates E Page Layout PDF Target namespace is defined with a prefix in the schema and elements are unqualified When elementFormDefault is set to unqualified and the target namespace is bound to a prefix in this case doc then the prefix is exposed for global elements but is hidden for other elements 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 100 How To Use Namespaces xs schema xmlns xs http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema targetNamespace http www altova com workarea doclite xmlns doc http www altova com workarea doclite elementFormDefault unqualified attributeFormDefault qualified gt Notice that attributeFormDefault is set to qualified As a result all global elements and all attributes have the doc prefix Only the title elements which are not global that is they are declared locally have their prefixes hidden of C workarea doclitesdaclite xsd Document Root doc book doc id doc role El doc chapter doc d doc role OQ title Q doc sectl doc para dociitemizedlist doc orderedlist doc appendix T Global Templates E Page Layout PDF STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Namespaces
274. l then only properties and values in the basic level of the specification are processed and others are filtered out This allows the processing to be completed successfully even though some properties values are not processed If you set the compliance level to complete full usage then the processor may report a fatal error if it encounters a property or value for which no processing action has been implemented FOP from the Apache XML Project FOP is a popular FO processor that is available free of charge You can download and install FOP from the Altova Website This package downloads installs and configures FOP for use within your product interface Alternatively you could download FOP from the Apache Website Note that FOP requires a Java Runtime Environment downloadable free of charge from Sun s Java Site After you have installed FOP make sure that STYLEVISION knows where to find the FOP executable To do this click Tools XSL FO Options in STYLEVISION and enter the path to the fop bat file see figure above Note Since conformance levels between any two FO processors can differ widely and since the XSL FO specification may be interpreted differently from processor to processor the PDF produced by different processors from a single FO file could be different STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Getting Started STYLEVISION interface 27 3 2 STYLEVISION interface The graphical user interface of
275. l be a concatenation of the text strings of the element and all its descendant elements Deleting columns rows and tables To delete a column row or table place the cursor in the column row or table to be deleted and click the menu item Table Delete Column Table Delete Row or Table Delete Table respectively If you have nested tables the table immediately containing the cursor will be STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Tables 125 deleted when the Table Delete Table command is used Toolbar table editing icons The table editing icons in the second row of the toolbar are shortcuts to the Table menu commands These commands allow you to insert delete edit the structure of and assign formatting properties to the dynamic table These icons can also be used for static tables They cannot be used for XML tables since XML tables cannot be created in STYLEVISION but must be created in Authentic View by the user XML tables can only be enabled in STYLEVISION Creating dynamic tables in global templates You can also create dynamic tables in global templates The process works in the same way as for the Root Template given above The important point to note is that in a global template a dynamic table can only be created for descendant elements of the global template node it cannot be created for the global template node itself For example if you wish to create a dynamic table for the element
276. l components in the output for example a table that includes content from various parts of the XML document In some cases using a global template is the only way to process an element Global templates can and in some cases must be used in the following situations 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 104 How To Use Global Templates e For elements that can occur at multiple locations in various parts of the document and where the locations cannot be known to you the designer of the document a global template must be used An example of such an element is one marking up italic or bold text You cannot know where such elements will occur in the text therefore a global template for each such element must be used e f an element can occur recursively i e within itself or a descendant then a global template must be used An example is a numbered list an item of which may itself contain a numbered list e Foran element type that occurs as a child of different parents for example office email and person email using a global template ensures that both email elements are processed in the same way if that is you want to process them in the same way The advantage of using a global template in this kind of scenario is that the processing for several elements of a single element type is defined in a single global template a change in the global template will therefore apply to all the elements that use
277. l is used to extend the length of a non semantic numeric field integers decimals etc In the case of decimals it can be used on either or both sides of the decimal point For example the input formatting 0 00 ensures that a number will have zeroes as specified in the formatting if these digit locations are empty as well as any number of digits on both sides of the decimal point 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 144 How To Use Input Formatting Prefix and suffix characters Prefix and suffix characters are used to specify alignment and details of the positive negative symbol The following table lists the prefix and suffix characters Prefix Suffix Explanation Left aligned default for text gt Right aligned default for numbers Minus symbol if negative nothing otherwise default Minus symbol flush left if negative nothing otherwise lt gt Minus symbol flush left if negative nothing otherwise Minus symbol if negative space otherwise located before prefix after suffix gt gt Minus symbol if negative space otherwise located flush left prefix fixed position suffix lt gt Minus symbol flush left if negative space otherwise Plus or minus sign always located before prefix after suffix gt gt Plus or minus sign always flush left prefix fixed position suffix lt gt Plus or minus sign always located f
278. lder is inserted 11 Select the contents placeholder and set font size to 10pt The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this Administration 3 Vernon Callaby een Receivable Accounts ffurther nanonull com 0 963 iaissQnanonson The Authentic View will look as below STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Conditional Templates 79 Administration 3 Fg Callaby ome Manager v callaby nanonull com Accounts Frank Further Receivable further nanonull com Matise Accounting Manager lmatise nanonull com add Shares Notice in both the above figures that the First element is displayed in normal font if the content of Shares is 0 or if no Shares element exists for that employee Now create the same conditions for the Last element so that both First and Last appear in bold if the employee is a shareholder and in normal if not Formatting the table Since another column has been added you need to change the column widths again to ensure proper PDF output First check the PDF Preview Now set column widths for each column by placing the cursor in the respective column clicking the Table Properties icon and in the Column tab of the Table Properties dialog entering a value for width as follows First 1096 Last 1296 Title 1696 Ext 5 LeaveUsed 896 LeaveLeft 896 EMail 23 Shares 1096 Lea
279. le word only check box unchecked Doing this would enable you for example to enter soft and software e To make the search case insensitive leave the Match case checkbox unchecked This would enable you to find say Soft with an entry of soft 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 218 User Reference Edit 8 5 4 Find Next e Hotkey F3 The Find next command repeats the last Find command to search for the next occurrence of the requested text See Find for a description of how to use the search function STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Edit 219 8 5 5 Edit DB Filter The Edit DB Filter command allows you to create and edit a filter for a database table a DB Filter A DB Filter determines what data from the selected database table is imported and displayed A DB Filter consists of one or more criteria When you specify criteria you use an expression which is a combination of operators 2 or and values text or numbers Additionally criteria can be joined by the logical operators AND or OR To create or edit a DB Filter do the following 1 Select the top level data table element for which you wish to create or edit a DB Filter Do this by clicking either the element tag in Design View or the element name in the schema tree 2 Select Edit Edit DB Filter or click the toolbar icon for the command This pops up the Edit Database Filters dialog Edit
280. lement as the context node Concatenate the three Auto Calculations with suitable separator characters so as to get a format like x Y Z count ancestor AA preceding sibling AA 1 count parent BB preceding sibling BB 1 count preceding sibling CC 1 The first Auto Calculation gives the number of the ancestor AA element of the current CC element in the context of the parent of AA The second Auto Calculation gives the number of the parent BB element in the context of its parent AA The third gives the number of the current CC element in the context of its parent BB You could use the same strategy for the elements AA BB or any descendant elements of CC 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 186 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Given below is a list of commonly encountered problems their causes and suggested solutions e When an XML Schema is loaded into STYLEVISION the Root Template in the Schema Window is empty Cause There is more than one global template in the schema So it is not clear which one is to be used as the Root Element Solution If you have an XML file which has as its root element the element you require assign this XML file as the Working XML File Once you do this it becomes clear which element is the root element and the schema will appear in the Schema Window If you do not have such an XML file create a rudimentary one with the required element
281. lessAltova mlspysE amples 4 Document Root OrgChart Global Templates Q Department Q Desc Q EMail Name Person H bold italic para E Page Layout PDF 2 Select the bold element The bold element in the Global Templates tree is marked with a to indicate that a global template has been created In the Design Window the view changes to show the bold element which has a contents placeholder see below bold dT R Dold 3 Note that the entire element is selected Keeping the element selected in the Text Style Window select the Text tab and set font weight to bold The global template is now created with bold formatting Alternatively you could select the contents placeholder and assign the bold formatting bold TOS Dold 4 Nowcheck the HTML Preview All text in para elements that is marked up with the bold element is now displayed in bold Such text was earlier not displayed bold because there was no formatting defined for the bold element Creating a Text State Icon A Text State Icon is a toolbar icon in Authentic View that is used to add formatting to text in Authentic View A text state icon is created for a particular element in STYLEVISION The STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Text formatting with global templates and text state icons 85 formatting for that element must be defined as a global template
282. lit Cell Vertically command creates a new cell below the cell in which the cursor is The contents of the original cell remain in the upper cell All properties of the original cell are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 252 User Reference Table 8 7 15 View Cell Bounds The View Cell Bounds command toggles the display of table boundaries borders on and off for tables that have a table border value of 0 This command applies to both static and dynamic tables STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 253 8 7 16 Table Properties The Table Properties command opens the Table Properties dialog box for static and dynamic tables Table Properties j x Table Row Column Cell border collapse cellpadding cellspacing frame height page break after page break before rules table layout mM A EE EA EL In the Table Properties dialog you can specify the formatting properties of the table as a whole as well as for individual rows columns and cells The cursor must be in the cell column row or table to be formatted before you select this command The table properties available in this dialog closely follow those of HTML So the frame and rules properties define whether and how table and cell borders are drawn border defines the width of borders and so on Cellpadding The fol
283. llowed and that appropriate action is required Additional validation is also useful when the validity check you wish to make is not specified in the schema Additional validation of Telephone Extensions The objective is to validate the content of the PhoneExt element which is an integer datatype The validation should check whether the extension has three digits or not If not the user should be notified To build additional validation for the PhoneExt element do the following 1 Selectthe contents placeholder of the PhoneExt element e Selecting the contents placeholder and not the entire node is the mechanism to be used in order to display invalid data in red and display an error message when the user mouses over the invalid data On validation F8 also an error message will be generated e Selecting the entire node on the other hand only generates an error message on validation contents Phone xt 2 Select Authentic Node Settings The following dialog appears STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Using Additional Validation 87 Authentic Node Settings PhoneExt E xi v Content is editable Cancel m User Info Additional validation with XPath valid when all Path results are true Path expression 3 Inthe Additional Validation field click the Append button 4 Enter the XPath expression for valid values string length 3 The indi
284. lock style properties and pre defined formats if there is a conflict Formatting conflicts If there is a formatting conflict i e a formatting property is defined using more than one of the above methods the conflict is resolved using the same principle used in Cascading Style Sheets inline markup has priority over higher level markup The priority for the different methods is as follows 1 Text Style since this is inline markup 2 Block Style since this applied to the block 3 Pre defined format the formatting is inherent in the element name e g n2 and div The Return key and pre defined formats In Authentic View when the Return key is pressed within the contents of an element having a pre defined format the current element instance and its block are terminated and a new element instance and block are inserted at that point This property is useful for example if you want the Authentic View user to be able to create a new element say a paragraph type element by pressing the Return key To obtain this behavior in Authentic View you would have to assign the contents placeholder a pre defined format of Paragraph p Removing pre defined formats To remove a pre defined format select the component with the pre defined format you want to delete and change the pre defined format to Normal If the pre defined format has been inserted at a non node location then when you place the cursor at this location the selected pre define
285. lowing points about cellpadding in tables should be noted e Inthe Table Properties dialog cellpadding is specified globally in the Table tab as the padding of all cells in the table To specify padding for a particular cell place the cursor in the cell and specify the padding separately for each of the four components left top right and bottom in the Layout tab of the Block Style window 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 254 User Reference Table 8 7 17 Vertical alignment of cell content Commands to set the vertical alignment of cell content are available as icons in the toolbar Place the cursor anywhere in the cell and click the required icon Vertically Align Top vertically aligns cell content with the top of the cell EE Vertically Align Middle vertically aligns cell content with the middle Vertically Align Bottom vertically aligns cell content with the bottm of the cell STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Authentic 255 8 8 Authentic The Authentic menu contains commands that enable you to customize aspects of the Authentic View of an XML document that will be displayed using the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The document processing that you specify using commands in this menu apply only for Authentic View they do not apply for HTML or PDF output 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 256 User Reference Authentic 8 8 1 Node Settings
286. lper 3 Enter the type of entity from the drop down list in the Type field Three types are possible An Internal entity is one for which the text to be used is stored in the XML document itself Selecting PUBLIC or SYSTEM specifies that the resource is located outside the XML file and will be located with the use of a public identifier or a system identifier respectively A system identifier is a URI that gives the location of the resource A public identifier is a location independent identifier which enables some processors to identify the resource If you specify both a public and system identifier the public identifier resolves to the system identifier and the system identifier is used 4 lf you have selected PUBLIC as the Type enter the public identifier of your resource in the PUBLIC field If you have selected Internal or SYSTEM as your Type the PUBLIC field is disabled 5 Inthe Value Path field you can enter any one of the following e f the entity type is Internal enter the text string you want as the value of your entity Do not enter quotes to delimit the entry Any quotes that you enter will be treated as part of the text string Note that entities are a good mechanism for including Unicode characters in your document do this by entering the Unicode number as the value of STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Authentic View Authentic View How To 327 an internal entity If the entity type is SYSTEM
287. lush left Parentheses if negative space otherwise gt gt Parentheses if negative space otherwise located flush left prefix fixed position suffix lt gt Parentheses if negative space otherwise located flush left Parentheses if negative nothing otherwise gt gt Parentheses if negative nothing otherwise located flush left prefix fixed position suffix lt gt Parentheses if negative nothing otherwise located flush left Extendable number of digits to left prefix or to right suffix _ Space A Fill character defined in options th Ordinality of number st nd rd or th TH Ordinality of number ST ND RD or TH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Input Formatting 145 Options The following options are available Option Explanation uc Make uppercase lc Make lowercase left Left aligned right Right aligned ro Read XML only no editing allowed edit The field is editable active by default dec lt char gt Specify a character for the decimal point default is point fill lt char gt Specify fill character base lt year gt Base year for year fields see Note below pos Show only positive numbers input of negative numbers allowed Note on Base Year When using short year formats for example DD MM YyY base 1940 the base year specifies a cut off for a century If the user ent
288. ly you could have dragged the image into the schema tree and created it as a child element of any element In this case the value of the image s src attribute is imported as the content of the element you create it as For example lt LogoLocation gt altova gif lt LogoLocation gt gt STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 345 10 1 9 Converting HTML hyperlinks STYLEVISION also allows you to import the URL and text of an HTML hyperlink Do this in your document as follows 1 Select the HTML hyperlink text www altova com in the Design Document 2 Dragitinto the schema tree and drop it as a child of Article 3 Select Convert selection to elements Schema from HTML Import Document Root Article Copyright Year a Logo gt Title j Para Unorderedlist Section j AltovaLink gt href LinkText a gt 4 Rename the nodes to the names shown in the screenshot The URL is imported to the href attribute of AltovaLink and the link text is imported as content of the element LinkText The corresponding XML code should be lt AltovaLink href www altova com gt lt LinkText gt www altova com lt LinkText gt lt AltovaLink gt Note If instead of selecting Convert selection to elements you had selected Convert selection to attributes then the node now represented as the element LinkText would have been
289. m the menu and drop it as soon as the check mark icon appears below the mouse pointer To reset either of the menu bars 1 Select the Default Menu entry in the combo box 2 Click the Reset button just below the menu name A prompt appears asking if you are sure you want to reset the menu bar To customize a context menu a right click menu 1 Select the context menu from the combo box 2 Click the Commands tab and drag the commands to the context menu that is now open To delete commands from a context menu 1 Click right on the command or icon representing the command and 2 Select the Delete option from the popup menu or 1 Select Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog box and 2 Drag the command away from the context menu and drop it as soon as the check mark icon appears below the mouse pointer To reset a context menu 1 Select the context menu from the combo box and 2 Click the Reset button just below the context menu name A prompt appears asking if 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 294 User Reference Tools you are sure you want to reset the context menu To close a context menu window e Click on the Close icon at the top right of the title bar or e Click the Close button of the Customize dialog box Menu animations The menu animation option specifies the way a menu is displayed when a menu is clicked Select an option from the drop down list of menu animations Menu shadows If yo
290. ma or are named or spelled differently in the schema then the XML file will be invalid After selecting the appropriate model all elements in the selected model which do not exist in the table structure of the schema or which do not have a corresponding schema element specified for it are displayed in red If a schema element exists that corresponds to a CALS HTML element then you must map this element to the corresponding CALS HTML element Note When all the elements in the CALS HTML Table Properties dialog are displayed in black this means that the schema contains elements that correspond to the elements of the selected table model If an element name in the Default column is displayed in red this indicates that either no corresponding schema element exists or that a corresponding schema element exists but has not been mapped to the table model element in the latter case you must enter the name of the corresponding schema element into the User Defined column Caution If all the element names are displayed in black be aware that this does not necessarily mean that the table structure of the schema corresponds exactly with the selected table model There may still be additional elements in the table structure of the schema that could cause errors You should carefully check your schema for this Also check the attributes of the schema elements for exact correspondence and naming Absent or wrongly named attributes will cause validation e
291. matting can be applied to any numeric XML Schema datatype element such as xs date which is present in the Design Document as contents or an input field To format such an element do the following 1 In the Design Document right click the contents placeholder or input field of the element and in the context menu that appears shown below click Input Formatting Last Updated Date TIT Cut Umschalt Entf Copy Strg C Name gt contents lt Nan Delete Input Formatting JO Authentic Node Settings Location 2 not amp ddress Ld 2 The Input Formatting dialog shown below appears Note that the dialog below contains the line Formats for type date and that the standard format for the date datatype is given This is because the datatype of the element selected in this case is xs date For another datatype the information and options in the dialog would be correspondingly different Input Formatting x m Formats for type date Unformatted Standard format YYY MM DD Formatted Cancel z No errors in format Insert Field Field Options Go to Error v Apply same format to XSLT 1 0 output not all formatting options can be applied 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 140 How To Use Input Formatting You can specify that the element s content be unformatted i e that it have the standard formatting for that datatyp
292. me level it does not change levels e Anindividual criterion changes position within the same level If the adjacent criterion is further outward inward i e not on the same level then the selected criterion will move 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 170 How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION outward inward one level at a time To delete a criterion in a DB Filter select the criterion and click Delete Modifying a DB Filter To modify a DB Filter click Edit Edit Database Filters This pops up the Edit Database Filters dialog box You can now edit the expressions in any of the listed criteria add new criteria re order criteria or delete criteria in the DB Filter After you have completed the modifications click OK The data from the database is automatically re loaded into STYLEVISION so as to reflect the modifications to the DB Filter Clearing deleting a DB Filter To clear or delete a DB Filter select the element for which the DB Filter has to be cleared either in the Design Window or the Schema Tree There is one DB Filter for each top level data table element Then click Edit Clear DB Filter The filter will be cleared and the filter symbol will no longer appear alongside the name of the element in the Schema Tree STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 171 5 12 3 Generating files related to the DB After you have created a DB based ST
293. mplate will be created with the properties of the local template the local template is deleted and the global template is used for that element Note that the Make Global Template command is displayed in the context menu only for those elements that are listed in the Global Templates list Whenever a global template is created empty or not a sign appears to the left of the element s name in the Global Templates list see figure below Note that a global template can be created only for the global element itself not for the descendants that are displayed when the global element is expanded After a global template is created it will not automatically be used for an element in the Design Document unless it has been created from a local template The use of the global template for an element in the Design Document must be explicitly specified This is described in the section Using Global Templates below Defining properties for Global Templates To add formatting properties to an empty global template key in values for the required text properties in the Text Style and or Block Style windows In the example below the global template for the italic element has been assigned a font style value of italic 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 106 How To Use Global Templates C Program FilessAltova SmlspysE xe Document Root contents E Y OrgChart Global Templates Department Desc E
294. mplates Street ipe streeP contents Xipo street City ipe city contents pacity State amp Zip ipe state contents ipo state ipo zip gt c Address C2 Address EU M ddress EU dino city PERI Roco Address EUR The result is a condition that selects the content of the Address EU ipo city element when the address element is Address EU Creating a condition to make shareholders names bold In the dynamic table for the Person element you will first create a column for the number of shares each employee holds Then create a conditional template around the First element to display the element s content in bold if the Share element is non empty and greater than 0 Do the following 1 2 Place the cursor in the Leave column and click Table Insert Column or the ES icon to insert a column before the Leave column Type in the column header Shares join the two header cells of the column and format the header text Drag the element Shares from the schema tree into the Shares column body Create the element as content Set font size of the Shares element content to 10pt The column should look like this Email Shares Total EMail contents EMail Shares EI ces LeaveT otal contents LeaveT otal Check the display of the Shares column in the Authentic and HTML Previews and in the PDF Preview Now right click the contents placeholder of the First element and select Insert
295. mplex features of STYLEVISION For each of the features considered there is an explanation of the feature s function followed by a description of its usage The following features are discussed Namespaces Global Templates Data entry devices Lists Tables Auto Calculations Conditional templates Date Picker Input Formatting Parameters PDF processing and page layout Databases in STYLEVISION STYLEVISION from the command line STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Namespaces 95 5 1 Namespaces Namespaces with DTDs and XML Schemas When using namespaces it is important to know that e DTDs are not namespace aware e XML Schemas are namespace aware This means that in an XML document according to the Namespace Recommendation an element such as altova title is the same as the element title if both belong to the same namespace The prefix altova is not a part of the element name but is a reference to a namespace However since DTDs are not namespace aware they recognize altova as part of the element name Consequently a DTD would see altova title and title as two different elements STYLEVISION does not support the use of namespaces in DTDs If you wish to use namespaces with your documents we recommend that you use XML Schemas Problems of namespaces in DTDs If you wish to use a DTD to validate an XML document that uses namespaces you would have to declare xmins with an optional p
296. mpliant in the Options dialog 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 296 User Reference Tools Note The XSLT for FO that you generate with the File Save generated XSL FO file command will be either in compliance with FOP 0 20 5 or with the full XSL FO standard depending on the selection you make for the XSL FO Generation option in this dialog Any error will only be reported when the FO document is processed by the FO processor Also see Setting up STYLEVISION STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Help 297 8 12 Help The Help menu contains commands to access the onscreen halp manual for STYLEVISION commands to provide information about STYLEVISION and links to support pages on the Altova web site The Help menu also contains the Registration dialog which lets you enter your license key code once you have purchased the product 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 298 User Reference Help 8 12 1 Table of contents The Table of Contents command opens the onscreen help manual for STYLEVISION with the Table of Contents displayed in the left hand side pane of the Help window The Table of Contents provides a good overview of the entire Help document Clicking an entry in the Table of Contents takes you to that topic STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Help 299 8 12 2 Index The Index command opens the
297. n XML Schema is created with the selected tables as children of the document element DB The schema is displayed in the Schema Window The Global Templates list also contains the selected DB tables You can now start designing the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet A temporary XML File is created each time either the HTML or PDF Preview tab is clicked The XML file is structured according to the generated XML Schema and contains data from the selected DB tables Note Data input to the DB via Authentic View is not supported Consequently the Authentic Preview tab of STYLEVISION is automatically disabled when an STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet based on a DB is created or opened Only one file can be open at a time in STYLEVISION A newly opened file replaces the previously opened file If you have not saved changes to the previously opened file you will be prompted about whether you wish to save your changes or not 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 202 User Reference File 8 4 3 Open Design The Open Design command allows you to open a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS file The familiar Open dialog of Windows systems is opened and allows you to select a sps file type If a Working XML File was assigned to the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet during a previous session then the Authentic Preview will be also be enabled Otherwise you will have to assign a Working XML File in order to enable Authentic Pr
298. n be assigned a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and the document can then be edited in Authentic View using the document template and controls specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet e Existing XML documents can be assigned a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet that is based on the same schema at any time and can be edited subsequently in Authentic View The user of Authentic View is not expected to be knowledgeable about either XML or the schema being used for the document The document display in Authentic View should make content editing as easy and non technical as possible It is therefore the task of the person who designs the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet to produce a user friendly Authentic View display For information about using Authentic View see the Authentic View documentation in the user manual of the relevant Altova product 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 12 Introduction Databases and STYLEVISION 2 5 Databases and STYLEVISION In STYLEVISION you can also base a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet on a database DB This means that you can use STYLEVISION as a reporting tool for databases You can create a design for the report in a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet preview the HTML and PDF output in STYLEVISION and generate HTML and PDF files via the command line The broad mechanism by which database reports are designed previewed and generated is as follows e Connect to the database with STYLEVISION
299. n is not possible If you look closely you will also notice that all the column widths are equal This is the default for XSL FO output The solution would be to change column widths so that long the e mail column is wide enough to accommodate its content In STYLEVISION you can modify column widths and other table properties Modifying table properties To modify the table properties place the cursor anywhere in the table and click Table Properties The following dialog pops up or Table STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Inserting a dynamic SPS table 55 x Table Row Column Cell align bgcolor border border collapse cellpadding cellspacing frame height page break after page break before rules table layout Cancel MME EO NEEN E Make the following modifications 1 For the entire table in the Table tab set border to 1 cellpadding to 3 cellspacing to 0 and width to 10096 To give the header row a background color place the cursor in the header row click Table Table Properties and in the Row tab specify a bgcolor Now give the footer row a background color using the same method To modify the column widths place the cursor in the first column click Table Table Properties and in the Column tab specify a width of 15 Repeat the steps for each column using the following widths second column 15 third column 25 fourth column 15 f
300. n properties to the output document The instructions for content selection processing placement and formatting are all contained in the stylesheet STYLEVISION enables you to create a special type of XSLT based stylesheet called a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet You do not need to know XSLT in order to create a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Most of the XSLT constructs are created with mechanisms in the STYLEVISION interface and you will be able to construct simple STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets after learning to use these mechanisms In order to build more sophisticated stylesheets with STYLEVISION it helps if you have a knowledge of XPath 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Introduction Uses of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 2 3 Uses of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets The stylesheet you create with STYLEVISION is saved as a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet or SPS file so called because of its sps file extension A STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet can be used for the following purposes e To display an XML file in Authentic View Authentic View is a graphical user interface that allows users unfamiliar with XML to enter content in the XML document If your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is being constructed for this purpose it should aim to make the Authentic View display of the XML document as user friendly as possible The WYSIWYG Authentic View of an XML document can also be printed directly to the printer If this is a re
301. n that it will do nothing at all in a single user situation If you are not connected to a LAN or are using dial up connections to connect to the Internet STYLEVISION 2004 will NOT generate any network traffic at all Multi license If more than one copy of STYLEVISION 2004 is used within the same LAN they will briefly communicate with each other on startup to exchange their key codes to ensure that the number of concurrent licenses purchased is not accidentally violated as additional copies of the product are launched by more users This is the same kind of license metering technology that is common in the Unix world and with many other database development tools and allows our customers to purchase reasonably priced concurrent use multi user licenses see http Awww xmlspy com order for our price list Please note that STYLEVISION 2004 is at no time attempting to send any information out of your LAN or over the Internet We are also deliberately sending very few and small network packets so as to not put a burden on any network The TCP IP ports 2799 used by STYLEVISION 2004 are officially registered with the IANA see http www isi edu in notes iana assignments port numbers for details and our license metering module is a proven and tested technology If you are using a firewall you may notice communications on port 2799 between the computers that are running STYLEVISION 2004 You are of course free to block such traffic between
302. nce Symbols and icons 193 Shares gt contents 2 count Person Toolbar items border Conditional template tags are blue and contain a question mark An Auto Calculation is indicated by an equals to sign followed by the first characters of the XPath expression used for the Auto Calculation Most toolbar items are intuitive and display a tooltip when you mouseover Some are specific to STYLEVISION ig pe e JI Normal m Creates a new STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from a database Edit a DB Filter Brings up the Edit DB Filter dialog for the selected data table and allows you to edit a DB Filter Clear DB Filter Clears criteria in the DB Filter of the selected element Save Authentic XML Data Saves modifications you make to the Working XML File in Authentic Preview Edit Stylesheet Parameters Brings up the Edit Parameters dialog in which you can declare global parameters for the stylesheet Auto add Date picker If this command is toggled on the date picker will be inserted when a node of of datatype xs date is dropped into the Design Document Authentic Node Settings Brings up the Authentic Node Settings dialog forthe selected node The Pre Defined Format combo box Selecting a format from this drop down box applies it to the selected element All content when initially created is assigned the Normal format by default Insert Static SPS table See Tables for more details on the var
303. ncluding backups and copies stored on a computer c the receiving party secures a personalized key code from Altova and d the receiving party accepts the terms and conditions of this Software License Agreement and any other terms and conditions upon which you legally purchased a license to the Software Notwithstanding the foregoing you may not transfer education pre release or not for resale copies of the Software PRE RELEASE AND EVALUATION PRODUCT ADDITIONAL TERMS If the product you have received with this license is pre commercial release or beta Software Pre release Software then this Section applies In addition this section applies to all evaluation and or demonstration copies of Altova software Evaluation Software and continues in effect until you purchase a license To the extent that any provision in this section is in conflict with any other term or condition in this Software License Agreement this section shall supersede such other term s and condition s with respect to the Pre release and or Evaluation Software but only to the extent necessary to resolve the conflict You acknowledge that the Pre release Software is a pre release version does not represent final product from Altova and may contain bugs errors and other problems that could cause system or other failures and data loss CONSEQUENTLY THE PRE RELEASE AND OR EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED TO YOU AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES FOR USE OR PERFORMANCE AND ALTO
304. nents of a page STYLEVISION allows you to design an optional cover page and optional headers and footers for the PDF output After you have defined these page layout features you can generate the XSLT for FO by clicking File Save generated XSL FO file You can then use this XSLT to process the XML In STYLEVISION you can see a preview of the PDF output in the PDF Preview tab Clicking the PDF Preview tab executes the following background processes i the Working XML File is processed with the XSLT for FO generated by the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet ii the resulting FO is processed with the FO processor and the PDF is displayed in the PDF Preview tab Note that the PDF display is a preview it cannot be saved To obtain the PDF you must carry out the actual two step transformation This section describes how to set up e Page dimensions of the PDF e The cover page e Headers and footers e Fonts For information on how the header and footer of tables that flow over more than one page are handled see Formatting static and dynamic tables Also see PDF Page Properties and Tools XSL FO Options For advanced issues see XSL FO and PDF issues STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use PDF processing and page layout 149 5 11 1 PDF page definition For the PDF output certain basic page properties can be defined These include the size of the PDF page the margins of the page and page numbering opti
305. new cell All property values of the cell to the left are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 248 User Reference Table 8 7 11 Join Cell Below join The Join Cell Below command joins the cell in which the cursor is to the cell below The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell All property values of the cell on the top are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 249 8 7 12 Join Cell Above join The Join Cell Above command joins the cell in which the cursor is to the cell above The contents of both cells are concatenated in the new cell All property values of the cell on top are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 250 User Reference Table 8 7 13 Split Cell Horizontally gp SPLIT The Split Cell Horizontally command creates a new cell to the right of the cell in which the cursor is The contents of the original cell stay in the original cell All properties of the original cell are passed to the new cell This command applies to both static and dynamic tables STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 251 8 7 14 Split Cell Vertically ttu rpi SPLIT The Sp
306. ng else while not approved in the display could map to O or not approved or anything else STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Authentic View Authentic View Interface 321 approved Optional nodes When an element or attribute is optional according to the referenced schema a prompt of type add elemenv attribute is displayed Title add Title Clicking the prompt adds the element and places the cursor for data entry If there are multiple optional nodes the prompt add is displayed Clicking the prompt displays a menu of the optional nodes 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 322 Authentic View Authentic View Interface 9 1 4 Authentic View context menus Right clicking on some selected document content or node pops up a menu with commands relevant to the selection or cursor location This kind of menu is called a context menu The context menu that appears depends on where in the document the cursor is The context menu with applicable commands enabled is shown below The figure below also shows the Insert submenu which is a list of all elements that can be inserted at that point Note that the Insert submenu shows above the rule the elements that can be inserted within the current element and below the rule the elements that can be inserted before the current element In the figure below the current element is the para element The italic and strong elements can be i
307. no Fax 1 321 555 5 State amp Zip DC 29213 E mail office nanonull com 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 62 Tutorial Inserting bookmarks and hyperlinks 4 8 Inserting bookmarks and hyperlinks You can create bookmarks anchors and hyperlinks in the HTML PDF and Authentic View outputs in Authentic View hyperlinking is restricted to linking within the document In the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you can insert a bookmark at any location in the Design Document You can then insert a hyperlink to a bookmark in the document or to any URL In this section you will Create a bookmark at the top of your document Create a hyperlink at the bottom of the document which links back to the bookmark Create a hyperlink to a Website Create a hyperlink to a pre addressed e mail Creating a bookmark at the top of your document 1 Place the cursor just after the start tag of the orgChart element and right click 2 From the popup menu that appears select Insert Bookmark The following dialog appears Insert Bookmark x Bookmark name top_of_page Other bookmarks on this page Elear Goto 3 Give your bookmark a name such as top of page and click OK The bookmark is created and is indicated by a flag gt BrgChart gt Ap Companloco Gre L3 Inserting a hyperlink to a bookmark 1 Place the cursor just before the end tag of the OrgChart element and type in Go to top 2
308. ns The button option allows you to insert a button and specify the text on the button This is useful if you wish to associate scripts with button events in the generated HTML Note however that a button does not map to any XML value and does not allow data entry in Authentic View STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Lists 115 5 4 Lists Function If an element has multiple instances to output its instances as the items of a list A list can be bulletted or numbered A list can be a static list or a dynamic list Static lists in which all list content comes from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet are described first the rest of the section is about dynamic lists the content of which comes from the XML document Static lists The content of a static list is contained entirely in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet To create a static list click Insert Bullets and Numbering or the Bullets icon or Numbering icon in the toolbar This creates the first item of the list Type in the content of the list item and press enter to create a new list item Static lists can be created for a single level To change from bullets to numbering click the Numbering icon and vice versa Dynamic lists Dynamic lists display the content of a set of sibling nodes of the same name with each node represented as a single list item in the list The element the instances of which are to appear as the list items of the list is
309. nserted within the current para element The para and Of fice elements can be inserted before the current para element Insert gt italic Append strong Insert Entity para Remove Office Apply Clear d Cut Shift Delete Copy Ctrl C e Paste Ctrl Pointing over the Remove command pops up a menu list consisting of the selected element and all its ancestors up to the document element Click the element to be removed This is a quick way to delete an element or any of its ancestors Note that clicking an ancestor element will remove all its descendants including the selected element STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Authentic View Authentic View How To 323 9 2 Authentic View How To This section describes important features of Authentic View in detail Features have been included in this section either because they are commonly used or require an explanation of the mechanisms or concepts involved The section explains the following e The context menus provide a fast way to access Authentic View s document editing commands The section Using context menus describes how they are to be used e The Date Picker is a graphical calendar that enters dates in the correct XML format when you click a date See Using the Date Picker e An entity is shorthand for a special character or text string You can define your own entities which allows you to insert these special characters or
310. nt An example is the HTML language in which both the o1 and ul elements have 1 as the listitem element In this kind of scenario it is best to define global templates for both the o1 and u1 elements STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Lists 117 making sure to create the correct element as the list Shown below is a view of the Design Document for the global template of an o1 type element Document Root lists contents ol i EB li para m ul Global Templates lt li The 1i element was dragged from the content model of the o1 element in the Global Templates list in the Schema Window and was created as a numbered list Similarly create a global template for the u1 type element but create the 1i element as a bulletted list in this case e The schema might have a para type element as a child of the 1i type element and an li type element may have more than one para type element within it The best way to deal with this kind of situation is to first define the para type element as a global element in the XML Schema this step is not necessary for DTDs Then create a global template for the para type element making sure to create it as a paragraph Shown below is a view of the Design Document for the global template of a para type element 4 Document Root T Global Templates Q li Ey ol li s mS m 4y ul
311. nt use the settings in the valign attribute of the Table Cell tab of the Table Properties dialog 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 156 How To Use PDF processing and page layout 5 11 4 PDF fonts How the formatter and PDF Viewer use fonts The formatter creates the PDF and the PDF Viewer typically Adobe s Acrobat PDF Reader reads it In order to lay out the PDF the formatter needs to know details about the fonts used in the document particularly the widths of all the glyphs used It needs this information to calculate line lengths hyphenation justification etc This information is known as the metrics of the font and itis stored with each font Some formatters such as XEP can read the metrics directly from the system s font folder Others such as FOP need the metrics in a special format it can understand When the metrics of a font are available to the formatter the formatter can successfully lay out the PDF You must ensure that the font metrics files of all the fonts you use in your document are available to the formatter you are using The formatter can either reference a font or embed it in the PDF file If the font is referenced then PDF Reader will look for that font in its own font resource folder which contains the Base 14 fonts first and then in the system s font folder If the font is available it will be used when the PDF is displayed Otherwise the Reader will use an alternative from its
312. nt contains over 50 000 glyphs and covers the entire set of characters specified by the Unicode 2 1 standard It needs 23MB and is included with Microsoft Office 2000 We highly recommend that you install this font on your system and use it with STYLEVISION 2004 if you are often editing documents in different writing systems This font is not installed with the typical setting of the Microsoft Office setup program but you can choose the Custom Setup option to install this font In the Examples folder you will also find a new XHTML file called Unicode UTF8 xml that contains the sentence When the world wants to talk it speaks Unicode in many different languages Wenn die Welt miteinander spricht spricht sie Unicode and writing systems ERAT ICSE 5s Unicode C3 this line has been adopted from the 10th Unicode conference in 1997 and is a beautiful illustration of the importance of Unicode for the XML standard Opening this file will give you a quick impression on what is possible with Unicode and what writing systems are supported by the fonts available on your PC installation Windows 98 ME These Windows versions do not include full Unicode capabilities on the operating system layer Instead support for non roman writing systems is provided through so called code pages that contain all the required characters mapped to either the available byte values in the range of 0x80 to OxFF in case of single byte systems such as Cyrillic or Hebr
313. nt for which a global template is defined is placed in the Root Template you can choose between using the global template and using a local template for that occurrence The Root Template gives you control over the structure of the result document Global templates allow you to write rules for elements the locations and frequency of which in the instance document you cannot know in advance For example you cannot know before a paragraph is written whether it will contain italics So you cannot place a rule for processing italic elements in the Root Template the structure of which corresponds to the output document structure Global templates also give you efficiency For example if a title element is to occur several times in a document a single global template can be used for all title elements You can use an appropriate mix of Root Template and global templates in your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Looping through a nodeset A common feature of XML documents is the repeating data structure For example an office department typically has several employees The data for each of these employees is stored in a data structure which is repeated for each employee Similarly the data for each department in STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction STYLEVISION features 17 the office is stored in a repeating data structure In the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the processing for each such data structure is defined in a
314. ntire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be at Altova s option either 1 return of the price paid if any or ii repair or replacement of the Software that does not meet Altova s Limited Warranty and which is returned to Altova with a copy of your receipt This Limited Warranty is void if failure of the Software has resulted from accident abuse misapplication abnormal use Trojan horse virus or any other malicious external code Any replacement Software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty 30 days whichever is longer This limited warranty does not apply to Evaluation and or Pre release Software b No Other Warranties and Disclaimer THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY AND REMEDIES STATE THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR ALTOVA OR ITS SUPPLIER S BREACH OF WARRANTY ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS YOU MAY OBTAIN BY USING THE SOFTWARE EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY AND FOR ANY WARRANTY CONDITION REPRESENTATION OR TERM TO THE EXTENT WHICH THE SAME CANNOT OR MAY NOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED BY LAW APPLICABLE TO YOU IN YOUR JURISDICTION ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS OR TERMS EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WHETHER BY STATUTE COMMON LAW CUSTOM USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY OTHER MATTERS TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW ALTOVA AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS EIT
315. o create a footer with or without sums of numeric columns Check the Create Footer and Summary for Numeric Fields checkboxes Click OK to create the table 5 To adjust the vertical spacing put a line break before the Department Name element and after the Department Person element This part of the Design Document will look like this Name gt contents lt Namel First Last Title PhoneExt its Last contents contents contents contents contents Firs sum Person Notice that the column headers are the names of the child elements of the Person element and that a footer has been created with a sum of the numeric column for telephone extensions In the HTML Preview the corresponding output for the first department will look like this 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 54 Tutorial Inserting a dynamic SPS table Administration First Last Title PhoneExt EMail Vernon Callaby Office Manager 582 v callaby nanonull com Frank Further Accounts Receivable 471 Efurther nanonull com Loby Matise Accounting Manager 963 2016 matise nanonull com The PDF Preview will look like this Administration Notice that the contents of the EMail column flow over the cell and table boundary This is because the email address is a single non breaking string for which hyphenatio
316. o elements and ii Surrounding the selection with an element node But in the latter case why is the Title element empty although the Design Document displays the text A Sample Article as the contents of the node The text in the Design Document in this case is static text that will be included in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet What you need to remember is that for HTML content to appear as element content in the XML document the Design Document has to display that HTML content as a contents placeholder All actual text in the Design Document as is the case with STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets is static text Undos Now undo your changes till the Title element is again represented by the contents placeholder in the Design Document Notice that the Undo command works even though the file has been saved Do not delete the Tit 1e element If you delete the Title element that has been created to surround content any static content that is contained in that element in the Design Document will also be deleted In this case this is not what we want Adding more children elements Now convert the first HTML paragraph into a Para element that is a child of Article Your schema tree and Design Document should look like this when you have finished Schema from HTML Import EZ Document Root me contents Karz Article d La Pars contents Paral Do not convert the second HTML paragraph into an element Additional elements In
317. ode of the new location is not the same as that of the original location then correct the XPath in the condition s of the conditional template as well as the location paths of any dynamic content within the condition template To delete a conditional template without removing the contents drag the contents to a location outside the tags of the condition and then delete the now empty condition Examples The section Using Conditional Templates in the STYLEVISION tutorial has examples of conditional templates for e Setting up alternative data structures based on the value of a node e Selecting and processing a node according to the value of another node e Formatting text differently based on the numeric value of a node 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 136 How To Use Conditional templates The section Creating the Table Footer in the STYLEVISION tutorial has examples of conditional templates for e Compiling a list based on the numeric value of a descendant node e Inserting characters based on the position of a node in a nodeset Expanding and collapsing elements in Authentic View You can use conditional templates to provide expanded and collapsed views of elements To do this carry out the following steps 1 In the schema define an attribute for the elements you want expanded collapsed For example the attribute collapse with enumerations yes and no 2 In STYLEVISION create a conditional template around th
318. of nodes for example or by marking it static text for example Then either drag it to the new location move or cut and paste it to the new location move or copy and paste it to the new location copy Moving complex components such as tables You can even move or copy complex components such as a table and all its contents a list an auto calculation or a conditional template STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tips Handling components in the Design Document 179 For example to move a static table mark the table from one whitespace before the table to one whitespace after the table and drag or cut copy and paste the static table to the new location In the case of dynamic tables select either tag of the element created as a table these tags are located directly before and after the table and drag or cut copy and paste the selected table to the new location Moving dynamic content nodes When you move or copy dynamic content the XPath originally used to locate the node may be invalid in another location because the context node in the new location is different In this case an error message to this effect will appear and the node that has been moved to the new context will have a red strikethrough in its tags Location US v Location 2 ipersteet gt contents ipe street To correct such an error drag the correct context node to an adjacent location as shown here Location US
319. ons All these settings are available in the PDF Page Properties dialog which you open by selecting the menu option Properties PDF page The dialog is as shown below PDF Page Properties E xl Paper Size Predefined Custom size Width E lin Height Je 5in Margins Top 0 73in Bottom 0 73in Multiple pages Normal Mirror Margins Left 0 6in Right 0 6in m Page numbering Format 123 v Start at E Cancel Page size Set the page size by selecting one of the pre defined options from the drop down menu or by selecting Custom size and then entering the desired page width and page height Page margins Set the top bottom left and right margins by entering the required number followed by any of the XSL units points pt picas pc centimeters cm millimeters mm and inches in Note that i there must not be a space between the number and the unit ii there is no default unit iii a unit is mandatory Note that the top and bottom margins also determine the vertical extent of the header and footer respectively 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 150 How To Use PDF processing and page layout HEADER Margin Top Header Extent Margin Left Margin Right If you set Multiple pages to Normal then all pages in the PDF will have the same value for all left margins and the same value for all right margins If on the other hand
320. onscreen help manual for STYLEVISION with the Keyword Index displayed in the left hand side pane of the Help window The index lists keywords and lets you navigate to a topic by double clicking the keyword If a keyword is linked to more than one topic you are presented a list of the topics to choose from 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 300 User Reference Help 8 12 3 Search The Search command opens the onscreen help manual for STYLEVISION with the Search dialog displayed in the left hand side pane of the Help window To search for a term enter the term in the input field and press Return The Help system performs a full text search on the entire Help documentation and returns a list of hits Double click any item to display it STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Help 301 8 12 4 Registration When you start STYLEVISION for the first time you are presented with the Registration dialog box You must enter your unique license key code in this dialog to register your product with Altova Registering your product is required to activate your license and unlock your software Eligibility for technical support depends upon the type of license you have purchased so registration is required in order for you to avail of technical support If you need to manage your licenses or change licenses you can access the Registration dialog at any time with the Registration command
321. ontent 254 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 254 W W3C 358 359 Warranty 369 Windows 2000 360 362 Windows 95 360 Windows 95 98 363 Windows 98 360 Windows NT 360 362 Working XML file 14 assigning for STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 34 assigning to STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 204 print preview 210 printing 211 Writing systems 364 Wwriting system 362 X XDR 358 359 XEP 156 configuring fonts 156 XML 362 convert HTML to 269 Parser 358 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 88 XML Document creation process 8 10 XML file 347 saving in HTML to XML conversion 347 viewing output of HTML to XML conversion 333 with data from DB 171 XML Schema 358 359 XML Spy web site 306 XML tables 128 description of 128 enabling in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 128 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 119 inserting in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 261 XML Data 359 XMLSPY 34 Authentic 34 XPath 86 for additional validation 86 in Auto Calculation 65 in conditional templates 71 for selecting combo box entries 109 XSD 358 359 XSL FO 25 compliance levels Enterprise Edition 25 in STYLEVISION 295 XSL FO issues 181 XSLT 7 and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 7 editing XSLT generated from STYLEVISION 182 saving in HTML to XML conversion 347 from STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 34 from STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 13 2004 Altova GmbH
322. oth columns of the outer static table and specifying the same cellspacing value for both nested tables 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the first column of the static table taking care not to place itin the nested table in that column 2 Click z or Table Table Properties and select the Column tab 3 Forthe valign property select the value top 4 Repeat the above three steps for the second column of the outer static table 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 60 Tutorial Inserting a static SPS table Specify cellspacing of 4px for both nested tables in the Table tab of the Table Properties dialog for each table Check the Authentic or HTML Preview to see the effect of your changes The text in both columns should now be aligned Joining cells The objective is to have the State and Zip fields appear in a single row so that both columns have three row tables Do the following 1 oo PPN Place the cursor in the cell containing the text Zip join Click or Table Join cell above Change the text to State amp Zip Place the cursor in the cell containing the contents of the ipo state element FA Click or Table Join cell below Put a space between the two contents placeholders in the cell The nested dynamic table in the Design Document will now look like this address Street postee contents postee City State amp Zip po state contents pastate pozP
323. ou are done your schema tree and Design Document should look like this Schema from HTML Import 4 Document Root C Article C Title Para Unorderedlist E Section C Title Para E Y Orderediist E ListNode Para Gection gt Title gt contents lt Titel Bection Para contents Paral Orderediist ED contents Para Orderediist lt Section STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 341 10 1 6 Impor ting HTML tables You can import the HTML table into the XML document as follows 1 Select any text fragment in the table and drag it into the Schema Window Drop it as a child of Sect ion and select Convert selected table list to elements In the dialog that pops up select the dynamic table option the top down option and the with header option Rename TableNode to BasedOn Your schema tree should now look like this Schema from HTML Import Z Document Root El Article C Title Para Y Unorderedlist lt Section Title Para t rderedlist a f BasedOn NewNode DTD XML Schema E XML Authentic Stylesheet XSLT Save the STYLEVISION document and view the table markup in the XML file Based On NewNode Schema Tree lt NewNode gt DT D DTD XML Schema XML Schema XML XML Au am
324. ou will be using a text string XML fragment or some other external resource in multiple locations in your document You define the entity which is basically a short name that stands in for the required data in the Define Entities dialog After defining an entity you can use it at multiple locations in your document This helps you save time and greatly enhances maintenance There are two broad types of entities you can use in your document a parsed entity which is XML data either a text string or a fragment of an XML document or an unparsed entity which is non XML data such as a binary file usually a graphic sound or multimedia object Each entity has a name and a value In the case of parsed entities the entity is a placeholder for the XML data The value of the entity is either the XML data itself or a URI that points to a xm1 file that contains the XML data In the case of unparsed entities the value of the entity is a URI that points to the non XML data file To define an entity do the following 1 Click Authentic Define Entities This opens the Define Entities dialog Define Entities Name Type PUB Value Path NDATA OK Internal Nanonull Inc n Internal Nanonull Europe 4G m Cancel Internal Nanonull Partners Inc Intemal http www nanonull com SYSTEM 3 SYSTEM v Insert Delete 2 Enter the name of your entity in the Name field This is the name that will appear in the Entities Entry He
325. ow and specify border bottom style solid border bottom width medium and any color for border bottom color 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 50 Tutorial Formatting the components border right style border right width border bottom color 058884 border bottom style solid border bottom width medium clear Position Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart The logo is flush with the left margin of the page and with the bottom border Some padding would improve the display In the Design Window select the href element again and in the Layout tab of the Block Style Window set the padding left and padding bottom properties to 10px The Authentic and HTML Previews will now look like this Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Formatting the components 51 The PDF Preview will look like this Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Now format the components currently in the Design Document as you wish using the pre defined formats and the Text Style and Block Style Windows 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 52 Tutorial Inserting a dynamic SPS table 4 6 Inserting a dynamic SPS table A dynamic SPS table hereafter called dynamic table organizes the child nodes elements and attributes of a given element into a table The table can have headers and footers which
326. p XSLI lt XSLT gt Base Based thentic Stylesheet lt Authentic_Stylesheet gt dOn On lt NewNode gt Authentic Stylesheet lt NewNode gt lt DT XML Schema XML Schema XML lt XML gt Au D lt DTD gt thentic_Stylesheet gt lt Authentic_Stylesheet gt EXSLT Sees XSLT lt Base d n Let us make two changes to this markup i Create a parent element called Output for the Basedon element and ii Convert the NewNode child element of Basedon to a child attribute and rename the attribute to Type This is how you would do it To create a parent for BasedoOn do the following in STYLEVISION 1 2 3 4 Right click the Basedon element in the schema tree Select Insert element Rename the new element to Output Drag BasedOn onto Output till the symbol indicating creation as child element appears and then drop it 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 342 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial Converting the NewNode child element to an attribute is described in the next section Creating schema attributes STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 343 10 1 7 Creating schema attributes Converting elements to attributes To convert the NewNode child element of Output Basedon to a child attribute right click NewNode and select Convert to attribute Then rename NewNod
327. pace Courier Note for HTML use CSS 2 allows alternative choices as well as a generic font as a fallback serif sans serif monospace cursive and fantasy Making fonts available to the formatter Most formatters already have available to them the Base 14 fonts It is important to know the names by which the formatter recognizes these fonts so that you correctly indicate them to the formatter Usually this is the extent of font support You can however increase the number of fonts available to the formatter by carrying out a few straightforward steps specific to the formatter you are using The steps for FOP and XEP are given below Setting up font support in FOP FOP needs its font metrics files in a special XML vocabulary So you have to create the required metrics files from the actual font files and then register the metrics files with FOP 1 Create the font metrics file from the PostScript and TrueType font files FOP provides PFM Reader and TTF Reader utilities to convert PostScript and TrueType fonts respectively to XML font metrics file For details of how to do this see the FOP Fonts page 2 Register the fonts with FOP You do this by entering information about the font files in an FOP configuration file See FOP Fonts 3 Inthe file op bat edit the line o ol oe Oo oe l java cp LOCALCLASSPATH org apache fop apps Fop 1 2 3 4 8 to include the location of the configuration file java cp LOCALCL
328. para elements for that office and then the content of the second Office Name element followed by the contents of the Desc para elements for that office and so on If you look at your Design Document you will see that all the Office Name elements are processed first and then all the Office Desc para elements In order to process the Name child element of an Of fice element followed immediately by the Desc para elements of that Of fice element you need to change the location of the Office Desc para element so that it is included in a single Of fice element loop and follows the Name element directly 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 44 Tutorial Processing element content for output Changing the location of the O ice Desc para element 1 2 gue C9 6 Select the Office Desc para element by clicking the start tag of its Of fice element Drag the selected element and drop it before the end tag of the Of fice element on the line above An error message pops up saying that a template selects a node that does not exist DE B Location of logo contents Name contents Name Difice gt Name gt contents lt Name Bice Bese pars contents pars Bese Office Office K rgChar 7 Notice that the tags of the non existent element have a red strikethrough The XPath Office Desc para within the containing Of fice element is wrong because the XPath in context then is Office Office D
329. pdate which is made available at certain times at Altova s sole discretion If Altova in its discretion requests written verification of an error or malfunction discovered by you or requests supporting example files that exhibit the Software problem you shall promptly provide such verification or files by email telecopy or overnight mail setting forth in reasonable detail the respects in which the Software fails to perform You shall use reasonable efforts to cooperate in diagnosis or study of errors Altova may include error corrections in maintenance releases updates or new major releases of the Software Altova is not obligated to fix errors that are immaterial Immaterial errors are those that do not significantly impact use of the Software Whether or not you have purchased the Support amp Maintenance Package technical support only covers issues or questions resulting directly out of the operation of the Software and Altova will not provide you with generic consultation assistance or advice under any circumstances Updating Software may require the updating of software not covered by this Software License Agreement before installation Updates of the operating system and application software not specifically covered by this Software License Agreement are your responsibility and will not be provided by Altova under this Software License Agreement Altova s obligations under this Section 6 are contingent upon your proper use of the Softwar
330. plate rule by deleting the contents placeholder of a node An empty template rule is useful if you wish to define that some node have no template applied to it i e produce no output Also see Processing attribute values for output Processing element content for output Data entry devices and Rest of Contents 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 230 User Reference Insert 8 6 7 Rest of Contents The Rest of Contents command inserts the rest of contents placeholder for that node This placeholder represents the content of unused child nodes of the current node it corresponds to the xs1 apply templates rule of XSLT applied to the unused elements and text nodes of the current element Note that templates are not applied for child attributes Use the rest of contents placeholder in situations where you wish to process one child element in a specific way and apply templates to its siblings It is important to apply templates to siblings in order to avoid the possibility that the siblings are not processed This enables you to reach elements lower down in the document hierarchy The rest of contents placeholder can be deleted by selecting it and pressing the Del key on the keyboard It can also be inserted for an element by placing the cursor inside the element tags right clicking and selecting Insert Rest of Contents Also see Contents STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Inse
331. ponents To create an xs date datatype element with an included Date Picker do the following 1 Ensure that the Auto add Date Picker feature has been switched on 2 Dragthe date datatype element called Date in the example below from the schema tree and create it at the desired location in the Design Document as contents or an Input Field The Design Document for such an element created as contents will look like this Last Updated Date gt contents The Date Picker is created Using this STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet the Authentic View will look like this Organization Chart Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 fil In Authentic View the content of the Date element is displayed first in the example above 2003 09 01 and after it the icon for the Date Picker To modify the date click the icon this pops up the Date Picker shown below 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 138 How To Use Date Picker Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 4 September p HMM Nanonull Inc 4 Location us The Authentic View user can also enter the timezone by clicking the Timezone button which is set to a default of No Timezone The XML entries for the timezone are also in the standard XML Schema format for timezones e g 2003 09 01 01 00 Location of logo nanonull gif Last Updated 2003 09 01 01 00 4 September j 4 ENSE Nanonull Inc Loca
332. port 271 Additional Validation 86 in Authentic View 86 setting in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 86 settings 256 ADO connections 161 for connecting to DB from STYLEVISION 161 Agreement 368 369 Aligning table cell content 254 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 254 Altova web site 306 Anchors 62 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 62 Append 273 HTML import 273 to table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 241 Append row 240 to table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 240 Appendix 366 Apply 191 formatting 191 Arabic 364 Arial Unicode MS 362 Assign Working XML File 204 to STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 204 Attribute 359 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 38 attributeFormDefault 96 98 101 AttributeGroup 359 Attributes 350 352 creating HTML content as in HTML to XML 350 352 in HTML to XML conversion 343 353 Authentic 34 dynamic table editing 318 markup display 318 Authentic node settings 86 additional validation 86 dialog box 88 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 256 Authentic Preview 208 save edits 208 Authentic Stylesheet 34 saving 34 Authentic View 318 changing view to 318 context menus 322 324 document display 320 documentation 314 editing dynamic tables 318 entry helpers in 317 formatting text in 318 in Altova products 5 314 inserting tables 261 interface 316 main window 320 main window in 317 markup display in 318 320 menu bar in 317 of Working XML file
333. ppear as an option in the Input Formatting dialog of the current SPS file when the selected element is of the corresponding dataype Note e You can add as many custom format strings for different datatypes as you want e The sequential order of format strings in the Predefined Format Strings dialog determines the order in which these format strings appear in the Input Formatting dialog The customized format strings appear above the supplied predefined formats e To edit a custom format string double click the entry in the Predefined Format Strings dialog e To delete a custom format string select it and click the Delete button in the dialog 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 284 User Reference Properties 8 10 8 Selected object The Selected object command enables you to edit the properties of the selected STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet component It is enabled when a data entry device or a horizontal rule is selected When you click this command the properties dialog of the selected component type opens Enter the required value and click OK STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Tools 285 8 11 Tools The Tools menu contains the Spell checker command and commands that enable you to customize STYLEVISION Among other options you can customize the toolbar and specify spell checking and FO processor options 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual
334. quirement then attention should also be paid to the formatting of the document e To generate an XSLT stylesheet to obtain HTML output from the source XML e To generate an XSLT stylesheet to obtain XSL FO output XSL FO typically would be further processed to obtain PDF output e To display a database in HTML and PDF formats and to generate the HTML and PDF output files via the command line The illustration below shows how the output generated from the Design Document created in STYLEVISION can be used in an XML environment Note that the PDF output options are available only in the Enterprise Edition of STYLEVISION STYLEVISION Authentic View Design Document XML Document XSLT HTML Printer Note Since all editions of XMLSPY 2004 and AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition have an inbuilt XSLT processor XML documents that you create in these two environments can be processed with a STYLEVISION generated XSLT stylesheet directly from within these Altova products Additionally the Enterprise and Professional editions of XMLSPY 2004 also include support for external XSLT processors and FO processors This means that from within XMLSPY 2004 Enterprise and Professional editions you can use either the inbuilt XSLT processor or an XSLT processor of your choice to obtain HTML and PDF output Databases and STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets You can also use STYLEVISION to create and generate database reports in HTML and PDF formats You
335. r Manual 328 Authentic View Authentic View How To 9 2 4 Images Authentic View is based on Internet Explorer and is able to display most of the image formats that your version of Internet Explorer can display The following commonly used image formats are supported GIF JPG PNG BMP WMF Microsoft Windows Metafile EMF Enhanced Metafile SVG requires Adobe SVG Reader plugin for Internet Explorer STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Chapter 10 HTML to XML Conversion 330 HTML to XML Conversion 10 HTML to XML Conversion STYLEVISION 2004 can generate a schema file DTD or XML Schema an XML file and stylesheets from an HTML document In order to generate these files from the HTML document you import the HTML document into the Design Window of STYLEVISION and use it to build a schema tree In the Design Document view you select the HTML elements or attributes you wish to include in the schema and drag and drop them into the desired location in the schema tree You can also add your own nodes to the schema tree i e nodes that do not come from the HTML document After you have created the schema tree you can edit the Design Document as you would a normal STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet At the end of the process you will have created i a schema tree and ii a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet HTML to XML conversion steps The HTML to XML conversion process consists of the following steps
336. r Stylesheet title bar are one and the same Clicking the Close button in the title bar therefore closes both the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet as well as STYLEVISION STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Getting Started Document design process 29 3 3 Document design process The document you create with STYLEVISION is a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is created in the Design Document tab of the Main Window and it defines how an XML document based on a given schema is to be processed and output The process of creating a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet with STYLEVISION can be divided into the following general parts Selection of dynamic content and its placement in document e Schema A schema DTD or XML Schema is used as the starting point The schema which provides the structure in terms of elements and attributes according to which an XML document can be built is loaded into STYLEVISION It is displayed as a tree in the Schema Window Your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based on the schema you load into STYLEVISION Be sure to finalize your schema before starting to build the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet If you change your schema subsequently you might need to re create your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet from scratch e Content to be selected XML content is selected by dragging an element or attribute from the schema tree e Location in output document The dragged element attribut
337. r bug reports If you have been provided the Pre release Software pursuant to a separate written agreement your use of the Software is governed by such agreement You may not sublicense lease loan rent distribute or otherwise transfer the Pre release Software Upon receipt of a later unreleased version of the Pre release Software or release by Altova of a publicly released commercial version of the Software whether as a stand alone product or as part of a larger product you agree to return or destroy all earlier Pre release Software received from Altova and to abide by the terms of the license agreement for any such later versions of the Pre release Software 5 LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY a Limited Warranty and Customer Remedies Altova warrants to the person or entity that first purchases a license for use of the Software pursuant to the terms of this Software License Agreement that 1 the Software will perform substantially in accordance with any accompanying Documentation for a period of ninety 90 days from the date of receipt and ii any support services provided by Altova shall be substantially as described in section 6 of this agreement Some states and jurisdictions do not allow limitations on duration of an implied warranty so the above limitation may not apply to you To the extent allowed by applicable law implied warranties on the Software if any are limited to ninety 90 days Altova s and its suppliers e
338. r the end tag of the Last element and insert a condition The XPath should be ollowing sibling Person Shares 0 or not Shares The XPath location axis is ol11owing sibling which checks the following siblings of the current Person element The condition searches for following sibling Person elements which contain either Share child elements with values equal to or less than 0 or which contain no Shares child element 10 Insert a comma and a space This puts a comma and space in the output if the condition is evaluated as true If not evaluated as true the conditional template is skipped Then put a period after the Person end tag This causes a period to be inserted after all the Person elements have been looped through The Design Window of this part of the footer will look like this P Shares lt 0 gt First gt contents lt Fis Last gt contents lt Lastl position X2 42 Personl 11 You still have to make allowance for the event that there are no non shareholders in a department i e all department employees are shareholders To cover this eventuality place the cursor before the period and insert a condition The XPath should be count Person count Person Shares gt 0 Insert the text None between the tags of the condition as shown below lt Person count Pers gt None 12 Format the entire footer row text suitably 13 Save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and refresh the Authenti
339. rameters in the XSLT Parameter names and values are case sensitive If the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is DB based and has a DB Filter which uses parameters the XML generated from the DB will be appropriately filtered using parameter values you specify at the command line Each parameter declaration on the command line must be prefixed with a and if multiple parameters are used they must be separated from each other with a space No default output is specified so you must specify the required output If you specify only the output file no XML or XSLT the Working XML File or DB specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is used for the source XML and the required XSLT is generated from the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet SPS file Any temporary files that are created are deleted at the end of the processing The InpXSLFo option allows you to specify an external XSLT for FO file as an input option In order to generate PDF output the OutPDF option must be specified If the FOP executable file has not been set in STYLEVISION with the Tools XSL FO Options command then the FOPBatFile option must be specified also If a FO file is generated by the command it is temporary and will be deleted after processing has been completed To generate PDF from an FO fo file call the FO processor directly from the command line there is no need to use STYLEVISION for this The verbose option provides a detailed report of all steps carried
340. raph No new paragraph will be generated for any descendant element There will be no whitespace between descendant elements and the output document structure and all local inline formatting will disappear The inline formatting of global templates will however be retained Change to Table The Change to Table option changes the component type of the selected element to a dynamic table It can be applied to elements with children it cannot be applied to attributes or to elements with no child How to specify table options is described in Creating dynamic tables Change to Bullets and Numbering The Change to Bullets and Numbering option changes the component type of the selected element to an itemized or a numbered list A new list item will be created for each instance of the selected element For usage of lists in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets see Lists Change to Image The Change to Image option changes the component type of the selected node element or attribute to an image that you browse for Change to Data entry device Data entry devices are input fields combo boxes check boxes etc The various types of data entry devices used in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet are described in the section Data entry devices You can change the component type of a selected node to a data entry device How to specify settings for the data entry device is described in Data entry devices 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chap
341. raphs Cause In the Design Document the node as opposed to the contents placeholder has been assigned the predefined Paragraph p format Solution Select the node and assign it a predefined format of Normal Then select the contents placeholder and assign it a predefined format of Paragraph p See Formatting the components In the PDF output a table does not fit within the page or its column widths are not as expected Cause Column widths for all columns have not been specified or column widths do not add up to 100 or actual width in length units of page Solution Place the cursor in the first column of the table select Table Table Properties select the Column tab and enter a width in percentage or length units Repeat for each column See Inserting a dynamic SPS table and Inserting a static SPS table STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Troubleshooting 187 An Auto Calculation does not update the XML node specified in the Auto Calculation dialog Cause 1 The XPath specified for the Auto Calculation does not use a value from the XML file and or 2 none of the nodes used in the Auto Calculation XPath has had its XML value modified In other words in order for a node in the XML file to be updated with the result of an Auto Calculation the XPath used in the Auto Calculation i must use at least the the value of one node in the XML file as an operand in the calculation and ii at least one of t
342. re defined formats in 226 Redo command 216 running from the command line 172 Select all command 222 setting up 25 setting up FO processor in Enterprise Edition 25 symbols 191 Table menu 237 terminology 14 Text Style 194 Text Style Window 27 Undo command 215 user manual 1 STYLEVISION features 16 STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 34 creating 34 creating from database 200 creating from schema 199 for DBs 159 opening 202 opening schema for 34 saving in HTML to XML conversion 347 setting up for DBs 161 and Authentic View 10 and document creation process 10 and Working XML File 204 and XSLT 7 assigning Template XML 263 auto add Date Picker 264 Block Style 194 bookmarks in 233 closing 27 conditional templates 134 conditional templates in 236 creating dynamic tables 123 creating lists 115 creating static tables 122 data entry devices 109 Date Picker 137 design process 29 for HTML and PDF in Enterprise 13 formatting of numeric fields 139 formatting text and components in 196 generating XSLT from 13 hyperlinks in 234 icons 191 images in 224 in document creation process 8 input formatting 139 insert auto calculation 235 insert Date Picker 231 inserting a horizontal line 228 inserting node contents in 229 inserting Rest of Contents in 230 inserting XML tables 261 lists in 227 namespaces in 95 on standard industry schemas 5 overview of tables in 119 page bre
343. refix as an attribute of the relevant element For example lt ATTLIST userman xmlns altova CDATA FIXED http www altova com Further elements must be declared in the DTD with the namespace prefix as part of the element name as for example lt ELEMENT altova titl PCDATA gt A valid XML document based on such a DTD would look something like this lt altova userman version 1 0 xmlns altova http www altova com lt altova title gt Some Title lt altova title gt lt altova userman gt In such a DTD you would have to define all elements and attributes with the namespace prefix as part of the name This means that when you create an XML instance document you are committed to the prefix you use in the DTD If you subsequently wish to change the prefix in the XML document then all the element and attribute declarations in your DTD would have to be modified You could gain a little flexibility by using parameter entities but clearly using a DTD to validate an XML document with namespaces is not an ideal strategy If you wish to use namespaces it is best to base your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet on an XML Schema In what follows the focus is on XML Schemas The topics covered are e Ageneral overview of namespaces in STYLEVISION e How STYLEVISION handles a schema with a single namespace e How STYLEVISION handles a schema that uses multiple namespaces 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVIS
344. resource folder or generate an error An alternative font may have different metrics and could therefore generate display errors If the formatter embeds a font in the PDF file then the PDF Viewer uses the embedded font The formatter may embed the entire character set of a font or only a subset that contains the glyphs used in the document This factor affects the size of the PDF file and possibly copyright issues surrounding font use see note below You might be able to influence the choice between these two options when you set the options for your formatter Using fonts in STYLEVISION e The default document font used in the PDF output is Helvetica Acrobat PDF Reader versions prior to 4 0 or Arial MT Acrobat PDF Reader version 4 0 or later For more on this subject see Base 14 fonts So if no font is specified for any text in the document Helvetica ArialMT will be used e f you specify Helvetica or Times in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and if the Acrobat PDF Reader used to view the PDF output from this STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is version 4 or higher then the PDF Reader will use Arial MT and Times New Roman PS MT respectively from its own font resources folder Acrobat PDF Reader does this even if Helvetica and Times are active on the system e In STYLEVISION you can change the default font for the entire document by selecting the document element in the Root Template and assigning the desired font to the font family att
345. ress as the parties may designate by notice given in the manner set forth above This Software License Agreement will bind and inure to the benefit of the parties and our respective heirs personal and legal representatives affiliates successors and permitted assigns The failure of either of us at any time to require performance of any provision hereof shall in no manner affect such party s right at a later time to enforce the same or any other term of this Software License Agreement This Software License Agreement may be amended only by a document in writing signed by both of us In the event of a breach or threatened breach of this Software License Agreement by either party the other shall have all applicable equitable as well as legal remedies Each party is duly authorized and empowered to enter into and perform this Software License Agreement If for any reason any provision of this Software License Agreement is held invalid or otherwise unenforceable such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the remainder of this Software License Agreement and this Software License Agreement shall continue in full force and effect to the fullest extent allowed by law The parties knowingly and expressly consent to the foregoing terms and conditions Last updated 2004 04 24 STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Index 377 Index A Add element attribute prompt 256 for Authentic View 256 Add to parent 271 HTML im
346. ribute in the Text tab of the Text Style window This font is assigned to each node in the document An alternative font can then be set for an individual descendant node and this value will be inherited by descendant nodes of that node e l fin the Tools XSL FO Options dialog you select FOP 0 20 5 compliant then only the font family values Helvetica Times Courier and Symbol exactly as spelled here will be passed through to the XSLT for FO Entering any other font family value on a node will remove the font family attribute from that node in the resulting FO document leading to the default Helvetica ArialMT being output for that node e If in the Tools XSL FO Options dialog you select Full usage of XSL FO standard then any font family you enter in the Text Style window will be passed to the XSLT for FO If the selected font is not available to the formatter an error may result In order to avoid such errors add alternative fonts and a generic fallback For example font family Bodoni Garamond serif In this example Garamond is a second choice and the generic serif is the fallback font STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use PDF processing and page layout 157 If neither Bodoni nor Garamond is available then the generic serif font is used The three generic fonts are serif Times or Times New Roman PS MT depending on the Acrobat Reader version sans serif Helvetica or ArialMT and monos
347. rl lt Notice that tags for all ancestors of para are created up to but excluding the containing ancestor which is OrgChart Now look at the Authentic or HTML Preview Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Nanonull Inc Nanonull Partners Inc Nanonull Europe AG The company was established in Vereno in 1995 and is privately held Nanonull has been actively involved in developing nanoelectronic software technologies since 1996 and released the first version of its products in February 1999 Due to the fact that nanoelectronic software components are so small that nobody can see it the company is not well known to the public On March 1st 2000 Nanonull established it s new office in Brenton MA This subsidiary primarily is responsible for marketing technical support and sales to key customers and partner networks In May 2000 Nanonull Europe was set up in Vienna At the start of the subsidiary s operations the team consisted of five research scientists and one administrative staff By the end of 2000 the number o research scientists had risen to nine Nanonull Europe will play the central role in all new research and will work closely with the Engineering team in Vereno All three Office Name elements are displayed before all the Office Desc para elements which are run together This is not the desired result What we want is the content of the first Office Name element followed by the content of the Desc
348. rmatted as a single paragraph Specifying Text Style properties 1 Select the contents placeholder of the OrgChart Name element Notice that the Text Style Window is enabled but the Block Style Window is disabled grayed out This is because the selected component is not a block It gives the appearance of being a block because it is on a line by itself This effect however was created by a line break which by itself does not make the component a block 2 Inthe Text Style Window select the Text tab and set the font to Arial 18pt bold font family font size font style font variant font weight text decoration text transform letter spacing line height Color Text 3 Now select the color tab and specify a color for the text The component in the Design Window displays the specified formatting 4 Check the Authentic or HTML Preview and make changes if required 5 Inthe Design Window select the contents placeholder of the Office Name element set the font to Arial 15pt bold and give it a color 6 Inserta line break before the office element 7 Check the Previews and take a look at the XSLT and XSL FO code STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Formatting the components 49 Your Authentic and HTML Previews should look something like this Nan hull Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Nanonull Inc The company was established in Vereno in 199
349. ronment for the everyday duties of any XML developer 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 362 Appendices Technical Background Information 11 1 5 Unicode Support Unicode is the new 16 bit character set standard defined by the Unicode Consortium that provides a unique number for every character e no matter what the platform e no matter what the program e no matter what the language Fundamentally computers just deal with numbers They store letters and other characters by assigning a number for each one Before Unicode was invented there were hundreds of different encoding systems for assigning these numbers No single encoding could contain enough characters for example the European Union alone requires several different encodings to cover all its languages Even for a single language like English no single encoding was adequate for all the letters punctuation and technical symbols in common use These encoding systems used to conflict with one another That is two encodings used the same number for two different characters or different numbers for the same character Any given computer especially servers needs to support many different encodings yet whenever data is passed between different encodings or platforms that data always runs the risk of corruption Unicode is changing all that Unicode provides a unique number for every character no matter what the platform no matter what the program
350. row 242 in table in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 242 Integer 139 formatting of 139 Internet 361 ISO IEC 10646 362 ISO 8895 x 363 J Japanese distributor of Altova products 307 Joining cells 246 247 248 249 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet tables 246 247 248 249 K Kanji 362 Katakana 362 Key Code 367 for your Altova software 301 L LAN 365 Legal information 366 Liability 369 Limitation of 369 License 366 367 368 369 Agreement 368 369 Metering 365 for your Altova software 301 Links 345 in HTML to XML conversion 345 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 62 specifying colors of in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 276 List properties 279 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 279 Lists 115 creating in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 115 in HTML to XML conversion 338 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 227 moving in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 178 Local templates 16 description of 16 Mail 361 Manually editing XSLT 182 MAPI 361 Marking 191 table data 191 Markup 318 320 in Authentic View 318 320 Memory 360 Mixed content 103 and global templates 103 Mixed markup mode 256 settings 256 Modifying schema 177 effect on STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet 177 effect on SPS 177 Modifying table properties 52 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 57 65 Modifyng table properties 80 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 80 Moving components 42 in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets 42
351. rrors if the Authentic View user uses table formatting properties that use these attributes Also see Tables XML Tables in the How To Use section of this documentation STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Authentic 263 8 8 4 Assign Template XML File The Assign Template XML command allows you to create an XML file as the Template XML File of a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet When a Template XML File has been assigned to a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet then an XML document template based on this XML file can be opened in Authentic View Such a template would have starting data from the Template XML File and would have its behavior controlled by the associated STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Note The Template XML file must conform to the same schema as that of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet to which it is linked Assigning a Template XML File To assign a Template XML File click Authentic Assign Template XML File select the required file and save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Changing the Template XML File To change the Template XML File click Authentic Assign Template XML File select the new Template XML File and save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Opening a template XML document For Authentic View users to open a template XML document they must do the following 1 Select File New in XMLSPY 2004 or AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition 2 Select a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet
352. rt 231 8 6 8 Date Picker The Date Picker is a graphical calendar in Authentic View with which the Authentic View user can enter the date for that xs date datatype element This date is entered in the XML document in the standard XML Schema format for dates YYYY MM DD The Date Picker command allows you to insert a Date Picker at the cursor insertion point This command is enabled only when the cursor is placed within the tags of an XML Schema xs date datatype element and if the element has been created as contents or an input field For a description of how to insert the Date Picker in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet directly the element is created or when an element is changed to contents or an input field see Date Picker in the How To section of this documentation For the formatting of dates see Input Formatting 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 232 User Reference Insert 8 6 9 Page With the Page command you can insert for paged media output either a page break HTML printouts and PDF and page number PDF These insertions are possible only at cursor insertion points Page Break Click Page Break to define a page break at the cursor insertion point The page break is displayed as a dashed line across the whole of the Design window In HTML output while the page break has no effect in the browser view a page break will be inserted when the browser view of the HTML file is printed out
353. rting the HTML file Importing the HTML file To import an HTML file into STYLEVISION for conversion to XML click the menu item HTML Import Open HTML file or File Open HTML file and select the required HTML file The selected file will be imported into the Main Window and a schema tree with a document element called Root will be created in the Schema Window 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 350 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Quick Reference 10 2 2 Building the schema tree 1 Creating HTML content as child or sibling When you select HTML content and drag it to a node in the schema tree you could create it as a child element or attribute or as a sibling element or attribute a sibling attribute is an attribute of the selected node s parent The icons that appear in either case are as follows Re Indicates creation as child node of the highlighted schema tree node Some nodes can have both children and siblings In these cases the icon for accepting siblings appears when the cursor is moved to the left side of the node To create a child or sibling node release the mouse button when the appropriate icon appears Indicates creation as sibling node of the highlighted schema tree node Converting HTML content to an XML node type After selecting whether the HTML content is to be created as a child or a sibling you select whether it is to be created as an element with or without the HTML con
354. ry Device Data in XML File Input Field Text Box Text entered by user Multiline Input Field Text entered by user Combo box User selection mapped to value Check box User selection mapped to value Radio button User selection mapped to value Button User selection mapped to value The values entered in the text input fields are entered directly as XML content For the other data entry devices the Authentic View user s selection is mapped to a value STYLEVISION enables you to define the list of options the user will see and the XML value to which each option is mapped Typically you will define the options and their corresponding values in a dialog Usage To create a data entry device do the following 1 Drag a node from the Schema window into the Design Window and drop it at the desired location 2 From the context menu that appears select the data entry device you wish to create the node as 3 For some data entry devices a dialog pops up In these cases enter the required information in the dialog and click OK To reopen and edit the properties of a data entry device right click the data entry device not the node containing it and select the menu option Edit Properties Alternatively click Properties Selected object Note e Datacan be entered in data entry devices only in Authentic View e Data entry devices can also be created by changing the current component type of a node to a data entry device See C
355. s pane 3 Click Start to generate and load the XML Schema An XML Schema with a structure corresponding to that of the DB with the selected tables is displayed in the Schema Window DB Schema 4 Document Root El lt gt DB Categories Employees Global Templates Categories Employees s Page Layout PDF Note that all the selected database tables are created in the XML Schema as children of the DB document element and as items in the Global Templates list After you have connected to the DB and generated the XML Schema you can use the full range of STYLEVISION features to design a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet for the DB Note e You can filter the data that goes into the temporary XML File See Edit DB Filter for details Note however that using a DB Filter does not in any way alter the XML Schema that was generated from the DB e You do not have to specifically assign a Working XML File in order to see HTML and PDF previews The automatically generated temporary XML file is used for this purpose 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 166 How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 5 12 2 DBFilters The data that is imported into the temporary XML file from the database can be filtered The database filter DB Filter can be created either within the database itself if this is supported in your database application or it can be created within the S
356. schemas that are authored or created by you via your utilization of the Software in accordance with its Documentation and the terms of this Software License Agreement are your property h Reverse Engineering Except and to the limited extent as may be otherwise specifically provided by applicable law in the European Union you may not reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code underlying ideas underlying user interface techniques or algorithms of the Software by any means whatsoever directly or indirectly or disclose any of the foregoing except to the extent you may be expressly permitted to decompile under applicable law in the European Union if it is essential to do so in order to achieve operability of the Software with another software program and you have first requested Altova to provide the information necessary to achieve such operability and Altova has not made such information available Altova has the right to impose reasonable conditions and to request a reasonable fee before providing such information Any information supplied by Altova or obtained by you as permitted hereunder may only be used by you for the purpose described herein and may not be disclosed to any third party or used to create any software which is substantially similar to the expression of the Software Requests for information from users in the European Union with respect to the above should be directed to the Altova
357. se Agreement and or the Privacy Policy as revised from time to time European users understand and consent to the processing of personal information in the United States for the purposes described herein Altova has the right in its sole discretion to amend the Software License Agreement and or Privacy Policy at any time You are encouraged to review the terms of the Privacy Policy as posted on the Altova website from time to time TERM AND TERMINATION This Software License Agreement may be terminated a by your giving Altova written notice of termination or b by Altova at its option giving you written notice of termination if you commit a breach of this Software License Agreement and fail to cure such breach within ten 10 days after notice from Altova Upon any termination of this Software License Agreement you must cease all use of the Software destroy all copies then in your possession or control and take such other actions as Altova may reasonably request to ensure that no copies of the Software remain in your possession or control The terms and conditions set forth in Sections 1 g h i 2 5 b c 9 and 10 survive termination as applicable RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE AND EXPORT RESTRICTIONS The Software was developed entirely at private expense and is commercial computer software provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS Use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government or a U S Government contractor or subcontractor is subject to t
358. sed applications because it is written entirely in C and thus does not require the overhead of a Java runtime environment Having documents in main memory is necessary to completely parse and analyze each document and to also improve the viewing and editing speed during normal work While editing a small to medium sized document up to 512kB is possible in as little as 2MB of RAM opening a 5MB document can consume up to 50MB during the initial parsing process Memory requirements are also influenced by the unlimited Undo history When repeatedly cutting and pasting large selections in large documents memory can rapidly be depleted STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Background Information 361 11 1 4 Internet Usage STYLEVISION 2004 is an integrated development environment for XML and as such will also initiate Internet connections on your behalf in the following situations e f you click the Request evaluation key code in the registration dialog the three fields in the registration dialog box are transferred to our web server by means of a regular http port 80 connection and the free evaluation key code is sent back to the customer via regular SMTP e mail All this communication is of course only initiated in response to a direct request from you XML is after all related to the Internet and thus any XML development tool must have access Internet protocols to provide an efficient envi
359. single template and the rules of this template are applied to each node in the nodeset in turn O Draha Location of logo contents Name contents Mame Office d ame dE Name Office OrgChart lt Creating a template for Office Name causes the names of all three offices to be output as shown below Nan null Location of logo nanonull gif Organization Chart Nanonull Inc Nanonull Partners Inc Nanonull Europe AG Conditional templates Conditions can be attached to a template This allows you to specify alternative processing for different XPath based conditions For example a condition can specify that a template apply only to the first node in a nodeset or that nodes with numerical values above a certain value be processed differently than those with a value equal to or less than that value contents xa First The screenshot above shows a condition inside the First field The condition checks whether the number of shares value of the Shares element exceeds the value 0 If it does the content of the First field is displayed in bold A second condition within the template shown below is an Otherwise template which causes no output to be displayed So if the value in the Shares field is 0 or does not exist then the content of the First element is not displayed or alternatively could be displayed in roman First First Auto Calculations An Auto Calculation evaluates an XPath
360. ssage filed is displayed Authentic Node Settings PhoneExt x J Content is editable Cancel r User Info r Additional validation with xPath valid when all Path results are true Error message Path expression Telep Parameters Parameters can be declared for the stylesheet This enables values to be passed to the stylesheet from the command line at processing time See Parameters for details Command line transformations and file generation STYLEVISION can be called from the command line to silently execute XSLT transformations and generate output files See STYLEVISION from the command line for details XPath support The internal XSLT processor supports all XPath 1 0 expressions and the full core function library XML input fields XML input fields or data entry devices are used to enter data into the XML document via Authentic View These input fields are text boxes combo boxes check boxes radio buttons and buttons They are useful for constraining the data that is entered into the XML file via Authentic View In the HTML and PDF output s data entry devices have presentational value only they cannot be used to enter data For a complete list and description of XML input fields see Data entry devices Layout and display formatting The XSLT processor creates an area tree which follows a model to which CSS and XSL FO properties can be applied In STYLEVISION these formatting properties
361. ssage in the User Info field of the Authentic Node Settings for the Location node This however does not prevent the user from going ahead and doing just what is not supposed to be done e Make the Location combo box non editable once an address element has been created for the Office and explaining this to the user in a pop up This effectively rules out the possibility of two address elements occurring inside an Of fice element Additional specifications for how the Location combo box is processed The objective is to make the Location combo box non editable after the address element corresponding to the Location selection has been created This prevents the possibility of a second address element being created Do this as follows 1 Select the Location element and insert a condition around it with the XPath not Address or Address EU Location 2not amp ddress US Koca c This creates a conditional template for the scenario where neither an Address nor an Address EU element exists for that Of fice element 2 Right click the Location node and select Authentic Node Settings or select Authentic Node Settings STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Tutorial Completing the stylesheet 89 Authentic Node Settings Location xj V Content is editable MV Show add Name when XML Element is missing DE When adding this content add In Mixed Markup Mode C Allits children
362. stered in numerous countries of Altova GmbH Patent s pending XML XSL XHTML and W3C are trademarks registered in numerous countries of the World Wide Web Consortium marks of the WSC are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio UNICODE and the Unicode Logo are trademarks of Unicode Inc This software contains material that iz 91334 1338 Dun daz S oftware Ltd all rights reserved The Sentry Spelling Checker Engine 92000 Wintertree Software Inc STLport 91333 2000 Boris Fomitchev 91934 Hewlett Packard Company 91936 37 Silicon Graphics Computer Systeme Inc 91337 Moscow Center for SPARC Techn ology Scintilla Copyright 91338 2002 by Neil Hodgson lt neilh zcintilla org gt All other names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction About STYLEVISION 5 2 1 About STYLEVISION STYLEVISION 2004 enables you to write stylesheets using a graphical interface You specify a schema DTD or XML Schema on which the stylesheet is to be based This loads the schema into STYLEVISION in the form of a tree hereafter called the source schema or just schema The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is then created by dragging and dropping nodes from the source schema STYLEVISION 2004 also enables you to view the contents of a database You design the display you want this is the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and preview the output in the
363. svncevacenseecabevnteodedeonsevedseervaccestens 88 5 How To Use 94 51 Namespaces E E 95 5 1 1 Namespaces and STYLEVISION ooo eese ener 96 5 1 2 Schemas with a single namespace ce eesceseceseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeenaes 98 5 1 3 Schemas with multiple namespaces seen eene 101 52 Global Templates EP 103 Did WData entiry devices ME P T 109 5 3 1 Inp t fields eee iret tete irae Hired eee cete oe epe ED PENES 111 5 3 2 Combo DOXES T 112 5 3 3 Check boxes onreine a i aa i A 113 S IM s 114 SCIEEPL M M 115 SEEN MC 119 S51 Creating static tables iiu tdt ere E PRU I sees De ette reti 122 5 5 2 Creating dynamic tables eese enne 123 5 5 3 Formatting static and dynamic tables eee 126 IIA DEMIS CaS qM n 128 23 6 JAuto CalculatiOls i4 eite Lent beste beret ur ener EE E drei ba EE leout oo t 132 23 4 Conditional templates ette teet eren po ota o EEES R EREK 134 3 8 Dat Pickets sii T 137 39 InputEormat ng tetto rente ee Pre Ree E IEE ENEN EEE E ENE 139 5 10 Parameters oie etre ettet teet asee aco ema shaved ves Duel Foe Edere rd epi ee PER ead PORE dca 146 5 11 PDF processing and page layout eerte tenete tnnt nonton onn thun 148 DLA PDF page defmition enint rd reete Econ ee
364. t in the example above at that location using the global template properties The element tags will be gray indicating that the element uses the global template If the element occurrence already exists right click the element in the Design window and click Use Global Template In the figure below the Desc element has been right clicked Since a global template exists for Desc the Use Global Template command appears in the context menu Change to Use Global Template Authentic Node Settings Insert contents Title Cut Umschalt Entf Copy Strg C Delete Remove All Text Styles The local template will be deleted and the global template will be used The element tags turn gray indicating that the element uses the global template Creating dynamic tables in global templates You can also create dynamic tables in global templates You do this in the same way you create dynamic tables in the Root Template The important point to note is that in a global template a dynamic table can only be created for descendant elements of the global template node it cannot be created for the global template node itself For example if you wish to create a 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 108 How To Use Global Templates dynamic table for the element authors within a global template then this dynamic table must be created within the global template of the parent
365. t select the article title A Sample Article 2 Drag the selection to the Article node in the schema tree till the pointer becomes a right and down arrow 3 Schema from HTML Import H Document Root om Digg El n A Sample Article This 1s a simple article marked up in HTML It is the example HTML document used to 3 This indicates that the selected HTML content will be created as a child node element or attribute of Article in other words that a child node of Article will be created around the selected content When you release the mouse button the following menu pops up Schema from HTML Import 4 Document Root Q Article Convert selection to elements Convert selection to attributes Surround selection with element 4 Select Convert selection to elements to create the selected HTML content as a child element node of Article Schema from HTML Import 4 Document Root Alt Article gt Birticie x Altova ewNode NevNoseg OKO DLKT AL ED Riicvnose 5 n the schema tree the new child node is created with a default name of NewNode That it is created as contents i e it has text content is indicated by the symbol In the Design Document the selected HTML content is converted to the familiar contents STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 335 placeholder of the
366. t Keys list box 3 Click the Remove button which has now become active To reset all keyboard assignments 1 Click the Reset All button to go back to the original installation time shortcuts A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm whether you want to reset all keyboard assignments 2 Click Yes if you want to reset all keyboard assignments Set accelerator for Currently no function is available Menu The Menu tab allows you to customize the main menu bar as well as the context menus right click menus STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Tools 293 L x Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options r Application Frame Menus r Context Menus Show Menus for Select context menu Default Menu bd a Create structure Reset 87 Header Footer Po Default application menu ppears when no documents Tree HTML Import are open Commands and drag the toolbar buttons into the menu Menu animations None X window v Menu shadows To customize a menu 1 Select the menu bar you want to customize Default Menu currently 2 Click the Commands tab and drag the commands to the menu bar of your choice To delete commands from a menu 1 Click right on the command or icon representing the command and 2 Select the Delete option from the popup menu or 1 Select Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog box and 2 Drag the command away fro
367. t Parameters i In this dialog enter parameter names without leading Default Value CA NY Cancel The following points should be noted e You can insert append edit and delete parameters for the entire stylesheet and for the DB Filters e Parameter names must begin with a letter and can contain the characters A to Z a to z 0 to 9 and the underscore Also see e For an overview of how parameters are to be used Parameters in the How To Use section e For details about working with DB Filters DB Filters in the How To Use section 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 222 User Reference Edit 8 5 8 Select all The Select all command Selects the entire contents of the Design Document window STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Insert 223 8 6 Insert The Insert menu provides commands enabling you to insert various items into the Design Document The relevant commands are also accessible via the context menu which appears when you place the cursor or select a component in the Design Document In some cases a command is additionally available as a shortcut and or as an icon in the toolbar 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 224 User Reference Insert 8 6 1 Image The Image command allows you to insert an image using an image location address that either comes from the XML document dynamic or is entered by you direc
368. t element in the Design Document should now look like this contents lt 2 Fis Check the Authentic Preview Notice that Frank Further has 0 shares and his First name is not displayed in the table This is because you have defined processing in the event that the condition is true but no processing if the condition is false as is the case with Frank Further since he has 0 shares You therefore have to define a condition to process the element in the event that the condition is false 8 To process the element s content when the above condition is false you must define a condition that specifies all the other eventualities not defined in the above condition Right click the condition and select Condition Add New The Edit XPath expression dialog appears 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 78 Tutorial Using Conditional Templates Edit XPath expression Expression Select Schema Attribute or Element Selection o tgChart Office Departm 9 Check the Otherwise box This condition covers all events not covered by the previously defined condition The First element in the Design Document now looks like this Notice that the conditional template is empty This means that no processing has been defined for it and as a result nothing will be displayed in the output 10 Place the cursor between the start and end tags of the condition right click and select Insert Contents The contents placeho
369. te the STYLEVISION 2004 for a period of up to 30 days free of charge During this evaluation period the software will start to remind you after about 20 days that it has not been licensed yet The reminder message will however only be displayed once every time you start the program If you would like to continue using the program after the 30 day evaluation period you have to purchase a SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE which is delivered in the form of a key code that you enter into the Registration dialog to unlock the product You can register and purchase your license on line by directing your browser to access our web shop at http www xmlspy com order On this page you will get detailed pricing information including multi user discounts and also find a list of authorized distributors and resellers If you want to share STYLEVISION 2004 with others please make sure that only the installation program is ever distributed It contains the application program grammar description sample files and this online manual as well as a quick Read Me file in one neat package Any person that receives the STYLEVISION 2004 software from you is also automatically entitled to a 30 day evaluation period After the expiration of said period any other user must also purchase a license in order to be able to use STYLEVISION 2004 For further details please refer to the SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE at the end of this manual 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004
370. te toten nee reine e er e RENE ene Eee nee Ld ER 16 3 Getting Started 24 3 1 Setting up STYLEBEVISI N riuie ern trece tratte then ie std ce ege Eea EAEren NEESS 25 3 22 JSTYEBVISION Interface uarie o De ens shed E eei tut oto idis eei ibus ese 27 3 3 Document design process 5e tete etiain ree EH Ee ee Ere POSEE eee a 29 4 Tutorial 32 4 Setting up the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet eee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 34 4 2 Processing attribute values for output sees eene nene 38 4 3 Including an image iere RR REP ERES n ROSE VK PEIUS Rae so pe nutes RS 40 4 4 Processing element content for output issesseeeeeeeeee nennen nene een nene nnne 42 4 5 Formatting the components cisini neret nhe nennen tenente tnter trees 47 4 6 Inserting a dynamic SPS table sese 32 4 7 Inserting a static SPS table seite rt eine FEE aia ia 57 4 8 Inserting bookmarks and hyperlinks eese 62 49 Using Auto Calculation eei iere cedens etos e e iate i i i 65 4 10 Using Conditional Templates sese 71 4 11 Creating the Table Footer rere tret tata tenet hein iis 80 4 12 Text formatting with global templates and text state icons eeeeeee 84 STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 4 13 Using Additional Validation essen eene nnne 86 4 14 Completing the stylesheet 2 ccicsceecesessonceesevendeansoonne
371. template causes the address content model for EU locations to be used if the value of Location is EU Include the Location element in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet as follows 1 Putaline above the Office Name element by making it a block Insert Format Block div and by assigning in the Layout tab of the Block Style Window suitable values for the following properties border top color border top style and border top width 2 Insert a line break after the Office Name element and type in Location 3 Dragthe Location element from the schema tree drop it immediately after the text Location and create it as a combo box The following dialog appears without any entries Edit Combo Box for Element Location Use schema enumerations Cancel Use list of values C Use XPath expression B 4 Click the Append Row icon twice to append two rows in the dialog box Enter the two values for US and EU as shown in the figure above The Visible Entry is the entry that will be visible in the combo box and available for selection The XML Value is the 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 72 Tutorial Using Conditional Templates corresponding value that will be entered in the XML file when a Visible Entry is selected 5 Click OK when done The Design Document will now look something like this Name contents Nane Location US amp Locatior The corresponding output in Au
372. tent or as an attribute If the HTML content is a list or table you have the additional options of whether the list or table should be converted to a corresponding element or attribute structure After you drag HTML content to the schema tree the following menu pops up when you release the mouse button This menu can also be accessed by selecting the following STYLEVISION menu options HTML Import Add to parent HTML Import Insert and HTML Import Append Convert selection to elements Convert selection to attributes Surround selection with element Convert selected table list to elements Convert selected tablejlist to attributes The commands of this context menu are described below Convert selection to elements The HTML content is inserted as an element or elements into the tree How many elements are created depends on the structure of the object The HTML content is created as a contents placeholder and becomes the content of the element node in the generated XML document Convert selection to attributes The HTML content is inserted as an attribute or as attributes into the tree The HTML content is created as a contents placeholder and becomes the content of the attribute node in the generated XML document Surround selection with element The HTML content is surrounded by an element No contents placeholder is created and the HTML content does not appear in the generated XML document The content wi
373. tent is included as follows First the required XML content element or attribute is dragged from the schema tree It is dropped into the Design Document as one of several types of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet components such as contents data entry device table etc Then further XSLT XPath processing can be specified for it Finally the required formatting is applied In this section you will learn how to include attribute values in your output Including an attribute as a data entry device In the schema tree you will see that the element CompanyLogo has an href attribute the value of which gives the location of the logo image Now let us say we want the user of Authentic View to specify what image should be used as the logo We can create the href attribute as an input field and the user can enter the location of the image here This is how 1 Inthe Design window place the cursor between the start tags of OrgChart and Name Press Enter to put the Name element on the next line 2 Drag the href attribute from the Schema Window into the Design Document Drop it just after the OrgChart start tag 3 In the pop up menu that appears select Create Input Field Your Design Document will now look like this P gt DraChart ComparwLogo A hret 4 Name contents Name OrgChart lt A The Authentic and HTML Previews will look like this the data comes from the Working XML File and is the value of the href attribute nanonull g
374. ter 9 Authentic View 314 Authentic View 9 Authentic View Authentic View enables you to edit XML documents based on STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets also called sps files or SPS files which are created in STYLEVISION Authentic View in Altova products The term Authentic View is used in this and other Altova documentation to refer to the view of an XML document that is controlled by a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and that enables you to edit an XML document graphically Authentic View is available in the Altova products listed below It does not refer to any one product alone e Asa separate view of the XML document within XMLSPY 2004 e Asa separate view of the XML document within AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition which is available free of charge e As a Browser Plug In for Internet Explorer AUTHENTIC 2004 Browser Edition which is available free of charge e Asapreview window in STYLEVISION 2004 see limitations below Authentic View in these Altova products are grouped as follows e The Authentic View interface available in XMLSPY 2004 and AUTHENTIC 2004 Desktop Edition is the same and is described in this documentation e AUTHENTIC 2004 Browser Edition presents the Authentic View interface in Microsoft s Internet Explorer window The available functionality is defined by the developer who creates the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and sets up AUTHENTIC 2004 Browser Edition The general editing functions are the same as in the XML
375. text strings by inserting the corresponding entities See Define Entities for details e What image formats can be displayed in Authentic View 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 324 Authentic View Authentic View How To 9 2 1 Using context menus When the cursor is placed within the document or when some part of the document is selected right clicking opens a context menu Context menus contain all available commands for that location or selection For example if the cursor is placed within an element the context menu will display items for inserting elements before after and within the current element applying clearing and removing elements and so on The figure below shows a complete context menu and the Insert submenu which is a list of elements that can be inserted within and before the current element above and below the line respectively Insert bold Append italic Insert Entity para Remove Office Umschalt Entf Strg C Strg Most of the commands available in the context menu are explained in Authentic View entry helpers and Authentic View Tutorial Remove element command Pointing over the Remove command pops up a menu list consisting of the selected element and all its ancestors up to the document element Click the element to be removed This is a quick way to delete an element or any of its ancestors Note that clicking an ancestor element will remove
376. than the licensed number of copies of STYLEVISION on the computers in your organization per seat license 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 302 User Reference Help 8 12 5 Order form The Order form command is a link to the Altova Online Shop Use this command when you wish to place an order for a licensed version of any Altova software STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Help 303 8 12 6 Support Center The Support Center command is a link to the Altova Support Center on the Internet The Support Center provides FAQs discussion forums where problems are discussed and access to Altova s technical support staff 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 304 User Reference Help 8 12 7 FAQ on the web The FAQ on the web command is a link to Altova s FAQ database on the Internet The FAQ database is constantly updated as Altova support staff encounter new issues raised by customers STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Help 305 8 12 8 Components download The Components download command is a link to Altova s Component Download Center on the Internet From here you will be able to download a variety of companion software to use with Altova products Such software ranges from XSLT and XSL FO processors to Application Server Platforms The software available at the Component Download Center is typic
377. the HTML or CALS table model The elements of the XML table from the example above could as easily be phonelist border 1 width 40 gt Ttems person lt name gt Name lt name gt lt phone gt Phone lt phone gt lt person gt lt person gt lt name gt John Merrimack lt name gt lt phone gt 6517890 lt phone gt lt person gt lt person gt lt name gt Joe Concord lt name gt lt phone gt 6402387 lt phone gt lt person gt lt items gt lt phonelist gt Also note the following e An XML table can be inserted at any location in the XML document where according to the schema a table is allowed e n Authentic View data is entered directly into table cells This data is stored as the content of the corresponding XML table element e The formatting properties of an XML table are assigned in Authentic View Note that XSLT stylesheets generated with STYLEVISION will not contain XML tables because the XML tables are not included in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Summary for designer From the document designer s perspective the following points should be noted e An SPS table occurs in the XML document at a location determined by the designer of the document not the user of Authentic View The structure and formatting of SPS tables are specified by the designer of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in STYLEVISION e The location structure and formatting of XML tables are specified by the user of Authen
378. the Authentic View user by means of an error message when the XML document is validated F8 The error message that is displayed is the text you enter into the Error message field of the Additional Validation setting Additionally if the selected node is contents invalid data is displayed in red in Authentic View and the error message is displayed on a mouseover STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Authentic 259 8 8 2 Text State Icons The Text State Icons command enables you to define an icon for a global element Once defined the icon can be displayed in the toolbar of Authentic View thus allowing the Authentic View user to insert an element around selected text by clicking the icon This feature is intended for elements that provide inline formating such as bold and italic fonts All global elements in the schema appear in the Global Templates list in the Schema Window To create a Text State icon do the following 1 Define a global template for the global element that is to get a Text State icon The formatting that you define for the global template will be applied to text when the Authentic View user clicks the Text State icon The screenshot below shows the global template for the italic element If the element you require is not available as a global element you must make it a global element if you wish to use this feature AB GS de p de dm 2 ig 3e C T Global Templates E Q
379. the entry will be red and you must declare it Declaring parameters from the Edit Database Filter dialog To access the Edit Parameters dialog in order to declare parameters do the following 1 Click the Parameters button in the Edit Database Filters dialog This pops up the Edit Parameters dialog shown below Edit Parameters i In this dialog enter parameter names without leading Parameter Name Default Value price 10 00 state CA date 2004 05 24 Cancel 2 Typein the name and value of the parameter in the appropriate fields Alternatively you can access the Edit Parameters dialog and declare or edit a DB Parameter by selecting Edit Edit Stylesheet Parameters Note The Edit Parameters dialog contains all the parameters that have been defined for the stylesheet While it is an error to use an undeclared parameter in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet it is not an error to declare a parameter and not use it After a DB Filter is created for a data table element that element in the Schema Tree is displayed with the filter symbol as shown for the Addresses element in the screenshot below STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 169 DB Schema Z Document Root El lt DB Articles Customers T Global Templates m Page Layout PDF Re ordering criteria in DB Filters The logic
380. the new May 2nd Final Recommendation XML Schema from the W3C and we are constantly tracking the W3C Schema Group s efforts and are actively participating in all Schema related discussions to provide you with a state of the art development environment STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Appendices Technical Background Information 359 11 1 2 Schema Dialects An important aspect of XML is the area of schemas and DTDs that define the logical structure or content model of an XML document STYLEVISION 2004 is the ideal tool that integrates schema and DTD creation while working with XML instance documents STYLEVISION 2004 supports both editing and schema validation of the following schema kinds e Document Type Definitions DTD Document Content Descriptions DCD XML Data Reduced XDR BizTalk XML Schema Definition XSD draft April 7 2000 CR Oct 24 2000 May 2nd 2001 Final Recommendation and can validate an XML instance document against any of the above schema dialects 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 360 Appendices Technical Background Information 11 1 3 OS amp Memory Requirements STYLEVISION 2004 is a modern 32 bit Windows application that runs on Windows 98 NT 4 0 Windows 2000 and Windows XP It requires a fair amount of memory to be installed in the system because it loads each document fully into memory On the other hand it typically requires less memory than many Java ba
381. the schema XML file XSLT stylesheet or STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet after having saved them you must open the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet to edit and then re save the required files The HTML content available for editing at this stage is what is available in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet as static text Note that unlimited Undo is supported so you can go back as many steps as you like You can also therefore save the schema XML file and stylesheets as often as you like without having to worry about not being able to undo your changes You can only create a Root Template for the XML document However all the elements you create in the schema tree are declared as global elements or as references to global elements If you need to use global templates for your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet you should save the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and then re open it the global elements will now be accessible in the Global Templates list Attributes are not allowed to be added to the schema tree by right clicking a node If you need to add an attribute independently of HTML content right click the relevant node create an element and then convert it to an attribute by right clicking and selecting Convert to attribute 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual Chapter 11 Appendices 356 Appendices 11 Appendices The appendices contain technical background information and licensing and distribution information relevant to
382. the selected element attribute appears in the title bar of the dialog Settings for content nodes and Auto Calculations The following Authentic Node Settings dialog appears when the contents data entry device etc or an Auto Calculation is selected STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Authentic 257 Authentic Node Settings PhoneExt h x J Content is editable Cancel m User Info r Additional validation with xPath valid when all Path results are true Error message Path expression Telephone extensions mt The name of the parent element attribute appears in the title bar of the dialog Authentic Node Setings The following node settings can be made to control the behavior of individual nodes in the Authentic View display Content is editable Checking this box enables the Authentic View user to edit the XML content of the node The check box is checked by default This setting is available when the selected node is an element attribute or contents Auto Calculation results cannot be edited this value is computed with the XPath expression you enter for the Auto Calculation Show add Name when XML Element is missing Checking this check box specifies that a prompt Add element attribute name will appear in Authentic View when the selected element or attribute is missing The check box is checked by default This setting is available when the selected node is an
383. thentic Preview will look like this Nanonull Inc Location Now specify the conditions that determine the selection of the appropriate address content model Do the following 1 Right click the Address element in the static table and select Insert Condition to insert a condition for the entire Address component in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet The Edit XPath expression dialog appears Edit XPath expression Expression r Select Schema Attribute or Element Select Operator Select Function Selection OrgChart Office Operator Operands Description Function any equal boolean any Z Document Root FUEL any not equal ceiling number 5 4 OrgChart number less concat string st number greater concat string st number less or equal contains string t CompanyLogo Q Name number greaterorequ count nodes DateToday number add false gt Office number subtract floor number Name number multiply last Notice that in the Select Schema Attribute or Element pane the office element is highlighted in gray This indicates that office is the context node and that the XPath expression will be created relative to it You can build the XPath expression by double clicking the required elements attributes operators and functions Alternatively you can type the correct XPath expression directly into the Expression field STYLEVISION 2004 User Manu
384. thin the newly created node is static and is part of the Root Template of the generated STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and XSLT You can format it as you do any template in STYLEVISION Convert selected table list to elements STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Quick Reference 351 The whole HTML table or list will be imported as elements into the XML tree Convert selected table list to attributes The whole HTML table or list will be imported as attributes into the XML tree When the selected HTML content is a table and you select either Convert selected table list to elements or Convert selected table list to attributes the following dialog box appears HTML Import selected table x as static table C as dynamic table Do you want to import the selected table r table grows f top down left right mi with header Cancel Creating the node as part of a table element is useful if the object is say a table cell and you wish to create an XML structure corresponding to the HTML table structure For a description of static and dynamic tables see Tables in STYLEVISION 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 352 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Quick Reference 10 2 3 Building the schema tree 2 You do not have to drag HTML content into the schema tree in order to be able to create elements You can dire
385. tic The node within which the conditional template is inserted is the context node A conditional template consists of one or more conditions The condition to be tested is specified in an XPath expression The content of the first condition to be evaluated as true is processed the other conditions in the template are ignored even if one or more of them evaluate to true Note therefore that the order in which the conditions are listed is significant e Optionally an Otherwise condition can be specified for the event that none of the previous conditions evaluates to true e f particular processing is required to match different conditions i e if the conditions are not mutually exclusive then separate conditional templates must be constructed for these conditions The non exclusive conditions should not be included in the same conditional template Usage 1 Place the cursor where the conditional output is required or select the node or static content or both around which the condition is to be created 2 Right click and select Insert Condition The Edit XPath expression dialog appears It looks like this Edit XPath expression Expression Select Schema Attribute or Element 4 Select Operator Select Function Selector are Operator Operands Description Function any equal boolean any Document Root any not equal ceiling number D OraChart bn number less concat string st OrgChar number gre
386. tic View The user may insert an XML table wherever this is allowed by the schema remember the table element corresponds to an element in the schema 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 122 How To Use Tables 5 5 1 Creating static tables To insert a static table click Table Insert table or the HB icon The following dialog appears x rir Columns Rows 3 Cancel v Use the whole available width eme You can select the dimensions of the table and specify whether the table should occupy the whole available width When you click OK an empty table with the specified dimensions as shown below is created You can now enter content into table cells using regular STYLEVISION features Cell content could be text or elements dragged from the XML tree or objects such as images and nested tables The figure below shows a table containing nested tables Telephone Office Home _ Static SPS tables are especially well suited for organizing XML data that is randomly situated in the schema hierarchy Deleting columns rows and tables To delete a column row or table place the cursor in the column row or table to be deleted and click the menu item Table Delete Column Table Delete Row or Table Delete Table respectively If you have nested tables the table immediately containing the cursor will be deleted when the Table Delete T
387. ting tools See Tables for a description of the various types of tables used in STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and CALS HTML Table properties for a description of how to enable XML tables for the Authentic View user 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 238 User Reference Table 8 7 1 Insert Table BH The Insert Table command inserts an empty static table into the design tab Selecting this command opens a dialog box which allows you to define the size of the table in terms of its rows and columns You can change this structure subsequently by appending inserting and deleting rows and or columns To insert a dynamic table see Creating dynamic tables STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 239 8 7 2 Delete table ES The Delete Table command deletes the static or dynamic table in which the cursor is 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 240 User Reference Table 8 7 3 Append Row EH The Append Row command appends a row to the static or dynamic table in which the cursor is STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Table 241 8 7 4 Append Column gd The Append Column command appends a column to the static or dynamic table in which the cursor is 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 242 User Reference Table 8 7 5 Insert Row Er The Insert Row command inserts a row above the
388. tion us 01 00 Note If you have created the xs date datatype element as contents or Input Field but without the Date Picker you can subsequently insert the Date Picker in your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet by placing the cursor at the desired location inside the element and clicking Insert Date Picker See Date Picker in the User Reference Limitation The Auto Calculation feature cannot be used for date based operations So you cannot for example use Auto Calculation to calculate the number of days between two values of the xsd date datatype STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Input Formatting 139 5 9 Input Formatting Function With Input Formatting the contents of numeric XML Schema datatype elements can be formatted for Authentic View and or HTML and PDF output as required Input Formatting can also be used to format the result of an Auto Calculation General mechanism The numeric XML Schema datatype element to be formatted must be present in the Design Document as contents or as an input field Select the contents placeholder or input field and apply the required formatting via the Input Formatting dialog Formatting can also be applied to an Auto Calculation field The formatting applies to Authentic View and optionally to HTML and PDF outputs The actual data in the XML file is stored in the standard format for that datatype Applying input formatting Input for
389. tional template If you selected Condition Add New the new condition is empty and you have to add the content to process and display when this condition is evaluated as true If you selected Condition Add Copy then the content of the newly created condition is a copy of the content of the selected condition you can modify this content as required 8 Tocreate an Otherwise template follow Step 6 to create another conditional template In the Edit XPath expression dialog check the Otherwise check box shown below The Otherwise check box appears if one conditional template already exists on that node static content or document fragment Edit XPath expression Expression Otherwise J Select Schema Attribute or Element Selection OrgChart Office Departm The Expression field is grayed out 9 Click OK to create the Otherwise template and then add or modify content for the template To change the order of conditions in a list of conditions in a conditional template right click the conditional template and use the Condition Move Up and Condition Move Down commands to set up the required order The order of the conditions in a conditional template is significant This is because the first condition in the list to be evaluated as true is processed the other conditions are then ignored To move a conditional template to a new location drag the conditional template to the desired location If the context n
390. tly in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet static To insert an image do the following 1 Click Insert Image or the Insert Image toolbar icon The Insert Image dialog shown below appears Edit Image Static Dynamic Static and Dynamic Dynamic Address I Schema Use above field to enter a dynamic Path Address Use button to select Schema content Treat as unparsed entity for XSLT transformation 2 Select the required tab Static Dynamic or Static and Dynamic and enter the address of the image location and or the XPath expression that locates the image address in the XML document The screenshot above shows how a Static and Dynamic address is entered The Dynamic part of the address varies and is the content of the current Department element Also see Including an image STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Insert 225 8 6 2 Paragraph T The Paragraph command inserts an HTML paragraph p element around the selected component A component is selected when the entire component is selected or when the cursor is placed inside the component Also see Formatting the components 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 226 User Reference Insert 8 6 3 Format The Format command allows you to assign a predefined format to the selected node The available predefined formats can also be selected from the combo box in the toolbar Normal m Also
391. tom border or enter the required values in the Edit Properties dialog 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 112 How To Use Data entry devices 5 3 2 Combo boxes A combo box presents the Authentic View user with a list of options in a drop down list The selected option is mapped to a value that is entered in the XML document The mapping of drop down list entry to XML value is specified in the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet Mappings can be made in one of three ways e From the schema enumerations for the selected node In this case the visible entry in the drop down list will be the same as the XML value e From alist defined in the Edit Combo Box dialog You enter the visible entry and the corresponding XML value which may be different e Froma node set in the XML document which is selected with an XPath relative to the current node The nodes in the selected nodeset are displayed as the entries of the drop down list and the list entry selected by the Authentic View user is entered as the value of the node The Edit Combo Box dialog is shown below Edit Combo Box i for Element Location Use schema enumerations Cancel Use list of values XML Value C Use XPath expression p To define the entries and values for the combo box do the following 1 Select the method with which you wish to define the entries and values by clicking the appropriate radio button 2 If you select Schema
392. tova GmbH User Reference HTML Import 273 8 9 4 Append Appends the selected item in the Design window to the currently active element attribute in the Schema window 1 Select an XML item to which the element attribute is to be appended in the schema window 2 Select the HTML item e g header or text you want to append and convert to XML in the Design Document window 3 Select the specific menu item from the list below Convert selection to elements Converts the HTML selection s in the Design Document window into an XML element Convert selection to attributes Converts the HTML selection s in the Design Document window into an XML attribute Surround selection with element Embeds the current HTML selection between an XML start and XML end tag Convert selected Table List to elements Converts the HTML selection even if the text cursor is only set in a table into an XML table where all HTML items are converted into XML elements Convert selected Table List to attributes Converts the HTML selection even if the text cursor is only set in a table into an XML table where all HTML items are converted into XML attributes 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 274 User Reference HTML Import 8 9 5 Settings The Settings command allows you to define the specific HTML import settings HTML Import Settings x Import whitespace texts Import empty cells from table list Cancel
393. tree you create The STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and XSLT are based on the Design Document STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 331 10 1 HTML to XML Tutorial In this tutorial you will learn how to convert an HTML page into an XML document You will do this by creating a schema which STYLEVISION will then use to generate the XML document You should note that the Design Document view of STYLEVISION which displays a browser view of the source HTML document is simultaneously a view of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet You can save this STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and also generate an XSLT from it In this tutorial you will create and generate e An XML Schema article xsd e An XML file based on this schema with content from the HTML document article xml e ASTYLEVISION Power Stylesheet article sps e An XSLT stylesheet article xslt For this tutorial you require the file article html which is in the Altova STYLEVISION 2004 Examples folder This tutorial consists of the following broad steps 1 Open the file article html 2 Create the schema tree this part forms the bulk of the tutorial 3 Generate and save the output files If you need more details about STYLEVISION features that are used to create STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets please see the STYLEVISION Tutorial and User Reference 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 332 HTML to XM
394. ts on the one hand and the PDF output on the other For the most part the differences are subtle and do not need your special attention One component that needs to be checked is the table Since table and column widths for tables in PDF must be explicitly specified it is important to check the PDF Preview when you create or modify a table Note also that the PDF Previews described in this tutorial have been generated using FOP as the FO processor If you use another processor the PDF output may be rendered differently than shown in this tutorial You should also test the Authentic View of the Working XML File by editing the file in Authentic Preview The Authentic Preview is different from the HTML Preview in that the Working XML File can be edited in Authentic Preview but not in HTML Preview As a result dynamic functionality such as Auto Calculations and Conditional Template processing can be tested in Authentic Preview but not in HTML Preview Remember that the previews you see in STYLEVISION are of the Working XML File you have assigned to your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet If you modify and re save your Working XML File outside STYLEVISION subsequent to opening a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet that uses the Working XML File then you must close and reopen your STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet in order to see the changes in the revised XML document Note that you can also save changes to the Working XML File from Authentic Preview see Save Authentic X
395. ttom of the schema tree If you like you can drag them up the tree till they are just below Article 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 344 HTML to XML Conversion HTML to XML Tutorial 10 1 8 Importing an HTML image Now you will import an image into the XML file STYLEVISION recognizes an HTML image and imports the value of the img elements src attribute as the content of element or attribute according to how you want this content created Creating the image source as attribute value To import the image as an attribute value of an element do the following Create an element Logo as a child of Article Select the image in the Design Document Drop it in the schema tree as a child of the Article element In the context menu that appears select Convert selection to attributes Enter Location as the name of the attribute gu ON If you now check the XML file you will find the element Logo at the bottom of the document and that the value of the image s src attribute has been imported as the value of the Location attribute Logo Location altova gif You can move the element Logo to alternative locations in the schema tree Your schema tree should now look something like this Schema from HTML Import H Document Root Article Copyright Year lt Logo ae Location C Title Para Unorderedlist 4 Section Creating the image source as element value Altenative
396. ty element is a different element in each of the address content models US and EU address content models a condition must be created to select the correct city element Do this as follows 1 2 Oop Right click the Address element in the Office Summary line and select Insert Condition In the Edit XPath expression dialog the context node is Of fice Enter the XPath Address and click OK This creates a conditional template in which the condition tests for the presence of an Address child element The Design Window will look like this Street postee contents ipo stree City pocity contents Macity State amp Zip postate contents Xipe state po zip contents 4 Address 2 P Address AAddress dipo city ZC M DO A Office Summary The Address ipo city elementis the correct child of the Address element so do not alter the content of this conditional template The result is that when the address element is Address the content of the Address ipo city element will be selected Right click the conditional template tag and select Insert Condition Add New In the Edit XPath expression dialog enter the XPath Address EU and click OK Drag the Address EU ipo city element into the Design Window and create it as contents of the new conditional template The Design Window will look like this 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 76 Tutorial Using Conditional Te
397. u wish to have menus displayed with a shadow around it select this option All menus will then have a shadow Options The Options tab allows you to customize additional features of the toolbar CI x Commands Toolbars Keyboard Menu Options Toolbar v Show ScreenTips on toolbars MV Show shortcut keys in ScreenTips Large Icons Screen Tips for toolbar items will be displayed if the Show Screen Tips option is checked The Screen Tips option has a sub option for whether shortcuts where available are displayed in the Screen Tips or not Toolbar items can also be displayed as large icons To do this check the Large Icons option See also Tools STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Tools 295 8 11 4 XSL FO Options The XSL FO Options opens a dialog in which you specify settings for the processing of the XSL FO document These settings are required in order to enable the PDF Preview XSL FO SL FO Generation FOP 0 20 5 compliant C Ful usage of XSL FO standard FO Processor C Program Files Altova FOP fop bat Please enter here path to fop bat file Biowse for XSL F transformations Once these settings are correctly made each time the PDF Preview tab is clicked the following happens 1 An XSL FO document is generated behind the interface by processing the Working XML File with the currently active STYLEVISION Power St
398. ve negative symbols field can be any datatype specific formatting or text and ield option s is an optional qualifier that enables additional formatting options e Any number of fields can be specified and any two fields can be separated by the following characters space hyphen comma colon period or by a text string in single or double quotes Note however that fields do not need to be separated e One or more optional field options are allowed per field The field option s for each field must be contained in curly braces and must follow the field without any intervening space Multiple options are separated by comma Example for an xs date datatype element DD Month uc ro YYYY where uc and ro are field options for making the Month field uppercase and read only respectively An example of the output would be 24 SEPTEMBER 2003 Example for an xs decimal datatype element n 440 00 Examples of the output would be 25 00 25 42 267 56 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 142 How To Use Input Formatting Field types You will find examples for the datatype specific field types in the drop down menu of the Input Formatting dialog The following tables list the available field types Field Type Explanation Space if no digit at position 0 Zero if no digit at position j Digit separator
399. veTotal 8 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 80 Tutorial Creating the Table Footer 4 11 Creating the Table Footer A table footer can contain both static and dynamic content and can therefore be used to display summaries of data in the table You can also insert append and delete footer rows as well as split and join cells thus allowing you considerable flexibility in designing footers In this section we will create the following summaries for the Department Person dynamic table e Number of employees in the department and this number as a percentage of Office employees and Company employees e Number of shares held by Department members and this number as a percentage of shares held by Office shareholders and Company shareholders e A list of all non shareholders in the department Before starting delete the summary auto calculation in the footer of the Extensions column which sums up the telephone extension numbers of employees This summary was created when the table was created because you checked the Summary for Numeric Fields checkbox and because the PhoneExt element is defined as an integer datatype To delete the summary auto calculation click it and press Delete Note that when the cursor is in the footer the context node is Department Summarizing the shares in departments 1 Place the cursor in the Shares column footer and click fa or Table Join Cell Right thr
400. vert selected Table List to attributes Converts the HTML selection even if the text cursor is only set in a table into an XML table where all HTML items are converted into XML attributes 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 272 User Reference HTML Import 8 9 3 Insert Inserts the selected item in the Design window above the currently active element attribute in the Schema window 1 Select click the XML item above which the element attribute is to be inserted in the schema window 2 Select the HTML item e g header or text you want to insert and convert to XML in the Design Document window 3 Select the specific menu item from the list below Convert selection to elements Converts the HTML selection s in the Design Document window into an XML element Convert selection to attributes Converts the HTML selection s in the Design Document window into an XML attribute Surround selection with element Embeds the current HTML selection between an XML start and XML end tag Convert selected Table List to elements Converts the HTML selection even if the text cursor is only set in a table into an XML table where all HTML items are converted into XML elements Convert selected Table List to attributes Converts the HTML selection even if the text cursor is only set in a table into an XML table where all HTML items are converted into XML attributes STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Al
401. w where it can be modified If the global template for an element is removed by right clicking the global template entry and pressing Remove Global Template the sign disappears gt Page Layout PDF When a page layout has been defined for a page component that component is displayed in the Page Layout list with a sign in front of it Design Window symbols and icons Element and attribute symbols can be moved around using drag and drop in the Design window The standard Cut Copy and Paste commands can also be used The following symbol and icons are displayed in the Design Window l contents Root element tags contents Placeholder for XML content of that element It corresponds to the xs1 apply templates rule You can select the placeholder and apply formatting to it this formatting will be applied to the XML content of the element You can also delete the contents placeholder P Blova gt Person contents Person Altova 47 Start and end tags of elements An element inserted from the schema tree is inserted with the correct ancestors relative to the location into which it is dropped Bltova Person q A contracted element tag Tags can be expanded contracted by double clicking 8Mar contents Mar Attribute tags contain the amp prefix contents An input field The width can be adjusted by dragging the right STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Refere
402. wer Stylesheet in STYLEVISION e An XML file can be assigned a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet at any time in a Authentic View product e Oncea STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet has been assigned to an XML document the latter can be opened in Authentic View and edited it is an XML document like any other The diagram below illustrates these concepts Document Design as Cbr qeu dies deu quer qui Template I XML P with XSLT stylesheets to obtain HTML and PDF output Note Authentic View a a a ER Content Editing and Document Output N Additional Document 1 1 An XML Document created in Authentic View can be processed outside Authentic View l l l l l l l l Printer l l l Output UU o n When a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is based on a DB an XML Schema file and an XML file are created internally from the DB They hold respectively the structure and data of the DB STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH Introduction STYLEVISION concepts and terminology 15 HTML and PDF Preview files based on the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet and that use the internal XML file as the Working XML File are also generated internally and displayed in the Preview Windows All these files plus the XSLT stylesheets generated from the STYLEVISION
403. window then that text property applies to text in all the cells of the table If you wish to have some property apply to the text of one particular cell only you must select that text and assign the required property in the Text Style window e The Block Style Window is also useful to specify formatting properties fot table cells that STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH User Reference Text and Block Style Windows 195 are not available in the Table Properties dialog Place the cursor in the required cell and specify a value for the required property in the Block Style Window Also see Document design process and Formatting 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 196 User Reference Formatting 8 3 Formatting Formatting can be applied to a selected component in one of or any combination of the following three ways e By selecting a pre defined format e By specifying values for Block Style properties e By specifying values for Text Style properties To assign formatting to a component select it and then use one or more of the three methods listed Each method is explained below Pre defined formats STYLEVISION has a number of pre defined formats the properties of which you cannot change When you apply a pre defined format to a component the formatting markup is created around the selected component When an element or attribute is created in the Design Document it is assigned the Norm
404. wing output from within the STYLEVISION interface File Save Generated Files or from the command line e The generated XML Schema based on the DB structure e The generated XML File e The XSLT for HTML output 2004 Altova GmbH STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 160 How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION The XSLT for FO for PDF output The HTML output file The FO output file The PDF output file How you generate output files is described in Generating output files from the DB STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual 2004 Altova GmbH How To Use Databases in STYLEVISION 161 5 12 1 Connect to a DB and set up the SPS Setting up a STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet for a DB consists of two broad steps e Browsing for the DB file in the case of a MS Access DB or explicitly building a connection string for all other DBs except MS Access DBs Note that only ADO connections are supported This is because ADO s shape command support enables data to be generated hierarchically e Selecting the Base Table information which enables you to select what tables from the database to import The temporary XML Schema that is generated and the XML file that is created will be based on the selected data tables These steps are described in detail below Select the DB type 1 Click File New from DB The following dialog is displayed Select a Source Database i x Please select a source database or a stored connection and click on next
405. with the transaction type of goods Credit Note l shipped or method of shipment Status Draft Final Ammended Required Optional General Information References and other general information pertaining to the contract and this document Date of Issue yyyy imm d Document Creator Identifer Docuement Number Number Contract Id add contractExtension add documentVersion add contractT yr TransactionNumber add buyerContractldentifier add sellerContractldentifier add brokerContrac Invoice What this means for you the designer of the STYLEVISION Power Stylesheet is that you can easily customize any of the supplied STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets Standard industry STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets are available in your STYLEVISION 2004 application folder in the Examples IndustryStandards folder STYLEVISION 2004 documentation The STYLEVISION 2004 documentation consists of the following sections An Introduction which shows the relationship between STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and Authentic View explains how STYLEVISION is used with databases describes the benefits of using Authentic View and explains the concepts behind the working of STYLEVISION Power Stylesheets and Authentic View A description of how to set up STYLEVISION and an explanation of the STYLEVISION interface Getting Started A tutorial to get you started using STYLEVISION A How To Use section for commonly used S
406. ylesheet 2 The XSL FO is then processed by an FO processor to generate the PDF that is displayed in the PDF Preview window FO Processor You can use any FO processor of your choice All you have to do is enter the path to the processor s executable in this dialog For details see Setting up STYLEVISION XSL FO Generation Selecting the FOP 0 20 5 compliant option filters out those FOP properties that have not yet been implemented in the latest version of FOP Selecting the Full XSL FO standard option will not filter out any properties when the XSLT for FO is being generated Depending on your selection the XSLT for FO will be created with or without the objects properties and values that are beyond the compliance level of FOP 0 20 5 You should be aware of the possible outcomes from this point in the processing These are as follows e f you have selected FOP compliance and use FOP as your processor then the PDF generation should work fine e f you have selected full usage of the XSL FO standard and use FOP as your processor then any formatting object or property in the FO document that is not supported by the current version of FOP will cause FOP to generate either a warning or an error An error is fatal and no PDF will be generated e f you use a processor other than FOP the success of the transformation will depend upon the compliance level of the processor For standard use we recommend using FOP and selecting FOP 0 20 5 co

STYLEVISION 2004 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents